Electronically-controlled, adaptive automatic transmission system

t 320060 ~N FaEc~RnNicALLy-ooNT~oLLeD ~ETIU~ ADnCYa~lC l~nNs~IssIsN SYST~M 1.

Fie1d o~ ~ ~ The present invention relates to an autcmatic transmussion primarily intendea for motor vehicle use, and more particularly, to an "adaptive" transmission that is controlled electronically and hydraulically, 2. nb#cription of ~El~bed Art Generally speakLng, land vehicles require three ~asic oomponents. mese components comprise a power plant ~such as an internal ccmbustion engine) a pcwer train and wheels. The internal combustion engine produces foroe by the conversion of the chemical energy in a liquid fuel into the mechanical enexgy of motion (kinetic energy). me function of the pcwer train is to transm1t this resultant ~ ~orce to the wheels to provide m~venent of the vehicle.

: The power train's main ~ nent is typically referred to as the "transmlssiQn". Engine torque~ and speed are oonverted in the transmission in accord3n oe wi~h the tractlve-pcwer demand of the vehicle. The ~ehicle's transmission is also capable of oontrolling the direct~cn of rDtation being applied to the wheels, so that the vehicle may ~e driven both forward and kackward.

A oonventional tran~mlssion includes a hyd~sdyn~nic torque converter t3 transfer engine torque from the engine cranXshaft to a rotatable input ne~ber of the tran~mission through fluid~flow forces.

; ' ' ' '''t~ ~ .~",,. ~ ` ` 1 320060 The transmission also includes frictional ~mits which couple the rotating mput member to one or m~re members of a planetary gearset.

Other frictional ~nits, typically referred to as brakes, hold members of the planetary gearset stationary durmg the flaw of power. m ese frictional units are usually brake clutch assemblies or band brakes.

The drive clutch assemblies can couple the rotating input member of the transmussion to the desired elements of ~he planetary gearsets, while the brakes hold elements of these gearsets stationary.

Such transmission systems also typically provide for one or m~re planetary gearsets in or~er to provide various ratios of ~orque and $o ensure that the available torque and ~he respective tractive power demand are matched to each other.

Transmissions are generally referred to as manually actuat~d or autamatic transmlssions. MLanual transmissions generally include mechanical mechanisms for coupling rotating gears to prcduce different ratio outputs to the drive wheels.

Automatic transmissions are designed to take automatic control of the frictional units, gear ratio selection and gear shiftin~. A thorough description of general automatic transmission design principals may be fcund in "Fundamental Of Automatic T.ransmissio~ and Transaxles," Chrysler Corporation Training Manual Nb. TM~508A. A~ditional descriptions of automatic transmissions may be found in U.S.

Patent Nv.

3,631,744, entitled "Bydromatic Tran~is~ion," issued on January 4, 1972 to Blcmquist, et al., and U.S.

Patent No. 4,289,048, entitled "Lcck-up System For Tbrgue Cbnverter," issued on September 15, 1981 to MLkel, et al.

1 3~006 In general, the major oomponents featured in such an automatic transmission are: a t~rque converter as above-mentioned; fl~lid pressure-operated m~lti-plate drive or brake clutches and/or brake bands which are connected to the individual elements of the planetary gearsets in order to perform gear shifts without in~errupting the tractive power;

one-way clutches in conjunction with the fric~ional units for optimi~ation of power shifts; and tran3nission controls such as valves for applying and releasing elements to shift the gears ~instant of shifting), for ~nabling power shifting, and for choosing the proper gear (shift point ~n~rol), dependent on shift-program selection by the driver ~selector lever)~ accelerator position, ~he engine condition and vehicle .speed.

The control system of the automatic transmlssion is t~pically hydraulically operated through the use of several valves to direct and regulate the supply of pressure. This hydraulic pressure oontrol will cause either the actuation or deactuation of the respective frictional units for effecting gear changes in the transmission. The valves used in the hydraulic control circuit ty,picaily comprise spring-~ia~ed spcol valves, spring-biased accumulators and ball check valves. Since many of these valves rely upon springs to provide a predetermined Emount of orce, it will be appreciated that each transmission ~esign represents a finely tuned arrangement of interdependent valve oomponents. While this type of transmission control ~ystem has worked well over the years, it does ha~e its limitations. For example, such hydraulically oontrolled transmissions are genera~ly limited to one ox a very æmall number of engines and vehicle designs. Therefore/ considerable oost is incurred by an autom~bile nanufac~urer to desi~n, test, buildl inventory and -- 3 - 1 320060 repair several different transmission units in order to provide an acceptable broad mcdel line for consumers.

Additionally, it should be appreciated that such hydraulically controlled transmission systems cannot readily adjust themselves m the field to compensate for varying conditions such as normal wear on the co~pone~ts, temperature swqngs and changes in engine performance over time. While each transmission is designed to operate most efficiently within certain specific tolerances, typical hydraulic control syste~s are incap~ble of taXing self oorrective action on their own to maintain operation of the transmission at peak efficiency.

However, in recent years, a m~re advanced form of transmission control system has been proposed, which wculd offer the possibility of enabling the transmission to adapt itself to changing conditions. In this regard, U.S. Patent No. 3,956,947, issued on May 18, 1976 to Leising, et al., sets forth a fundamental development in this field. Specifically, this patent discloses an automatic transmission design which features an "adaptive" control system that meludes electrically operated solenoid-actuated valves for controlling oe rtain fluid pressures. In accordance with this electric/hydraulic control system, the auto~atic ~ransmission w~uld be "responsive" to an acoeleration factor for controlling the ou~put torque of the transmission during a shift from one ratio of rotation (between the input and output shafts of the transmission) to another.

Specifically, the operation of the solenoid-actuated valves wculd cause a rotational speed versus time curve of a sensed rotational ocmponent of the transmission to substantially ~ollow along a predetermined path during shifting.

-- 4 - A , . . .

1 320060 3. ob~ec~s o~ The P~esent Ih~ention It is one of. the principal objects of the present inVentiQn to prc~ide a significantly advanced electr~nically controlled transmission T~hich is fully adaptive. By ~ully adapti~e, it is meant that subs~antially all shifts are ~ade us mg closed-loop oontrol (i.e.

c~ntrol based on feedback~. In particular, ~he co~trol is closed loop on speed, speed ratio, or slip speed of either Nt ~turbine of the torque converter) and Ne tengine) or a co~bination of Nt and No (output) which will provide the speed ratio or slip speed. mis transmission control is also capable of "learnlng" frc~ past experience and making appropriate adjustments on that basis.

It is another object of the present in~Tention bo pnDvicle a ~our-speed automatic transmission design which can be readily utilized in conjunction with a variety of engines ancl ~ehicle sizes and types, Lncludmg vehicles presently using oonventional, mechanical-hyc~aulic only automatic transmission systems.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an automatic trans~ission m which the shi~t quality is maintai~ed approxlmately uniform regardless of the engine size, wlthin engine performance variations or component condition (i.e. the transmission control~system will adapt tD changes in engine perfoxmance or in the oondition of the various frictional unlts of the transmission).

It is an additional obiect of the present invention tD eliminate the need for a fe~ certa m elem~nts Iclutches, bands, one-way clutches) which are nonmally r ~ ired to provide acoeptable shift guality.

It is a more specific object of the present invention to pro~ide a unique clutch and gear arrangement which, relative to today's - 5 1 320060 three-speed units, eliminates the need for additional gears of the gear assembly and one over-running (o~e-way) clutch, while requiring only one more friction element to increase the ccmpactness and decrease the axial length of the trans~i~sion. Since the electronic controls of the present invention eliminate the nee~ for ~he low gear over-running clutch, the gearset pinions are not forced to spin at high speed when the vehicle is tcwed backward. This reduces the need for lubrication and permits substantially unrestricted rearward or forward tGwingO It is a further object of the present :invention to achieve exceptionally s oth, yet quick kichdown shifts (iOe. seoond to first gear), and in so doing, make any po~ertrain feel more responsive withcut increasing harshness. Being adaptive, these controls will be capable of compensating for changes m engine or friction element torque, and provide consistent shift quality over the life of the transmission.

Another object of the present invention is to provide a partial lock-up node of operation (reducing slip between the turbine of the torque converter and the engine) which allcws use of the efficient lock-up feature under conditions which normally must be avoided because of torsional vibrations.

It is a further ob~ect of the present invention to provide oomprehensive, on-board transmission diagnostics which will allcw service personnel to `test the integrity of the oontrols without requiring a rDad test.

A - 1 320060 This application is one of sevPral applications filed by the applicant on April 27, 1987 anA having similar Disclosure and Drawings, these applications being identified helow:

Serial Nos.

598,107 598,118 5g~,119 598,120 598,121 ' 7 :

.

1 3~0060 Tb achieve the ~oregoing objects, the present mvention provides a comprehensive four-speed automatic transmissio~ system. ~hile this transmission svstem particularly features a ~ully adaptive electronic control system, numerous other important advances are incorporated into this unique transmission system, as will be described below in detail.

The transmission control system includes a microcomputer-based controller which receives input signals indicative of engine speed, turbine speed, output speed (vehicle speed), throttle angle poSition, brake application, predetenmined hydraulic pressures, the driver selected gear or operating condition (PRNODDL), engine ooolant temperature, and/or ambient temperature. This controller generates command or oontrol signals for causing the actuation of a plurality of solenoid-actuated valves which xegulate the application and release of pressure to and frGm the frictional units of the transmission system.

Accordinglv, the oontroller will execute predetermined shift schedules stored in the memory of the oontroller through appropriate command signals to the solenoid-actuated valves and ~he feedback which is provided by various input signals.

Another prim3ry feature of the present mvention is to provide an adaptive system based on closed-loop ~ontrol. In other words, the adaptive control sysbem performs its ~unctions based cn real-tLme feedback sensor information, i.e. the system takes an action which affects the output, reads the effect, and adjusts ~he action _ 8 _ ~ .

: A 1 320060 contLnuously in real-time. This is partic~larly advantageous because the oontrol actuations can be correc*ed as opposed to an open loop control in which signals to ~arious elements are processed ~n accordance with a predeterm med program.

In accordance with one aspect of the pres~nt invention, ~he oDntrollex is programmed to "learn" from the results of its operation.

For example, the controller wlll calculate the required friction element fill time based upon a historical calculation of the clutch fill volume ~i.e. volume of fluld tD fill the clutch apply cavity3. This form of adaptive control will make calibration of the transmission to new engines and vehicles substantially easier tD accomplish. The oontroller is also capable of permitting the operator to select between various modes of desired transmission shift-pattern cperation, such as fuel economy or pcwer. Additionally, the controller will also be c~oable of providing a complete set of on-board diagnostics.

Other features of the transmission control sy~stem include the ability to provide a partial tor~que converter lock-up n~de of operati~n an~ an adap~ive-idle m~de of cperation, which ~oth may achieve sigm ficant gains in fuel economy. For ex~mple, the adaptive-idle mDde ~effectively puts the transmission in "neutral" when ~he engine i5 idlillg a~d the brakes are applied. The partial lock-up mode allows lock-up at relatively low oper~ting speeds (e.g. 15 m.p.h. or 1000 engine r.p.m.), once ~he coolant temperature is above a predeterm~ned munimum value.

In addition t~ the advantages offered by ~he ad2pti~e control system, the prese~t ~nvention achieves the comblna~ion of thls con~rol system wlth a ~nique four-speed transaY.le structure which reqyires fewer components and is smaller than previous four-speed ~ransmission s~stems.

A 9 1 320060 ~or example, the ~our-speed trans~ission system according to the present mvention is capable of fitting into ~he space made available for a conventional three-speed transmission system.

While the transmission system accordiny to t~ present invention includes electronic control features, it is also designed to provide limited operation in the absence of electrical ~xMwer as well~ For example, the arrangement and structure of the s~lenoid-actuated valves in the hydraulic circuit enable a limp-home m~de of operation, which will permit the vehicle to cperate in park, neutral, second or reverse gear as desired in the absence of electrical po~er to the solenoidactuated valves.

Additionally, the four-speed transmission system features a simplified clutch and gear arrangement, which does not require over-running clutches. The clutch configuration utilizes shared reaction plates, bleeder ball check valves to keep the clutch apply cavities filled with fluid, and h~draulically balanced pistons for preventing oe ntrifugal pressure from applying the clutches.

With respect to the sDlenoid-actuated valves used in this transmissicn system, these ~olenoid-actuated valves have been designed to ~e direct-acting and have a ~Dn-close-clearance design to prevent dirt or othex oontaminapts from interfering with the qperation of these valves. A solenoid switch valve is also provided in the hydraulic circui~ in order bo provide reliable protection ~nd t3 permit a double use of one of these ~Dlen~id-actuated valves.

, /o , ., . , ~ , .

1 320060 ~rief Descr ~ o~ ~be D~a~ s Other objects, ~eatures and advantages of the present invention wnll beoame more ~ully apparent from ~he following detailed description of the prefe~red embodLment, the appended claims and in the accompanying drawings in which:

Figures lA-E illustrate one ph~sical ~mbodiment of the trangmission acocrding t~ the present mvention; Figure LA is a perspective view, partially broken away of the transmission; Figure lB is a sectional elevational view of one embodiment of a transmission constructed acoordlng to the present invention; Figure lC is a partial æectional elevational view of one half of ~he transmission of Figure lB;

Figure lD is a partial sectional elevational view of the other half of the trans~ission of Figure lB; and Figure lE is a schematic diagram of the transmission of Figures lA and lB;

Figures 2A and 2B illus~rate tWD views of a bleeder ball check valve assembly according to the present inven~ion; Figure 2A is a front elevational view of the reaction shaft support and bleeder ball check valve assembly; and Figure 2B is a sectional view of Figure 2A;

~ igures 3A-E illustrate the structure and cperation of the double acting ~pring; Figure 3A is an elevational view of the structure of the double acting spring; Figure 3B is a sectional view taken along lines ~-B of Figure 3A; Figures 3C is a partial sectional elevational vlew of the spring in its non-applied position; Figure 3D is a partial sectional elevational view of the ~pring ~hile the averdrive clutch is : beLng applied; and Figure~3E is a partial sec*ional elevational view of the spring while the reverse clutch is being applied;

,:

1 320060 Figl~es 4A-J illustrate the park lock mq mechanism according to the present invention: Figure 4A is an elevational view, p3rtly in section with parts broken away, of the underside of an automatic transmission housi.ng showing the manual lever rotated ~o its park lock position; FicTure 4B is a sectional view taken substantially along line B-B of Figure 4A; Figure 4C is a fragmentary view of the park lock mechanism of Figure 4B showing ~he mechanism in its unlocked mode;

Figure 4D is a fragmentary view of the park lock mec~nism of Figure 4B showing the mechanism in its locked m~de with the pawl out of registry with a space between adjacent teeth of the parking gear; Figure 4E is an exploded perspective view of the park lock nechanism; Figure 4F is an enlarged fragmentary sectional view of the park lock cam rollers; Figure 4G is a sectional view taken s~stantially along line G-G of Figure 4F;

Figure 4H is a fragmentary elevational view of the upper surface of the m~nual lever rotated to its .Lnstallation position; Figure 4I is an end elevational fragmentary view of the nanual lever as view~d in the direction of the arrow of Figure 3~; and Figure 4J is a fragmentary perspective view illustrating, in a ~chematic n~nner, the interlocking relationship between the park lock carrier and the tran~mission case;

Figures 5A-L are schematic diagrams of the hydraulic circuits employed in the transmission according tD the present invention in various gear positions;

Figure 6 is a partial exploded view of the valve body and other valves contained ~herein of Figures 5A-L according to the present invention;

A ,~ 1 320060 Figure 7 is a plan view of the solenoid ~alve nanifold assembly with the cover partially broken away of the valves shcwn m Figures 5A~L;

Figure 8 is a cross-sectional view of the noxmally vented solenoid-actuated valve 632 taken along line 8~8 of;Figure 7;

Figure 9 is a cross-s~ctional view of ~le normally applied sDlenoid-actuated valve 630 taken along line 9-9 of Figure 7;

Figure 9A is a partial sectional view of the valve of Figure 9 with a noise reducing device;

Figure 10 is a cross-sectional view of a pressure switch of Figures 5A-L taken along line 10-10 of Fig~re 7;

Figure llA is a sectional view of the solenoid switch valve of Figures 5A-L taken along line A-A of Figure 5; and Figure llB is a sectional view of the manual valve of Figures 5A-L taken along line B-B of Pigure 5;

: F}gure 12 is a flow chart of the overall ~perational me~hodology of the transmission controller according to the present in~ention;

Figures 13A-13C are flow charts of ~he shift select methodology of Figur0 12 according to the present in~ention;

Figures 14A-D illustrate the shift schedule methodology acoording to the present mvention; ~igure l~A is a flo~w chart of the shift ~chedule methodology of Figure 12; and ~igures 14~-14D are shift schedule graphs; ~:

Figures lSA-B illustrate ~he PSLOPE methodology acoording to the present invention; ilgure 15~ 1~ a flow ch2lt of the PSLOPE m~thodology , ~ of Figures 14; and Figure 15B is a graph of the method used in Figure :: :: : : : ~ :

:: 15A; .

~L ,3 , ::

.

: :

1 320060 Figures 16A-D are flow charts of the shift methodology of Figure 12 according to the present invention; Figure 16A is a flow chart of ~he upshift methodology; Figures 16B and 16C are flow charts of the dbwnshift methodology; and Figure 16D is a flow chart of the garage shift methodology;

Figure 17 is a flow chart of the lock-up methodology of Figure 12 according to ~he present invention;

Figures 18A-C illustrate the adaptive idle methodology according to the presPnt invention; Figure 18A is a flow chart of the adap~ive idle methodology; Figure 18~ is a~ graph of the cycle time of one solenoid-actuated valve; and Figure 18C is a graph of speed vexsus time for the turbine of the torque converter;

Figure l9 is a schematic diagram of the P~NODDL methodology of Figure 12 according tD the present invention;

Figures 20A and 20B are flow charts of the shift lever position methodology according to ~he present invention;

Figures 21~-D illustrate the transmission t~mperature determination methodol~gy acoording tn ~he present invention; Figures 2LA and 21C are flow char~s of the pressure switch test and ~rans~ission temperature methodology; Figure 21D is a graph of a predicted transmission temperature methodology:

Figures 22A-E illustrate the solenoid cDntinuity test nethodology~acoording ~o the present invention; Figures 22A-D are flow charts of the solenoid oDntinuity test me~odol ~ and Figure 22E is a graph of ~oIenDld driver logic ~ igures 23A-C illus~rate the throttle angle oomputation ~ethodoloyy according to the present inve~tion; Figures 23A and 23B are ' .. , ,, ~ , , .

1 320~60 flow charts of ~he throttle ~ngle computation ~ethodology, and Figure 23C is a plot of variables used for the throt~le angle computation methodology;

Figures 2~A-L illustrate the shift methodol~gy acoDrding to the present invention; Figure 24A is a shift graph tape for a third to first gear kickdown shift; Figure 24B is a graph of torque converter characteristics for the turbine torque methodology; ~igure 24C is a partial shift tape graph of the learn methodology ~or kickdown shifts;

Figure 24D is a shift tape graph for a first tD second gear upshift;

Figure ~4E is a flow chart of the learn ~e~hodology; Figure 24F is a graph for the adaptive scheduling ~ethodology for a fourth to third gear coastdown shift; Figure 24G is a pnase plane graph for a second to first gear coastdown shift; Figure 24H :is a partial shift tape graph for a second to first gear coastdcwn shift; Figure 24I is a flow chart of the release element logic for a kickdo~n or c~astdown shift, Fig~re 24J is a flcw char~ o the apply element logic for a kickdown or ooas~down shift;

Figure 24K is a graph of pressure versus time for an ele~ent; and Figure 24L is a shift tape graph fox a neutral bo reverse gear garage shift;

Figures 25A-K are flow charts of the on-board diagnostics according to the present invention;

Figures 26A-H illustrate the engine torque management methodology according ~o the present invention; Figures 26A-D are flcw cbart~ of the engine Oorqye man~ge~ent methodology; and ~igures 26E-H are shift tape graphs wl~h and w~thout engine b3rque management;

Figure 27A is a block diagram of an adapti~e oont~ol system for an automatic transmission according to the pre~ent invention;

A /~ 1 320060 Figure 27B is a block diagram of the transmission o~ntroller for the adaptive oontrol system accordm g to the present invention;

Figures 28A-I camprise a schematic diagram of the transmission controller sh~wn in Figure 27B; specifically, Figure 28A illustrates a communication circuit which provides a serial ~ommunication link between the transmission controller and the engine o~ntroller; Figure 28B illustrates the microprocessor and peripheral interfal-e circuits; Figure 28C illustrates the read only memory and watchdcg/reset circuits; Figure 28D illustrates the speed and throttle input circuits; Figure 28E illustrates the ignition switch input circuits: Figure 28F illustrates the regulator and relay driver circuits; Figure 28G illustrates the .solènoid driver circuits; Figure 28H illustrates the pressure switch mput and test mDde circuits; and Figure 28I illustrates tw~ additional communication circuits for the transmission controller;

Figure 29 is a block diagram of the interface chip shown in Figure 28B, Figure 30 is a block/schematic diagram of the watchdog/reset chip shown in Figure 2BC;

Figure 31 is ~n equivalent circuit schematic diagram :illustrating h~w diodes can be used in an input circuit to take adv~ntage of an active pu11-~own network in a switched voltage section of a dual regulator to provide high voltage protection to a mlcrooomputer with an electrostatic discharge prot~ction cîrcuit;

Figure 32 is an equivalent circuit 6chematic diagram illw trating hcw a reset output of a voltage regulator can be used as a system low voltage 1nhibit;

~G 1 320060 Figure 33 is a diagrammatic drawlng showing how the output of a throttle position sensor can be shared between tw~ electronic controll rs having dissimilar ground potentials;

Figure 34 is a diagrammatic illustrati~n of a circuit for determining the crank position of an ignition switch by sens mg the voltage across the starter relay ooil and.h~lding an electronic device in a reset condition in response thereto; and Figure 35 is an illustration of closed loop and cpen loop control of solenoid coil drivers showing basic differences between the circuits and basic similarities between the v~ltage outputs.

Other objec~s, features and advantages of the present invention will become more fully apparent frGm the followinq detailed description of the preferred embodiment, the appended claims and in the accompanying dra~Jmgs in which:

Figures lA-E illustrate one physical embodiment of the transmission according to the present invention; Figure lA is perspect}ve view, partially broken ~way of the transmission; Figure 1~ is a sectional elevational view of one em~odiment of a trans~ission constructed according to the present invention; Figure lC is a partial ~ectional elevational view of~one half of the trans~ission of Figure lB;

~igure lD is a partial Eectional elevational view of the other half of ~he transmission of Figure lB and Figure lE is a æhematic diagram of the transmission of Fi ~ es lA ~nd lB;

~ iqures 2A and 2B illustrate tw~ vi~ws of a bleeder ball check valve assembly according to the present mvention; Figure ~A is a front elevational view of the reaction shaft support and bleeder ~all check valve as~embly; and Figure 2B is a ~ectional view of Figure 2A;

.

A ~ ~. .

1 320060 Figures 3A~E illustrate the 6tructure and qperation of the d3uble acting spring; Figure 3A is an elevational view of the structure of the double acting spring; Figure 3B is a sectional view ~aken along lines B-B of Figure 3A; Figures 3C is a paxtial sectional elevational view of the spring in its non-applied posi~ion; Figure 3D is a partial sectional elevational view of the spring while the ~verdrive clutch is being applied; and Figure 3E is a partial sectional elevational view of the spring whlle the reverse clutch is being applied;

Figures 4A-J illustrate the park lockmg mechanism accord mg to the present invention; Figure 4A is an ele~ational view, partly in section with parts broken away, of the underside of an auto~atic transmisslon housinq showmg the manual lever rotated to its park lock position; Figure 4B is a ~ectional view taken substantially along line E-B of Fi~ure 4A; Flgure 4C is a fragmentary view of the park lock mechanism of Figure 4B showing the mech3nism in its unlocked m~de;

Figure 4D is a frag~r~3ntary view of the park .lo~k mechanisn of Figure 4B showing the mechanism m its locked m~de wnth the pawl out of registry with a space betweell: adiaoent teeth of the parking gear Figure 4E is an exploded perspective view of the park lock mechaslism; Figure 4F is an enlarged fragn~ntary sectional~view of the park lock c~m rollers; Figure 4G is a sectlc~nal view tal;en substantially along line G-G of Figure 4F;

Figure 4H is a frhgmentary elevational view of the upper surace of the n~nual lever rDtated to its installation posi~ion; Figure 4I is an end ele~a~ional fragmentary view o the ~anual lever as viewed in the di~ection of the arrow of Figure 3H: and Figure 4J is ~ ~ragmentE~y perspective view illustrating, in a sch~natic manner, the interlocking relati~nship between the park loc~ carrier and the transmissi~n case t 1 320060 Figures SA-L are schematic diagrams of the hydraulic circults employed in the transmlssion according to the present invention in various gear positions;

Figure 6 is a partial exploded view o ~he valve ~ody and other valves conta med therein of Figures 5A-L according to the present invention:

Figure 7 is a plan view of the solenoid valve manifold assembly with the cover partially broken away of ~he valves shown in Figures SA-L;

Figure 8 is a cross-sectional view of the no.rmally vented solenoid-actuated valve 632 taken along line 8-8 of Figure 7;

Figure 9 is a cross-sectional view of the normally applied solenoid-actuated valve 630 taken along line 9-9 of Figure 7;

Figure 9A is a partial sectional view of the valve of Figure 9 with a noise reducing device:

Figure 10 is a cross-sectional ~iew of a pressure switch of Figures 5A-1 taken along lme 10-10 of Figure 7;

Figure llA is a -ectional view of ~he ~olenoid ~wltch valve of Figures 5A-L taken along line A-A of Figure 5; and Figure llB is a sectional view of the manual valve of Figures 5A-L ~aken along line B-B of Figure 5;

Figure 12 is a flow chart of the ov~xall operatio~al 0ethodolo~y of the transmission ccn~r~ller accDrding bo ~he prese~t ~nvention;

Figures 13h-13C are flow chart6 of the ~hift select methodolo~y of Figure 12 according tD the pxesent invention;

Figures 14A-D illustrate the shift schedule methodology acoording to the present invention: Figure 14A is a flow chart of the /~ 1 3200~0 shift schedule methodolo~y of Figure 12; and Fi~ures 14B-14D are shift schedule graphs; ~ ` Figures 15A-B illustrate the PSLOPE m~thodology according to the present invention; Figure lSA is a flow chart of the PSLOPE methodology of Figures 14; and Figure 15B is a graph of the method used in Figure 15A;

Figures 16A-D are flow charts of the shift met~Kdology of Figure 12 according to the present invention; Figure 16A is a flow chart of the upshift methDdol~gy; Figures 16B and 16C are flow charts of the downshift methodology; and Figure 16D is a flcw chart of the garage shift methodolcgy;

Figure 17 is a flow chart of the lock-up methodology of Figure 12 according to the present invention;

Figures 18~~C.illustrate the adaptive idle methodology according to the present invention; Figure 18A is a flow ch~rt of the adaptive idle methodology; Figure 18B i8 a graph of ~he cycle time of one solenoid-actuated valve; and ~igure 18C is a graph of speed versus time for the turbine of the torque oonverter;

~ igure 19 is a 6chematic diagram of the PRNODDL methodology of Figure 12 acccr~Jrg to the:present invention;

Figures 20A and 20B are flow charts of the shift lever position methodology according ~o the present invention;

Figures 2LA-D illustrate ~ the transmission temperature detenmination method~logy:according to the present mvention; ~igures 21A:and ZlC are fl~w ch~lts of the pressure ~witch ~est and transmisslon temçerature meth3doloyy: Figure 21D is a graph of a predicted transmission temperature methodology:

1 320060 Figures 22A-E illustrate the 601enoid continulty test m~thodolo~y according to the present invention; Figures 22A-D are fl~ charts of the solenoid continuity test me~hodology; and Figure 22E is a graph of solenoid driver logic;

Figures 23A-C illustrate the throttle a~gle computation methodology according to the present invention; ~ig~es 23A and 23B are flow charts of the throttle angle computation methodolcgy; and ~igure 23C is a plot of variables used for the ~hrottle angle computation methodology;

Figures 24A-L illustrate the shift methodology according to the present invention; Fi~ure 24A is a shift graph tape for a third to first gear kickdown shift; Figure 24B is a graph of torque converter characteristics for the turbine torque methodology; Figure 24C is a partial shift tape graph of the learn methodology for kickdcwn shifts;

Figure 24D is a shift tape graph for a first to second gear upshift;

Figure 24E is a flow chart of the learn methodology; Figure 24F is a graph for the adaptive scheduling nethodolog~ or a fourth to third gear coastdown shift Figure 24G is a phase plane graph ~or a ~econd to first gear coastdown shift, Figure 24H i~ a partial shift tape graph for a cecond bo first gear ~oastdown shift; Figure 24I is a flow chart of the release element logic for a kickdown or ooastdown shi~t; Figure 24J is a flow chart of the apply element logic for a kickdown or ooastdown shift;

Figure 24K is a graph of pressure versus time for an element; and Figure 24L is a shift tape graph for a neutral t~ reverse:ge3r garage shift;

Figures 25A-R are flcw charts of the an~card diagnostics aooording to the present in~ention;

~./ 1 320060 Figures 26A-H illustrate the ~ngine torque management methodology according to the present invention; Figures 26A-D are flow charts of the engine torque n~nagement nethodology; and Figures 26~-H are shift tape graphs with and without engine torque management;

Figure 27A is a block diagram o an adaptive oontrol system for an automatic transmission according to the present i~lvention;

Figure 27B is a block diagram of the transmis.sion oontroller for the adaptive oontrol system according tv the present invention;

Figures 28A I ~cmprise a schematic diagram of the transmission controller shown m Figure 27B; specifically, Figure 28A illustrates a communication circuit which provides a serial oommNnication link between ~he transmission controller and the engine controller; Figure 28B illustrates ~he microprocessor and peripheral interface circuits; Figure 28C illustrates the read only nemory and watchdog/reset circuits; Figure 28D illustrates the speed and throttle input circuits; Figure 28E illustrates the igm tion switch input circuits; Figure 28F illustrates the regulator and relay driver circuits; Figure 28G illustrates the solenoid driver ClxcUitS: Figure 28H illustrates the pressure switch input and test mDde circuits, and Figure 28I illustrates two additional ccnc mication circults for the transmission contr~ller;

~ ~igure 29 is a block diagram of the interface chip shown in Figure 28B; and Figure 30 is a block/sche~atic diagram of the watchdog/reset chip shcwn in Figure 28C.~ , ,, a~.

'.

.. .

1 320060 Referr~ng to Figures lA and lB, arl zlu~natic transn~ssion 100 ncccrding to one enibodi~nt of the present imre~tion is ~}x~n. q9 e tras~nissioll 100 i~ ~da~3d to be used in a vehicle ~not ~wn), ~uch as an autar~ile. ~ever, lt ~uld be a~eciated that the principles of the prese~t ~t~cn may be elTpl~ed ~n other types of vehicles ar~ devioes. qhe tran~nission 100 incl~u~Ps a transnission hausin~ or case 102 fior enclosing ~he numercus ~ubass#mblies w~ich make up the transmission 100, including a tDrque conver~er as~embly 110, pump asse~bly 200, mLlti-clutch assembly 300 and gear assembly 500.

_ _ ~ e torque oDnverter ass~mbly 110 is operative to tran~t power frcm a rotating crankshaft 114 of a pr~me mDver ~uch ~s an automobil~0 engine (not shown) to the input member of the transmissi~ 100. This r may then be subsequ~n~ly transmltted tD a drive unit 104 (partially hown) which is ~onnected to ~ne or mDre dri~e wheels (not shown) of the vehicleO m e torque oonverter 110 ~s genexally comprised of an impeller as~e~bly 126, tu~bine ass3~bly 128 ~nd a ~tator assembly 130.

hs illustrated in Figure lC, pcwer 1~ tr~nsmitted frnm the rotating crankshaft 114 of the engine to a front cover member 116 o~ the impeller as~embly 126 ~ gh ~ rD~at~ble plate ~mb~r llE. Balance weights 119 are ciroumferen~ially sp20ed ~bout the outRr periphery of the frcnt cover member 116. The plate me~ber 118 is ~ecured prox$mate it~ ~nner periphery to the ~rankdh~t 114 by ~uit~ble ~astening means ~uch ~s bolts 120, and i~ likewise ~ecDred proximate ~t8 outer pe~iphery 1 320060 t~ the front oc~ve~ nE~nibex 116 by ~table fa5tellillg nlearlS such as bolt5 122.

Ihe front ~over n~nber 116 is æecured, Su~ y welding at 124, to the impeller asserr~ly 126 of ~he tor~ue converter 110.

me impeller ass0~ly 126 ~s 1u~dly ~nnected in t~roid~Ll flaw relatianshil? ~n a kr~wn rnar~ w~th the t~ sss~ly 128 ~nd the stator as~r~ly 130. ~e ~ller a!lsse~lv 126 aanprises a plurality ~f circ~nerentially spaced ~peller blades 132 cG~ ed to ~he inside of an ~ller E;hell 134, The ~eller ~;hell 134 i~ ~ecurea, such as by ~ælding at 136, to an ~ller h~b or p~p drive shaft 13B.

Ihe im~eller hub 138 is drivingly engaged at its neck portion 140 ~ che positive displace~nt ~np 200, ~ which fluid is ~plied to the torque converter 110 in a mar~er ~o be described herein.

An arcuate ir~er portion 142 ~f the ~mpeller blade 132 is disp~sed ab ~ t one half of a split torus ring 144 which xeduces fluid tur~ulence within the torque oonverter 110. A ~i~nust plate 146 is connected by tabs (not shx~wn) on the inner surface of a slot 148 of the in~eller hub 138 and disposed between the impeller a~sembly 126 and a stator thrust m s~3er 165.

Ihe ~tatDr essembly 130 lncludes a pluralit~ ~f circun~erentially ~paced ~tatDr ~anes 150 which ~re oçnnected ~t their irnbEr end to a ~tatDr plate 152. Th~ ~tator pl~te 152 is n~unted on a tx~way or cNlyr-nDnnLng cll~tch ARsembly~ generally indicated at 154.

me aver-r~ clut~ aFse~bbly 154 pen~ts r~tation only in the ci~-Y:tion of the impeller ~ss3mbly 126, The cn~r-ru~ ng clutch a~sembly 154 a~pri~es an cnner-Icr=ll~g d utch c~n 15~ nx3unted abcut er-r~ni~ clu~h rollers 15~ D whic:h in tw:n, tra~rel about an over-ru~L~ng clutch race 160. The over-ru~unin~ clutch raoe 160 is ~. ' r ;~ ~ 1 320060 spli~ed at ~r surfaoe 162 to a ~t~tionary reaction ~haft ~r~er 164.

An annular thrust nE~er 16S hav~ng retaining transverse flanges or tabs 167 is disp~sed between the ~ r pla~e 152 and the thmst plate 146.

ly 128 ~l~des ~ plurality of ~nside of ~ tur~ine ~;hell 168~ me ~ine ~ell 168 is æa~r~ by rivets 170 or the like ~o a t:~ine ~b næmber 17.2. T~e tur~ hub ~er 172 is drivingly oonnected, ~ spline c~ction 174, ~o a rotatable in~t m~ or shaft 176 ts:~ whi~h the g~ear ass~ly 500 of the tr~ssion 100 ~s drivingly ~ngaged. A ~ine ~b ~eal 178 is diE;posed between the inside of the tur~ine }mb T~rber 172 a~ the inpu~ ~haft 176 t~ prevent entry of flu~d ~ etween. A ~ ver hlshing 180 havin~ grooves (not shcwn) for fluid flow therethr~lgh supports the ~urbine hub ~ember 172 m a cavity 182 of the frDnt oover nember 116. A thrust pla~e or washer 184 h~vin~ grooves (not sh~wn) for fluid flow therethrough is disposed between the turbine hub nember i72 and the front cover nember 116. ~n annular s ~ member 185 having grooves ~n~t shown) for fluid fl~w therethr~ugh is disposed ketween the turbine hub nember 172 and statDr plate 152, as well as the oYer- ~ olutch race 160.

qhe torque = ~erter 110 al~o ~nclu~es a l~ck-up clutch ass3rbly, gen2rally indicated at 186, to`prevent slip between the r ~ ~ing ~r~nkJhaft 114 of the engine ~n~ the ~ ine asseTbly 12~ of the bDrgu~ oonNerter llD. Ihe lo~k-up clutsh assembly 186 includes an annular pi~ton ~nber 188 havlny ~n inner fIange porticn 19~ disposed about ths turbine hub nem~er 172 of the turbine ~ssembly 128. The pisbon me~ber 188 has a p~urality of clr~mferentially ~paoed inverted .

~ 2~S , ' 1 320060 U~shaped a~ter fl~ge porti~ns 192 whic~ l~re formed to engage ~rresponding ~lots 194 in a drive ring î96 that is welded to the turbine shell 168.

Ihe pistorl ~ber 188 is ~lidir2gly ~d ~ealingly ~ted for ax~al ~rav~rent an the ~r axi~l ~face of the hlrbine hub ~iber 172 thr~ugh u~nular ~eal el~nt 198. ~ ann~lar disc-shaped i~ictianal el~rent or loclc~ disc 199 i5 carried pr~cim~te the cuter periphery of ~he front c~ver ~r~er 116 ~or engag~t w~th a oo~erat~ng portian c~f the pis~ ~bber 188.

The fixed positive displace~nt p~np ass0~1y 200 includes a p~p housing 202 ~ecured proxin~te its ;s~ner periphery to a reactior~ shaft support 204 ~ suitable fastening Ireans eudl as bolts 206. qhe housing 202 is lik~ise secured prcl)cimate its alter periphery ts:

t}~e transmission c~se 102 ~y su~table fastening n~ans suc~ as bolts 208.

The reacti~ s~aft ~ort 2U4 i5 SeCllr~, 6uch as b~ press fittis~g w:ith spl~es at 210, t~ the reaction ~haft m~er 164. ~e ~ller hub or p~p drit~e ~haft 138 is ~orted in ~he pump h~sing 202 through a h~ in~ ~ 212. A ~eal ring asserr~ly ~14 ~s disposed about the ~peller }~b ar E~P dr~ve ihaft 13B in a lbore or reoess 216 at c~ne end of 'che p-mp ha~ing 202 to prevent fluid fran e~citing ~che end of the hous~g 202.

Pn outer s~ear or r~tor 218 wi1~ ~ternal teeth tnot ~) ~erates within a b~re 220 of the p~p hausing 202.

An inner ge~ or 3~0tor 222 ha~ris~g ~ ~ee1:h ~not ~wn~, ~erati~e with the teeth of the outç!r r~r 218 0 is di~sed wi~h1n ~he c~uter rotor 2184 As illustrated in Figures lC and lD, ~aling means, such as seal ~6 ~' 1 320060 r~s 224, 226 and 228, are axially Eq?aoed between ~cl~e in~t ~haft 176 and reacti~n ~haft ~rt 204. ~e reaction ~;haft ~rt 204 ~ludes a fluid passage 230 to allcs~ fluid ~o flow ~o the ~orque ~nverter 110 :~11 8 n~er to descri~ed herein.

I~I~3 AS~ S =iB _ __ ring the iElow of power through ~e tran~ssic~ 100, the ~lti~l~ asse~ly 300 pr~vides ~ m~s ~or ~?L;caticn~ d release of tw~ ~parate m~ers to and fr~n eac~ other.

In r~er s~rds, the clutch ass0r~1y 300 is the nean~ by ~i~h t~e qears within the tran~ssion are ~elect~vely e;~aged and dis~ngaged frn either the .crankshaft 114 of the pr~me ~ver or the tran~nissio~ case 102.

Near the i~put side of the tran~nission 100, the ~ clutch sss~ly 300 includes an underdrive clutch 302 (applied in first, ~ecDnd and third gear~), overdrive clutch 304 (applied in third ana fourth gears) and a r~verse clutch 306 (applied in reverse gear) assemblies. Near the cutput side of the transmission 100, the ~lti-~lutch ~ssemblv 300 includes a ~w~/four ~hift clutch assembly 308 (applied in 0econd and fourth gears), ~nd a low/reverse clut~h assembly 310 i2pplied in first ~erse years).

R~ illu~trated:~ Flsures lC and lD~ an ~nput clutch retai~er b~b 312 $s p¢cvided b~ hou~e the ~nput clutch assemblies 302t 304 ~nd 306. ~e inpu~ c~ ~ s~tDdr~r hub 312 has ~ gan~ally æxially eocl=~dinq ~houlder p~ Lon 313 and a gcnerally ~xially ex*ending portilDn 314. A pl~rality o~ pcoed seal rin~ 315 ~re di~posed in oorr2sponding nnular~groove~ 316 which:3r@ lo~med al~ng the ~eacticn ~haft suppor~ 2040: The input ~lutch r~t~in OE hub 312 i5 al~D ~pli~ed at 317 ~D the .

.

.. ..

, ` ~ . ~ ' ' '' ' , ' ' 1 320060 input ~haft 176. A thrust ~ing 318 is disposed ~ly ~tween ~ne end of the re~ction shaft 6upport 204 and the ax~ally ex~ding portion ~14 c,f ~che in~t clutch retainer h~1b 312. l~e ~nput clutch retair~r hub 312 has teeth 319 at its auter peripa~ery. A ~.~e ~peed ~ensor 320 ~hreadably engages a bore 322 in the trar~rL ssion ~ase 102 ~I has one end 324 diE~sed or spaced radially ~ust ~bave ~he teeth 319 of the ir~put clut~ ret~ hub 312. me hlr~ine E~peed ~ensor 320 is used to 3nonitor or sense the r~lution rate Df ~e b~bitle ~ss~ly 128 ~y camtirg the teeth 319 passing th~ y ~n relati~ ~ ~ Preferably, a passi~e type speed ~ensor i5 us~d for the ~rbine ~;peed ænsor 320.

Hc~wever, it ~ ld be ~ppreciated that other ~;uitable speed ~nsors could be ~Tplc~yed w~thin or before the transmission lO0 to provide an input speæd ~ignal for the transmission controller 3010 to ~e described in OOnneCtiOQ with Figures 28A-G, An mput clutch reta ~ 326 has a hub portion 328 disposed -~bout and drivingly oonnected to, as by a ~plme c~nnection 330, to the axially ~ ding portion 314 of the ~nput clutch retainer ~ub 312.

Sealing ~eans, ~uch as ~ealin~ rings 332 and 334, are disposed in corresponding grooves of the input clutch h ~ ret3iner 312 between the por~ion 328 ~nB the ~xially exte0d~ng porticn ~14 of the ~nput ~:l~ch ~eta~r ~ib 3120 A tl~pered ~nap rin~ 336 ~ s disposed in a 338 o~ the ~put t:lutch retainer hib 312 to prevent axial nav~t of the $T~pUt c:l~ ret~iner 326 ~oward the gear ass~nbl$t 500.

Ihe input clutch retain~r 326 includes an ~2lly extending flar~e 340 fo~oing a c~yli~ er. A plurality c~f s:ir ~ erer~cially ~paoed clutc~ retainer fingers 341 e~tend radially inwardly ~rom ~he flange 340 to which the clu~ch plates, whi~h will be described herein, axe mounted.

1 320060 As illustrated ~n ~igure lDI the underdri~re elutch ass~ly 302 ca~rises a plurality of ~ally 6paced ~ular elut~h plates 342 and a plurality of axially E;paced annular elutch discs 344.

The e~utch discs 344 ~re altexnated between the el~tch pla~s 342 ~nd when the elutch asse~ibly 302 is r~t ~pLied, t:he&e plates a~nd discs are free to m~ve or rotate relative to eadh c~her. lhe elut~h plates 342 have splines ~n~t ~hown) cn ~heir out~r di~meter and ~ount ~n grooves 346 of the clutch retainer f~ngers 341 which are ~nside ~he input clutch retainer 326.

m e clutch discs 344 have lnt ~ l fiplines (nDt shcwn) and are lined with a fric*ion material 347. Ihe clutch discs 344 ~re nounted Ln grooves 348 in ~n underdrive clutch hub 350. m e underdrive clutch hub 350 is integral with a rotatable underdrive gear ~haft 352 of ~he gear a~sembly 500. A thrust bearing 353 is dispos~d axially between the axially extend~ng portion 314 of the input clutch ret~iner hub 312 and underdrive clutch hub 350.

The overdrive clutch assembly 304 comprises a plurality of axially spaced annular clutch plabes 354 and a plurality of axially spaoed annular clutch discs 356. ffle clutch plates 354 and clutch discs 356 ~re similar t~ tho # of the underdrive clutch a~sembly 302. Clutch ~iscs 356 ~re di6posed m splines formed ~n an overdrive clutch hub 358 which C 6upQDrted ~y ~ushings 360 and 361 ~b~ut the ~ear ~haft 352.

qh¢ust ~ s 362 ~nd 363 aIe di6posed ~xially between the underdrive clutch hub 350 ~n~ cverdr~ve ~lu~ch h~b 358. qhe thrust menbers 362 and 36~ are ~imilar tv the thrust ~Lmber 1651 ~n ænnular reaction pla~e 364 ~s ~ecured tD ~he ~nsidb of ~he ~put clut~h reta~ner 326 axially beeween the underdrlve snd over~rive clutch plates ~nd dis~s 34?, 344 354 and 356, respectively. qhe reac*ion plate 364 is sh3red by the A 1 320060 underdrive 302 and overdrive 304 clutch asser[iblies~ Anrlular snap rings 366 and 368 are disposed c~n the sides of the reaction plate 364.

Snap ring 368 is a ~er~ r~g, restr~g reaction pl2~te 364 frarn axial ~ve~nt.

The reverse clu~ch asser~ly 306 car~ri6es ~t least o~e annular clutch plate 370 ~ a plurality of ~cially ~;paced ~wmlar clutch discs 372.

The reverse clutch pl~te 370 and clut~ discs 372 ~re ~imilar ~o those c>f the underdri~e clutch DSsE~ly 302. The r ~ erse clutch discs 372 are noNnted in ~plines 373 of a reverse clutch h~b 374. me reverse clutch hub 374 is ~upported ~y bushings 376 ~nd 378 about ~ne end of the overdrive clutch hub 358. A thrust ne~ber 379 is disposed axially between the overdrive clutch hub 358 and reverse clutch hub 379. The thrust n~mber 379 is Eimilar to the ~hrust ne~ker 165. An ~nnular reac*ion plate 380 is nounted about one end of the flange 340 of the input clutch xetainer 326 on one ide of the reverse ~lutch plate 370 ~nd discs 372. Selective snap r mgs 384 se~ure the reaction plate 380 from axial m~vement along the input clutch retainer 326.

T~ ~pply the overdrive clutch asse~bly 304 ~nd reverse clutch assembly 306, a fluid actuating device ~uch as a fixst hydraulic piston 3B6 has an ~xlally extencing prDjection 3B8 which operates ~n a bore or recess 390 o$ the input ~lutsh retainer h~b 312. m e inner dlame~er of the prDjection 38B h3s ~ groo~e 392 provided ~or ~ ~nap r~ng 394, whlle the recess 390 of the lnput clutsh r~tain~r hub 312 ~ s ~ groove 396 for a sealin3 means ~uch as a ~ynthetic rubber Eeal ~ing 398. qhe first hydr~uli~ pifitOn 3B6 i~ slidingly ~nd ~ealingly n~nted for ~xial n~vement on ~he outer diameter of the ~b portion 328 of the input clutch retaine2 326 *h mugh;~ealing ~eans 400 at its ~nner periph2ry and .

" 1 320060 near the o~lter periphery of the input clutch ret~OE 326 thr~u~h ~l~ng n~ans 402,, A da~ble-actillg spring nea~s ~uch as a Belleville like spring 404 is disposed betwe~ the first hydr~ulic pist~n 386 and the ~t dutch retainer hub 312 to bias o~ reb~n~ the first hydraulic pis~n 386 to ~ n~displ~d or ncm ap~l;ed pO5itiCI~ n the figure.

The dolible-acti~ ~;pring 404 has a ~cal E~hape with fingers 405 ar~ is ~o~ w~th a ~r ~;1~3 wch that its inner u~ ter dia~reters do nc~t lie in the sane ~ro6s-~ectio~al plane.

Ihe doubl~acting ~pring 404 will be discussed ~ore in det~ mder the sectio~ heading "~ SPRl:læ".

The first hydraulic pist~n 386 ~ncludes an ~ially extending cylinder portion 406 whi :h has an ~ ular pressure plate ~er 408 6ecured at cme end thereof by waved ~;nap ring 409a arld E;nap r.Lng 409b.

A pressure plate ~ er 408 i~ interposed bet:~æen the averdrive clutch assembly 304 and the reverse clutch asseribly 306 to engage the clutch plates 354, 370 and discs 356, 372, re~vely.

Hence, the single pressure plate m~er 408 is ~hared by ~he overdrive clutch 304 and reverse clutch 306 ~ssem~lies.

Ib engage o~ disengage ~he underdri~e clutch asserrd~ly 302, a second ~draulic pistc>n 410 operates in a recess 412 of ~he inpu~ clutch retair~r 326. q~e Emooth auter ~li~ter of the l~b portion 314 of the ~put cl~ retainer ~b 312 has ~ gro~re 414 pravided wi'ch ~ sealing ~ uch 21~; A l~nt:he~C rl~ ~er ~eal ring 416~ while the outer periphery of r~ces 412 has a ~roave 418 for an alter 23eal ring 420.

~e ~eoo~d l~dr~ulic pi~ton 410 has 06le ~d 422 al:q~ting the clutch pl~tes 342 of the ~elerdr~ lut~h asse~ly 302.

An ar~ular c~nically ch~ spr~ng retainer r~er 424 is ahlt'cingly n~unted ~gains~ a ~;nap .

A ~' .

. . .

1 320060 r~ng 426, me ~;nap r~ 426 is disposed ~n a groave 42~ forlred ~n the ~ally extending portioI~ 314 of ~che ~put ;:lutch retainex ~ 312.

The other e~d of the spring reta~ ne$riber ~24 is in ~e311ng e~gagement with the ~ nd hydraulic pi~n 410 through ~ealing ~eans 430. ~he ~pring retai~r m~riber 424 is filled W;~h ~Eluid ~ed thmugh #n orifioe ~t 6~2awn) in the ~eoond 3ydraulic pi~ 410 f~am a passage (not ~) :~n the input clut~ re~ainer ~b 312 to pra tide 1:he pressure ~l~oe or the ~ ydraulic pis~o~ 410. ~he exoess flu~d is all~ed to leal: past the ~ ring 426 to ~1 ~che underdrive cl~ch asse~ly 302. ~ ~pr~ng means such as a coil~d spring 432 is disposed between the spring retainar n~ ~24 and the ~ecc~d hydraulic piston 410 to bias or return the ~econd }~draulic piston 410 to its original position shawn in the figure when not applied.

At the altput er~l of the tran~r~ssion 100, the tr~ssion case 102 h~uses the aut~ut or ~rake clutch as~lies such as the ~/four shift clutch ass~mbly 308 ~rid the l~w/~verse clutch P~se~ly 31û.

Ihe twoifaur shift clutch ass~ribly 308 carprises a plurality of axial~y .

E;paced ~nnular clutch plates 434 ar~d ~ plurali1:y of ~xially spaced ~nnular clutch dl~cs ~36.

The clutc}~ plates 434 arld clutc33 discs 436 are s~milar to those of the ~ive clutch assenbly 302.

The clutch p~.ates 434 ~ spli~s 438 ;~ circ~nferential~y E~paoed and ~ally ~nwar~ly ~2di~ c~se clu~ Eingers ~139 insidb the t~nissian ~se 1020 me clut~ discs 436 ~re ~nted ~n E;~lines 4~0 fc~ ~ an ~ially e~idiDg ~ 42 of the reverse ~lutch Inib 374.

A sprin~ ~eans su~ as a Belleville li~ spring 144, æimilar to ~pring :

404, is n~un~ed ~side the t~nsni~sion c~se 102 on ~e 6ide of the ~/~our ~;hift olut~ ~ly 3û8.

All ~nular~ reaction pl~te 445 is 32 :

1 320060 ~ounted on the oth~x side of ~he tw~/four ~hift olutch ass~mbly 308 and between the tw~/four shift clutch as~embly 308 ~nd ~he lGw/reverse clutch assembly 310. Ihe reacti~n plate-445 is shared by ~he tw~/fcur shift clutch 308 and low/ ~ ~erse clu~ch 310 ~s~emblies. Snap rings 446 and 447 are ~cunt~d in the ~ransnission c~se 102 ~n ~he ~ides of the rea ~ on plate 445 to lock it in pla~e. Snap r~g 446 is a tapered rinq, restraining ~eaction plate 445 ~rom ~xial no~ement.

Tb ~pply ~he twD/four dhift clutch ~s~embly 308, a third hydraulic pistcn 448 cperates in a cavity 450 formed by an ~nnular piston housing 452~ The pistDn housin~ 452 is ~ecured to the ~ransmission case 102 bY suit~ble fas ~ neans ~not ~h3wn). The ~mDoth diameter of ~he ~hild hydraulic piston 448 has a grn3ve ~54 ~orm~d in ~ts outer periphery ~or an outer 6eal r ~ 456 and a grooYe 458 form~d in its inner periphery for an inner ~eal r mg 460. A finap ring 462 is disposed in a groove 464 in the transmission case 102 to pxevent aYial movement of the p1ston houslng 452.

The low/reverse clutch asse~ly 310 oomprises ~ plurali~y of axially spaced annular clutch plates 466 a~d a plurality of axially ~paced annular clutch discs 468. The clutch pla~es 4~6 and clutch discs ~68 are siTiLar to those ~f the undes~rive clutch ass3mbly 302. The clutch plates 466 are m~unted in ~plines 470 of the case clut~h fingers 439 inside ~he tran3mi~sion ~ase 102. The clut~h discs 468 are noun ~ ~n ~plines k72 of ~ outer periphery of an ~nnulus gear 54? of the gear sssembly 500 to ~e d~scribed ~urthe~ herein.

Tb ~pply t~e low/rever~e ~lut~h ~s~embly 310, ~ fourth hy~kaulic pisbDn 474 operates in a cav~y 476 formed by an annular pis~on housin~ 47~. qhe pis~on housing 478 is disposed in an ~nnular recess 480 of the , A 33 . . .

1 320060 translussion case 102 and secu~d by suitable fastening ~ansl ~uch as bolts 481, to the trar~nission case 102. me ~ th di~ter of the faurth h~aulic piston 474 has a groove 482 ~ed i:n its os~ter perip~ery for ~n auter ~eal ring 484 an~l a grwve ~186 fornE d in its ir~er peripl~ery for an ~nner seal rlng 48B. A sp.rir~g means 6ach as a Elelleville liJce 6pring ~90, ~imilax to ~;pring 404r i6 disp~sed be~æell the faurth hydraulic pistorl 474 ~ d lthe gear assenibly 500 to bias or return the fourth ~ydraulic pisbon 474 t3 its original position when not applied as shown in th2 figure. A 5nap ring 492 retam s cne end of the ~pring 490 to ~h2 trangmission ~ase 102.

~R ~ During th2 flow of power, the gear assembly S00 changes the ratio of torque be~ween an input mEmber, such as input shaft 176, and an output member, such as outFut gear 534 which will be further describe~.

hereLn. me gear assembly 500 ~ rises a front or first planetary gear set, ge~erally indi~ated at 502, and an axially ~paced rear or ~econd planetary gear ~et, generally indica~ed at 504. The first pl~netary gear set 502 includes a first sun gear 505 zt its oenter. me first sun gear 506 s cornccted bo the rever~e ~lutch hub 374 at its inner .

periphery ~d is 6upported upcn buEhings 376 ~nd 378. A ~ir~t planet sarrier 508 ~s disposed about ~he ~irst ~un gear 506. ~ ~irst planet ier 508 ~ncludes a plurality of ~lsc~mSerentially ~paced first pin~on gears S10 ~aunted abou~ dhafts 512 =cnnecbed t~ the first planet carrier 508. Th~ ~irst planet carrier 508 includes an inner p~rtiGn 514 ~plined at 516 ~D the o~erdrive clut~h hub 358, A thrust bearing 517 is dispos~d axially ketween one end of the first sun geax 506 and .inner A 3~ ' ,", ~ ' ~ ' , 1 320060 por~ic~rl 514 o:~ the f~st plane~ carrier 508. qhe first planet car~ier 508 also includes ' an ax~ally ex~:ending outex portion S18 form~ng a cyl~nder about the first planeta~:y gear set 502. A first annulus gear 519 is di5p~sed aba~t ~ irst planet car~ 508 u~d engages the first pirllcln 9ea:1:5 510.

me rear or ~ecand planetary gear ~et 504 includes a sea~d slm S~ear 520 ~t its oentex whi~h ~s spl~ed at 522 to tlx~ ~ar ~aft 352. A thrust bear~ 523 iq ~ ly disp~sed bet~ ane end of the inner portion 514 of the first p~et ~arrier 508 ~nd the seo~nd s~ gear 520.

A second planet canrier 524 is disposed ab~t ~he second ~un gear 520.

The seco~d planet carrier 524 ~ludes a plurality of ~ircDnfexentially ~;paced second pinion S~ears 526 ~nte~l abalt shafts 528 coT~nected to the second planet carrier 524. qhe second planet ~arrier ~24 includes an inner portion 530 ~plined ~t 532 to a rotatable output gear 534 which acts as ~he outFut nEm~er of the tr~nsmission 100.

The inner portion 53a of the second planet carrier 524 is ~upported by a bushing 536 disposed abcut the ~eo~nd ~un gear 520. ~ thrust bearing 537 is dispo5ed ~xially between the ~eoond ~un gear 520 and ~econd planet carrier 524. A tapered rDller bearing ~s~smbly 538 ~upports the inner x~t_L~n 530 of the seoond planet ~ ier 524 within the transmission case 102.

qhe 6econd pl~net csrr~er 524 alsD ~ocludes an outer portion 540 t:o 'che fir8t ~13~ geal~ 519.

Th8 ~ anr~ulus gear 542 is di~posed abcu~ the ~econd planet carrier 524 and engages the æecvnd pinion ge2r~ 526. ~he ~eoond ~nnulus gear 542 is oonnacted to ~he outer :

Fx~rtion 5I8 of the ~irst planet carrier 508.

3~S ,~ .' 1 3200~0 The second planet carrier 524 inclu~les ~eth 544 at it5 cfl~ter periphe~y of the buter portion 54 0 .

An output 6peed ~en50r 54 6 threadakly engages a bore 548 ~ the tr~ssion case 102 ~nd has one end 550 disposed or radially E~pac~ just ~ove the ~th 544 of t~e ~oond plar~et carrier 524. me a~tput ~3ed sensor 546 is used to m~L~tor or a~nse the revolutic~ rate (per minute) of tlæ 5eoo~1 plar~et c:arrier 524 ~y o~ting or ~ensing the teeth !;44 E~assin~ t~re~y relative to tiTre. ffle ~t~ut Epe3d ~sor 546 is ~imilar ~ the turbine speed 6ensor 320.

It sh~uld also ~e noted that ~er slLitakle speed ~ensors could }:e ~d inside or after the transmission 100 to pr~vide an out~t speed signal to the tr~ssio~'~ oc~ntroller 3010.

I~e ou~t gear 534 is E,ecur~d ~o t~e second planet carrier 524 by su~table fasten~ng means such as a bolt 552. ~he output gear 534 is sup~orted by a tapered roller bearing ~ss~ribly 554 within the trans~lssi~n case 102. A rear oover plate nember 556 is oonnected bv ~ultable fastening neans (no* 6hown) tu the rear or output end of the transmission case 102 to enclose the autput gear 534 and the transfer gear ~not ~ ).

To visualize and understand how pcwer is ~ransnitted fro~ the rotating cr~nkshaft ll4 of *he engine tD the ou~put gear 534 of the ~r~nsmiss~on 100, the ~peratlon of the a3s3mbl~es described abcve will Fokatian of the cranXshaft 114 of the engine ~auses ~he ~ront cover nEmker 116 t~ r~tate with it due to the oonnecti~n betw~en kolts 120, plate ne~ber 118 and ~olts 122. Sinoe the front oover ~ember 116 ~. 3 ~ 1 320060 is welded at 124 to the ~ller shell 134 of ~e i~rpeller ass~ly 126, the in~eller asse~ly 12~ also rotates with the ~anlcshaft 114.

The flu~d within the isspeller asser[~ly 126 is $et into n~ n ~ the ~tatian of the impeller ass~ly 126 ar~ ~y the fluid p~essure ~n the p~p ass~ly 200. ~e ~peller blades 132 star~ to carry ~e flt~id it}l th~n. As t~2e fluid is ~;pun ~ und by ~e ~ ller blades 132, it is thrown outward hy centri~ugal foroe ~nd in~ ~he turb me ~ssembly 128 at 3n sngle. The ~luid ~trikes the turbine bl~des 166 of ~he turbine ~sse~bly 128, thus imparting tDnquel or turnin~ ef~ort to the turbine ~ssembly 128 and causing the tuxbi~e ~hell 168 ~d the turbine asse~bly 128 to ~ te. Sinoe the turbine ~hell 168 is ccnnected tb the turbine hub 172 through rivets 170 and ~he turbine hub 172 is splined at 174 bo the input shaft 176, the input ~aft 176 is caused to rDtate. As eng me 0peed is increased, the force of the fluid str ~ g the turbine blades 166 i~ also increased. Thus, tDnque is imparted tD the ~ t sha~t 176 of the ransmissiDn 100 v1a the turbine ass~mbly 128.

In ~he ~orque oonverter 110, ~he ~tator ~ssembly 130 redlrects the fluid flow ~ that the turbine blades 166 will have ~Dre force exerted upon them during a tDrque nultiplication ~tage. During bDrque ~tiplication, the over-lunring clutch ~o~sembly 154 m the s~ator a~sE~ly 130 is ~d ~n a ~wn m~er ~ that ~e ~ Dr asse~nbly 130 will ~main E~tati~ary~ A5 the fluid passes fran the b~rb~ne ass~ly 1~8 to the ~peller ~ly 126, the sta~r blades 150 of the ~ Dr ~sse~ly 130 ~push" the ~ d against the ~eller blad2s 132 ~o ~hat a gxeater entry angle is ~wr~ to the ~rbine blades 166, resulting in A 3-iZ 1 320060 a greater fc>rce cRn the blades 166 and ~ncreasing the torque to the Lnput E;haft 176 of the translT~ssivn lO0.

qlle aver-~g clutch ~cse~ly 154 also ~ts the stator asserr~ly 130 ~o rotate anly ~ t.he s~me direction as ~ :~peller ass~ly 125. me over-runn~ clutch as~ly 154 resists tor~e ~n oQe di~e~ic~n for the purp~se of malcir~ 'che stat~r plate 152 anZ~ stator ~anes 150 statiana~y.

This is accanplished by ~:he clu~ch ~llers 158 engaging ~dially na~chnng r~oesses tnot e~) in tl?e aver~g cl~ch caJn 156 t~ cal~ce the aver-~ clutch cam 156, rollers l5B and race 160 to ~orm a single unit.

Since the over-mnning clutch race 160 is splined at 162 to the reaction ~ft 164 ~i~h, in turn, ls wel~ed at 210 to the rea~tian Ehaft su~ort 204 ~ich cannot rotate, the mn~ng clutch calT 156, rollers 15B ar~d race 160 r~na~n stationarv, resulting ~n the ~tator plate 152 and vanes 150 r 0 a.ining stationaIy.

The over-run m ng clutch asse~bly 154 allows the stator plate 152 and ~anes 150 t~ rotate fre~ly In the opposite direction when their ~unction as a reaction ~en~er is not desired because the rollers 158 do not engage the recesses, resulting in t~e over-running clutch ~am 156 ro~ating freely ab3ut the clutch race 160.

~~=~ Ihe lock~up function ~ the bDrque converter 110 w~ll now be described.

Fluid fl~ws through the center ~sage 175 of the mput ~f~ 176 ~nto tl)e ~avity 1~2 of the front c~ver ~ 116. me tur~i~2e ~b $eal 176 E:~ver~ leakage of the 1uid back nr~d ~he input ~;haft 176. n2e fluid in cavity 182 flaws ~chralgh ~lots ~no~ ~hawn) in the frcnt ~ver bu~hing 180 and the thrust wa~ r lB4 and ~gainst the ~ 3-~ .

1 320060 lodc-up pistc~n 18Bo me ~luid pushes the portion ~ ~2 of ~he lock-up piston 188 off tl-e fric:tion disc 199, resulting ~ r:~n-lock-up operation.

At the same time, fluid fr~n the p~ ~ly 200 fla~s thra~gh passage 23û ~ the reactian ~haft Q~ori: 204 and bet~ the is~put ~;haft 176 ~ reaction ~t ~er l64. llli~ flu~d fl~s thr~gh ~lots (rK~t ~wn) in the 8te~ed 1~ 185 and ~to ~e ~rb~ne 128, ~tator 130 ~nd ampeller 126 ~ss~r~lies of ~ orq~e oanverter 110.

Fluid also ~low~ $ram these asse~blies 126, 128 ~nd 130 between the lock-up piston 188 and the turhine ~hell 168, ~ence, during normal tDrque oonverter oper~tion, fluid flow is acting a~ the cF~xosite ~ide of the lock-up piston 188, ~ttemptin~ to apply the lock-up piston 188.

~hen ~he input ~haft fluid is vented, the borque oonverter fluid pushes the lock-up piston 188 against the front cx~ner nEs~ber 116 with the friction disc 199 sauu~wiched between the tWD elements. Engine torque can then go th~x~u~h the front oover nEsnber 116 to the lock-up piston 18e and, in turn, to drive ring 196 and t~rbine shell 168.

As will be apprecia~ed, lock-up of the tsr9ue converter 110 is desirable tD xeduce or elinunate rotational speed difference or ~lip" ~etween the crankshaft 114 of the engLne and the input ~haft 176 of the trau~3mission lO0.

Lock-~p of ~ bDrg~e c=xrl~rber ~lO ~ay ke Exurtial or Full locJ~p ~l7ill el~u~e 51ip o~ ~luce ~t ts7 a zero ~e. ~ o me met}x~ology for lo~k~p of the torq~e ~erter 110 will be . , ~ 3 ~ --- 1 320060 ~ aF P~ The general, operation of ~he p~p a~se~ibly 200 ~11 nc~ be described.

Specific 1u:Ld flow fr~n the ~ 200 to varic~lus asselr~lies me punp 200 creates fl~w and ~lie~ ~orce ~ the fluid.

As describe~ pr~ usly ~ the ~eller 6hell 134 is tdelded ~t 136 to the eller h3b 138 whi~h ~cts as the p ~ drive E~haft of the ~ np ~ssen~ly 200. R~tation of the i~peller 6hell 134 ~esults in rotation of the impeller hub 138. Thus, the ex~ernal ~ouroe OL power for the pump 200 ls the engine.

In the pump assembly 200, both rotor ~ rs 218 and 222 rotate together. The inner r~tDr 222 is ~plined at 140 to the impeller hub 138 and, therefore, notates as the impeller hub 138 rvtates. As ~he mner rotor 222 ro~ates or drives the outer rotor 218, a ~paoe (not shown) ketween the r~tors 218, 222 increases as the rotor teeth separate and ~ass an outlet port (not shcwn).

In the ~ assembly 200, a cresoent-shaped protrusion (not ~hcwn)~of the pump housing 202 divides ~he rotors 218 and 222. Fluid is trapped be ~ n the prctrusion and the r~Dr teeth as it is carried to the outlet port ~r ~urther use in a m2nner to be descxibed in other BeCtianS }ler'ei~l.

AS aeSC~ibe,d previau51y, 1:1Se ~]PUt l~haft 176 D~ the trar~ ;sion 100 ~ ~ tating due ~ torque be ~ trans~erred ~mm ~he ro~ating cranksha~t 114 of ~he engins and through the ~orque oonverter 110 tD the input shaft 176. Ihe input clutch r2tainer hub 312 al~o rotates with ' A 1 320060 the ~t ~haft 176 due to it~ ~pl~ne ccnnection 317 with the input ~haft 176. ~e ir~ut clutch re~cainer 326 ar~ clutc~ plates 342, 354 and 370 also rotate with the input shaft 176 ~ue to t~e spline oc~ion 330 of the input clutch re~ainer 326 to ~ lutch retainer ~ub 312 and spline ~nnectio~ of clut~h plates 342, 354 ~nd 370 to the ~ut clutch re~ca;~er 326.

1~ ~ply the underdrive ~lu ~ ass0 ~ly 308, ~ydraulic pr~ssure ~rom fluid enter ~ between the input ~lutch retainer 326 and sec3nd hydraulic pistDn 410 noves the ~eoond hydraulic pistcn 410 axially, thereby compressing the &pring 432. The ~econd hydraulic pi~ton 410 forces the rotating clutch plates 342 ~nd momentaril~ ~tationary discs 344 of the underdrive clutch ssembly 302 ~ogether ~nd produces frictional force between the clutch plates 342 and di5cs 344. Because ~he input clutch retainer 326 and underdrive clutch plates 342 are rotating, the fricti~nal force causes the underdrive clutch discs 344 and hub 350 to rotate, in turn, rotating gear shaft 352 of the gear assembly 500. When the hydraulic fluid tD the underdrive clutch assembly 302 is vented, ~he o~mpressed spring 432 ~pplies a foroe tD the ~econd hydraulic pist~n 410, thereby retur~ing the secDnd hydraulic piston 410 tD its non-applied position as 6hown ~n the figure.

Tb apply the w erdrive clutch ~s~embly 304, hydraullc pressure ~ram ~luid enkering between the first hydraulic pisb~n 386 and the ~nput clutch reta~ner 326 ~oYes ~r pulls ~ first hydraul ic piston 386 axially, the~eby defles*ing axially the sp~ing 404. qh~ pressure pLate n~iber ~08 c)f th~ first Iyclraullc pi~ton 3~6 f~roes ~e clu~ plates 354 and discs 356 of the overdrive clut~h ~sse~ly 304 ~ge~er ~ainst the reactio~ plate 364 and produces 8 :Erictional for~e be~n them.

Y/ , 1 320060 Eecause the ~ put clutch reta m er 326 and ove ~ ive clutch plates 354 ~re xvtating~ ~he frictional foxce causes ~he overdrive clutch discs 356 and overdrive clutch hub 358 ~o rotate, in turn, r~tating the first planet carrier 508 and ~eoDnd annulus gear 542. ~hen ~he hydraul;c fluld bo the oNe~drive clutch ~ssembly 304 or first hy~raulic pist~n 386 is ven~ed, the deflected ~pring ~04 applies a for oe to ~he first hydrauLic pisbon 386, thereby returning the flrst hydraulic piston 386 to its non-applied positian as ~hown in ~he figure.

Tb apply the reverse clutch assembly 306, hy~raulic pressure from fluid entering between the first hydraulic piston 386 ~nd input clutch retainer hub 312 moves or pushes the first hydraulic piston 386 axially, thereby deflecting the spriny 404. Ihe pres Æ e plate member 40B of the first hydraulic piston 3B6 forces ~he clutch plate 370 and discs 372 of the reverse clutch assembly 306 together ~gainst the reaction plate 380 and produces a ~rictional ~orce between them.

Because the i~put clutch retainer 326 and rever~e clutch plate 370 are rotat~ny, the frictional ~or~e causes ~he reverse clutch discs 372 3nd reverse clutch ~ub 374 to ~ te, ~n tuxn, rotating ~he first sun gear 506. When the hydraulic fluid ~o the reverse ~lutch assembly 306 or first hydraulic pisto~ 386 i~ vEnted, the deflected sprmg 404 applies a foroe bo the fir~t ~ ulic piston 3B6, thereby r~turning the flrst ~dra~c piston 386 t~ n~ppliea position as 0}~ e figure.

At ~he output ~nd of the transmission 100, the two/four ~hift ~utch 308 and low/reverse clu~h 3l0 ass3mblies ~re used ~o hold a particular gear element of the gear Dsssrbly 500 ~gains rotati~n ~y coupling it t~ ~he relatlvely BtatiOnarv transmission c~e 102. qo ~pply the ~/four ~hift cl~t~h assembly 308, hydraulic pressure f~om , :

1 320060 fl~d entering betw~ the third hydraulic pi5tall h~USlJ~ 452 ~I the third hydraulic piston 448 m~ves th~ third hydraulic piston 448 ax~ally, t~reby deflecting the ~pring 444.

Ihe 'chird ~draulic piston 448 ~orces 'rhe clul:ch plates 434 ænd discs 436 of the ~,~o/four ~hift clutch ly 308 together ~gains~ the ~ction plate 445 and produces a ional ~Dr oe be1~een th ~ . I~ecau~e ~ e ts~/fcrLlr clutch plates 434 do not rctate or ~re ~ta~ionary, as they are oonn~cted to the transmission ~ase 102, the frictional for oe holds the twD/our clutch discs 436 ~tation3ry, in turn, holding the flange 442, reverse huh ~ember 374 and first ~un g ~r 506 ~tationary. When ~he hydraulic fluid to the two/~our shift ~lutch assembly 308 or third hydraulic pis~cn 44B is vented, the deflected spring 444 applies a fox oe to the third hydraulic piston 448, ther~by retNrning the third hydraulic pistLn 448 to its non-applied position as ~hown in the figure.

Tb apply the low/reverse clutch assembly 310, hydraulic pressure frcm fluid entering between the fcurth hydraulic piston hous~lg 476 and the fourth hydraulic pist~n 474 no~es the fourth hydr~ulic pisbon 474 axially, thereby deflecting the ~pring 490. qhe fourth hydraulic piston 474 forces the clutch plates ~66 ~nd discs 468 of the low/reverse clutch as~embly 310 together against reaction plate 445 3nd prDduces a fric~ ~rce bet~ th~. E3eca~ the law/re~ lutch plates 466 ~re ~at~, as tl~ ~re o~ected tt:~ the tr~nsmissical ~ase 102, 1:he frict~l for~ lds the low/IeverE~e clut~ di~cs 468 s~tionasy, in ~rrl, 1~ the ~ nd ~ulus gear 542 ~T~ f~st planet carrier 508 ~ onary. Hhen the ~ydra~lic flw d to the law/rever~e clutch ~ssembly 474 or ~curth hydraulic piston 474 is vented, ~he deflectRd ~pr~ng 490 applies a ~orce bo the ~ourth hydraulic pistDn 474, thereby ~ ~3 1 320060 returning the ~ourth hydraulic pistvn 474 to its non-applied position as shown m the figure.

In the neu~ral N Dr p~rk P ~Ddes of transnu.ssiGn cperation, ~he ~ t shaft 176 (whi~h ~s sttached tD ~he turbine ~ss~rbly 128) freely rotates with the engine ~rankshaft 114. ~ince the : ~ t clutch retainer hub 312 i6 alsD attached b3 khe input ~haft 176, the ~ t clutch retainer hub 312 rot~tc~, m turn, causing the m put clutch retainer 326 and clutch plates 342, 354 and 370 to ~reel~ rotate with the ~ngine crankshaft 114.

When the transmL~ssion 100 is desired tD operate in first gear, the underdrive clu~h ~ssembly 302 and low/reverse clutch assembly 310 are applied. Hydrauli~ fluid maves the ~eo~nd hydraulic piston 410 ~xially away from ~he torque oonverter 110 to engaqe the clutch plates 342 and friction ~iscs 344 of the underdrive clutch assembly 302. Ihis engagement causes the Lnderdkive clutch hub 3S0 to rctate which, in turn, rota~es the gear ~haft 352. Ebcause the ~econd ~un gear 520 i~ ~plined at 522 t~ ~he year ~haft 352, rotaticn of the gear shaft 352 causes the ~econa ~un gear 520 to ro~ate. As ~he l~w/~everse clutch assemtly 3io is ~Fplie~ by the eng~gement ~f the lGw/reverse clutch plates ~66 with ~e ~iEcs 468, the ~econd ~nnulus gear 542 is held 8tationary. Sinoe ~he .~eoDnd annulus gear :542 is connccteJ t~ the first pl~net c2s~1er:S~8~ ~ ~ir~t planet carrier 508 is held t~tDonary. ~As a ~e~u1t, rot~tion of the eson~ ~Nn qear 520 causes rotati~n of ~he sæco=a pink~ gears 528 and ~he ~econd planet ~arrier 524.: Because the ~p=t gear 534 is ~pl~ned at 532 to the ~eoond planet ~ .

. - : . . ~, ., , :

'~ : . , 1 320060 carrier 524, rot~tion of the ~econd planet ~ier 524 causes the output gear 534 to r~tate.

Sinoe the Eeo~d planet carrier 524 rot~tes, the first anr~ulus gear 519 also rotates, c:aus~ the first pin~on gears 510 and first sun gear 506 to ireely rotat2 111 fisst g2ar. 5he OU~llt gear 534 then trans~ers the torque fmn the seo~x9 planetary car~ier 524 to the transfer gear (n~: ~n~.

Wh~ the tXa~lisSio!n 100 iS des ~ d to operate in ~ecor~d gear, t~2 underdrive clutch assembly 302 ~nd ~he ~*~/~our ~hift clutch ass3nbly 308 are applied. Onoe ~gain, the underdrive clutch hub 350 rotates as described above which, in turn, rotates th2 gear shaft 352.

Rotation of gear shaft 352 CaU525 the ~eoond sun gear ~20 to r~tate. As the two/four shift clutch assembly 308 is ~pplied by engagement of the tw~/four shift clutch pla~es 434 with ~he discs 436, the flange 442, reverse clutch hub 374 and first ~un gear 506 are held stationary.

Because the transmission 100 has been Gperating in first gear, the first ~nnulus gear 519 and seoond planet carrier ~24 have been rDtating at ou ~ t speed. Also, the first ~un gear 506 has been rotating ~reely.

By holding the first sun gear 506 ~tationary, ~he fir~t pinion gears 510 ~nd first planet carrier 508 increase in ~peed. As a resul~, the first ~nnulus geax 519, ~econd plane' ~arrier 524 and the autput geas 534 ~tate ~t ~ greater r.p.m. than first gear.

When ~he trangmissi~n 100 ~s desired to opera~e in third gear, the underdrive clutch as ~ ly 302 and ~he over~rive clutch ~sYsmbly 304 are ~pplied. Onoe aga~n, engagement o~ the ~ ive cl~tch ~ssembly 302 causes ~he ~eocn~ sun gear 520 tD ro~ate as previausly dbscribed.

As the overdrive Clutch ~s~embly 304 is ~pplied by enga~emen~ of the clu~ch plates 354 and discs 356 of the cverdrive clutch ~ssembly 304, 1 320060 the overdrive clut~l hub 358 rotates, in turn, rotating the first planet carrier 508 due to the spline oonnection at 516. Since the first planet ~arrier 508 xotates, the first p mi~n gears 510, first ~un yeaL 506 and &eoDnd annulus gear 542 also rota~e. A5 ~ re~ult, the 8econd pinion gears 526 of ~he ~econd planet carrier 524 ~otate, causing the ~eoond planet carrier 524 bo ro~ate ~hich~ in turn, rotates the output gear 534 at ~nput ~peed or a higher r.p.m. than 0econd gear.

When the transmi5sion 100 ~S d2sired to Gperate in ~ourth gear, the overdrive clutch assembly 304 and twD/-four shif~ clutch ns6embly 308 are applied. Applica ion of ~he overdrlve clutch assembly 304 causes the overdrive clutch hu~ 358 to rDtate, ~s previously des~rikfd.

tation of the overdri~e clutch hub 358 causes the first planet carrier 50B and second annulus gear 542 to rotate. ~pplication of ~he two/four ~hift clutch ~ssembly 30~ causes the 1ange 442, r~verse clutch hub 374 ~nd ~ir~t sun ge~r 506 bo be held stationary ~s previously described.

~s a result, rotation of the firs~ planet carrier 508 causes the first pinion years 510, first annulus gear Sl9 ~nd ~econd bnnulus gear 542 to r~tate Rotation of the first and ~eo~nd ~nnulus gears 519 and 542, resieclively, causes the Retond pinio~ gears 526 and second planet carrier 524 to rotate which, ~ turn, rotates ~he output gear 534 at a : gl~#lter r.p.m~ th3n third gear.

When the tran3miR~ion 100 is desired to operate ~n rever0e ~ , the reverse clut*l D~senbly 306 ~nd law/r~erEe clutch ~ss~bly 310 are applied. ~he reverse clubch a3~embly 306 i6 ~pplied by engagement of : : the reverse clutch pL~tR 370 and discs 37~. ~his e gfn~ent c~uses th~ : ~verse clutch hNb 374 to r~tate whlch, in ~ , ~okates th~ ~irst sun gear 506. Appli~ation of the low/reverse clutch ~sseTbly 310 Cause~ the 1 320060 f~rst planet carTier 508 and the seccnd annulus gear 542 to be held ~tationary ~s prev~sly descri~3d.

As a result, the fixst ~un gear 506 rotates the ~rst pinion gears S10 which, in turn, rotate ~e first annulus g~ar S19 backwards, Rotation of the firrs~ ar~lus gear 519 causes ~ nd planet carrier 524 and seoe~nd pinio~ gears 526 to ~ tate ~ ich, in turn, ¢auses rotatio~ of the ~utput gear 534 in a direc*ion DppositP bD ~he other gear positions. ~tati~n of the 6eccnd pinion gears 526 also causes ~he ~econd ~un gear 520 to rstate ~reely.

Referring to Figure lD, the reaction plate 380 and pressure plate member 408 are fihown. m e present invention features web neans such æ an annular web 380a spaced radlally ~t the outer periphe.ry of the reaction plate 380 and oonnected to ~he reaction plate 380 at least one location c ~ ere~tially, and ~n annular web 408a spaced radially at the outer perip ~ of the pressure plate ~ 408 and oDnnected t~ the pressure pla~e nEmker 408 at least one loc~tion circumferentially.

The webs 380a and 408a are ~n efficient ~eans of increasing axial rigidity to restrict clutch deflecti~n. qhe reaction plate 380 ~nd pressure plate nEmber 408 ~esist loads produc m g a stress pattern like that found in ~ BelleYille ~pr~ng (i.e. pr~ducing a fsmily of n~nents al ~ the radial direction).

In a 6ta=d3rd pre~sure or reaction plate, ~he highest stresses occNr at the outer diameter (OD) ~nd ~nn~r d~meter ~ID) edges. The distribubÆd loading ky the ~lu~ch apply pi~tcn ~auses the plate ~D deflect t~ a generally oonical ~hape o~ ~ome angle ~heta. ~ith the addition o~ the annular web 380a, 408a~ mDre material i~ being ~trained, ,.

1 320060 resulting in l~ tresses and less deflection theta. qhus, the addition of the we~ 380a, 408a prc1duoes a plate havin~ a ~tiffness cc~arable to the e3ltire vDlume fram :~ to OD of the reaction pla~e 380 or p~essure pla'ce m~iber 408 ha~ been fill~d wi~h m~teri~l.

Ad~tianally, ~he in~ide dia~t~r of the z~}ar web portion 380a is fitted closely with the altside ~ er of clut~h retainer f ~ ers 341 Euch that the fingers 341 ~nd ~nap ring 384 ~le better su~ported ~effectively 6tr~) ~gainst ~xi~l pi~ton loading and centrifugally induced loads.

As illustrated in ~igures 2~ and 2B, the reaction ~ha~t nember 164 a~d reaction shaft ~upport 204 are shcwn. ffl e reaction shaft memker 164 is welded at 210 to the reaction shaft ~upport 204. The reaction ~haft support 204 ccmprises a plate portion 232 integral with a hub portion 234. The plate portion 232 includes a pair of cir ~ erentially ~paced ~pertures 236 and 23B. Each aperture 236 and 238 has a correspandlng passageway 240 ~ cating th2rewlth ~nd an cutlet port 242. ~leeder neans ~uch ~s blee~er ball check valves or dribblers, generally indlcated at 244 ~nd 246, ~re disposed in ~pertNres 235 and 238, re ~ ely, bo fill the dutch apply cavities 620 and 622 of the c~erdrive 304 ~nd reverse 306 assemblies, respectively, ~s eDon as possible s~ter ~he input cl ~ ~e~PinPr 326 begin5 ~0 rDtate ~nd to 3ssure that some fluid always drLbbles th~reto.

The bleeder ball ~heck ~alveq 244 3nd 246 ea~h include a ~creen 248, a ball ~pport 250 dlsposed in ~he p~ss~geway 240 And a balI 252 ~upported therein. m e ball 252 ~oves tD cpen and close a nasrow . .

1 320060 aperture or orifice 254 in the ball ~upport 250. Ihe ~c~een 248 acts as a filter ~o prevent plugging of the orifiee 254. The ball support 250 is also formed wlth inwardly directed fingers 255 w~ich limit the axial w ement of the ~all 252. The bleeder ball check valves 244 and 246 allow one~~ay fluid flow ~o ei~her the overdrive 304 or reverse 306 clutch assemblies, respec*ively. The size or diameter of the orifice 254 ~s ~elected tD ~ tain ~ minimum pressure, i.e. appr~ximately 0.25 to 2 p.s.i., in the clu~ch apply cavities 620 ~nd 622 at all times.

In operation, fluid flaws from the ~orq~le converter 110 to reacti~n shaft ~upport 204. ~hen either clutch assembly 304, 306 is released, fluid enter5 apertNres 236 or 238 m the plate portion 232 and flows thro~gh the oorresponding orifice 254 ln ball ~upport 250 due to the pressure differential between the fluid pressure from the ~rque oonverter 110 and the respective clutch ~pply cavity being vented.

Fluid displaoes ~nd m~ves past the ball 252 ~o ~he overdrive 304 or reverse 306 clutch assemblies. ~hen the clutch apply cavity is filled, the fluld pressure mcv2s the ball 252 to close the orifice 254 to prevent backflow. ~ , the blee~er ball check valves 236 and 238 provide fluid to keep the clutch ~pply cavities 620 and 622, respectively, filled and waintain a pressure balanoe on the first hyaraulic piston 386 whenever rDta~ion ~xi~ts.

Referring bo Figure lB, the f~r~t hydraulic pisbon 386 includbs at least one bleeder or~ioe 256. The bleeder orifioe ~56 is typically 0.020 inches ~n di2meter and ~çmm~nicates ~xially ~hrcugh ~he first hydrauli~ piston 386. A ~ilter such as a ~creen 25B is disposed in the 1 320060 bleeder orifioe 256 to prever t plugging of the bleeder ~rifice 256 ~y dirt and other o~ntamin~ts~ In operation, the ~irst hydraulic piston 3B6 i~ di splaoed axially ~y flu~d pressure in ~ clutch ~ly ~vities 622 and 620 ~r the a~plication of either the reverse 306 c3r averdrive 304 clutch ass~lies, r~ectively. ~en that application is r~, the first hy~r~}ulic pistc~ 386 ~st ret~rn to its ~ubs~tially ~tered or non-aFplied position. ~e to ~he oentri~al ~oe ~cting an the rotating flu~d in ei~}er of the clutch ~pply cav~ties 620 or ~22 which ~plied the piston 386, an unba~noed p~essure will exist ar~d cause the firs~ hydraulic piston 386 to be biased and ~rain in that position even though the fluid apply line is vented. ~e bleeder orifice 256 acts as a means to d low flu~d to pass thra~gh the fLrst hydraulic pistoll 386 due to this differential pressure and allows the first hydraulic piston 386 to be oe ntered by the spring 404 since any centrifugal fluid pressure in the clutch apply cavity is kalanced by a ~ able ~entrifugal fluid pres~ure on the opposite side wh~n both clutch apply ca~ities 620 and 622 aIe fllled. 5he ~eoond hydxaulic pistcn 410 has a 5imilar bleed orifioe (n~t ~hown) and æoondary ~ource of ~luid to fill its pressure balance cavity.

As illustr~ted in Figures lC, 3A ~nd 3B, ~ ~ean~ ~uch as a do~ble-acting ~pring 404 lDcates ~n~ returns the ~irst hydraulic pistcn 386. The dbuble~cting qpring 404 ~s ~ Belleville like ~pring, The double~acting ~pring 404 is als~ annular ~nd eonically 6haped with circumferentially ~pac~d ~nd inwar~ly ~x*ending fingers 405. m e 1 320060 ~ble-acting spri~g 404 provides the ~dvantage of 6aving space ax~ally in the transnission 109 due to its carç~actness.

In c~ther words, a coq~vel~tional c~il 6pring w~uld ~ease the axial length of the transmission 100 as c~Qared to the doub~ g Eipri~sg 404.

ffle sprir~ 404 ~s da~ cting; that is, i.t is ~pplied in two dir~ctions at t ~ different focal po~nts. As illustr~ n Figure 3C, when the first hydraulic piston 386 is l~tE~ or substantially ~entered in its n~n-engaged or non-applied posltion between ~he ~nput clutch retainer hNb 312 and the input clutch ~etainer 326, ~he dGuble-acti~g ~pring 404 maintai~s a four point contact. The d~uble-acting spr~ng 404 oont~cts the snap ring 394, the shculder portion 313 of the ~ t clutch retainer hub 312, the inner periphery of the first hydraulic pi.st~n 386 and one end of the hub portion 32B of the input clutch retainer 326.

h~en the fi~st hydraulic piston 386 applies the overdrive clutch 304, the dcuble-a ~ ~pring 404 is displaced toward the torque converter 110. As illustrated in Figure 3D, the double-acting spring 404 ~t i~s ~uter periphery contacts ~he ~hould~x portion 313 of the input clutch retainer hub 312 and the inner peripherv ~f the first hydraulic piston 386. The double-ac*ing ~pr mg 404 applies a return ~o ~ ~ its oentered positian at the ~nner periphery of the first hydraulic pistQn 3B6.

~ en th2 f~r~t h~drau~ic piston 386 applies ~he reverse clutch 306, She dbuble-act~ng ~pring 404 i~ displaced ~xially Ln a direction æway ~rom the torgue:Q~n~erter 110. As illustrated ~n Figure 3E, the dbuble-ac~ing 3pr~ng ~404 contacts t~e snap ring 394 ~nd th~ en~ of the hub portion 32~ of the ~nFut clutch retainer 326, The double-ac~ing k' S/ 1 320060 spr~ng 404 a~lies a return force taward its cente~ed positic~ at the ~ap rmg 394.

In ~ rds, doubïe-acting ~pr~ng 404 ~plies a fc~roe at its ulte~ periphe~y in t~e di~xc*ion of the torque oonverter 110 to mave the first hydraulic pis~on 386 axially ~ che ~ ue ~nverter 110.

5his focal p~ t is located at ~che inner perip~ery thereof. me da~ble-actir~g ~;pr ~ 404 ~ pplies a foroe ~t its i~ er periphe~r in the ~ ion of the ou~put gear 534 ~o noYe the first hydraulic pist3n 386 toward the ~utput gear 534. This ~ocal point is located at the outer periphery of the double-ac ~ ~ring 404.

A~ditionally, ~he double-ac~ing ~pring 404 is preloaded either by the first hydraulic piston 386 or the input clutch retainæx hub 312.

Since ~he double-acting ~pring 404 usually bends ns ~ cantilever ~eam, ths preloading of the spring 404 by the inner periphery of the first hydraulic piston 386 produces a tip aefl ~ on at the cuter periphsry of . ~ dcuble-acting spring 404, resulting in a gap between the ~pring 404 and the ~nap ring 394. ~relQading at the ~houlder 313 by the mput clutch retainer hNb 312 produces ~ tip deflectiQn in the spposite direction, reducing the g~p between ~he d~uble-acting ~pring 404 ~nd ~nap ring 394 by a large ~mount. As a ~esult, ~he double-acting spring 404 wi~ ome ~termsdlake ~r ~tatically ~ndebermlnate position, d~stributing ~ lGad t~ ~11 four apply points prev~ously aescribed. In cther ~rds, ~he axi~l lash in the piston position is removed by the dcuble-Astirg ~pring 404 ~s it deform6 bo take ~ 6tatica11y lndb*erminake position beb~een th~ f~rst hydraulic pis~cn 386 and the CIUt t~h Xeta~ eC' ~b 312D ~ .

' ~ 1 320060 The park locking mechanism pc)sitively loclcs ~æ ~nd planet carrier 524 of the tr~nsmission 100 to the transm~ss~ ase 102 wherl the p~rk operating ~de of the tran~nissiGn 100 is manually ~ele~ted by the driver or c~erator of the vehicle. ffle ~resent Lm~ention ~x;vides an aut~ratic tran~nissiol~ park locking ~ ism designed t~ re ~ ce to the least possible extent the liding friction and effort require~ to actuate the park locking ~ech3nism~ Re~erring tD Figures 4A thrrugh gJ, a lcw-effort double-roller park lccking ~echanism ~r sprag 560 is ~hYwn. As illustrated in Figure 4E, the park ~prag 560 includes a pawl lever or ~ember, generally indicated at 561, having a ~hape s~milar t~ the lower case letter ~r".

The pawl ~ 561 includes a head portion 562. A planar edge portion 562a, a ~loping cam or ramp portion 562b and a pressure edge por~ion 562c provide a cam surfa oe , as will ke explained belcw, engageable with rollers. One end 563 of the pawl ~ r 561 is pivotally oonnected about a dowel or pin 564 of ~he transmission case 102. The p~wl nEmber 561 is ~upported by the pin 564 between a retainer bracket, generally ~n~icated ~t 565. The ret ~ bracket 565 is U-shaped Ln cross-section ~nd includes an inwardly offset wall portion 565a jolned to the principal ~11 portion 56 ~ by ~n in ~ iate oblique ~r ~ngled wall po ~ 565c t~ ~Drm a bra~ket ~ll. m e ~ngled wall portion S65c ether with thc prin~pal 565b and off æ t 565~ wall p~rti~ns provide a ¢am ~ur~a oe for ~he rollers to be described herein. The offset wall Fx~ni~on 56~a te:l~JlabeS in a riyht-~nglad ~tsp flange ~r end wall S65d (Figure 4D). Ihe retainer bra~ket 565 includes a pair o~ ~ide walls 566 eid~din3 outward~y from ~he bracket wall 565a, 565b, 565c.

~.

1 320060 Washers 567 and 568 are disposed ab~t ea~h side of the pawl m~snber 561 and the,pin 564 betw~n the ~ide walls 566 c:f the retainer bracket 565. A spr~ng means ~r~risis~g a ~spring 569 is disposed abc1~t the p~n 564 and has one end engaging a ~e~nd ~1 or pirA 570 of the transm~ssic;n case 102 an~ he ~r ~nd er~gag~ng as ~tep or Ed~ulder 571 on the pawl ~er 561. me spring 569 biases ~che pawl nE~r 562 tcward ~he offset wall portion 565a of the re ~ r ~rac~cet 565.

The pawl ~ember 561 ~ ates wi~h a rod asse~bly, genexally indicated at 572. m e rod assembly 572 camprlses a rcd 573 haviQg a cap nEmber 574 secured at one end. An a~tachment member 575 i5 disposed about the rod 573~ m e attachment ne~b~r 575 includes a Ehaft 576 disposed in an aperture 577 of a manu21 lever or rooster ccmb 578 and secured thereto by a snap rLng 579. A ~pring 580 is disposed abcut the rod 573 between ~he atkachment ~ r 575 and laterally extendmg projections 581 on the rDd 573. A ~re detailed ~5cription of the m~nual lever 578, manual valve 604, shaft n~mber 770, and cam groYve 772 can be ~ound under section headLnq "CAM CONTRCLLED M~NU~L V~LVE".

The other end of the rod 573 includes a pair of latexally &djaoent cam rollers 582 ~n~ 583 jcurnally ~upported therecn by their associated sNpport pms 584 and 5B5, ~espectively, fiecured t~ a ULshaped ~rTier or ~ac~ket ~ 586, ~s ~llusb~ated in Eigure 4F, Each oiE the rollers 58~, 583 are ~or~3d wi~:h a oentral bore ~84a and 5B5a, r~spec*ively. Each bore 584a, 5G5a receive pin~ 584, 585, respectlvely, ~herethrcugh ~n an oversize m~ner sucb-that each of the x~llers 582 and 583 are ~n~e ~or p~deberm1n;d limi~ed tr~n~erse movement rel~tive bo its associat d pin 50 ~s tD rollingly ~ngage ~he remaining ~oller.

~: .

~.

1 320060 ` Ihe U-~haped bracket n~nker SB6 ~ ludes an inclined projection 5B7 extending ~utwardly parallel with ~he ~ides ~hereof. A prDjection 588 extends cutwardly fr3m each side of the U-shap~ racket D~s~r 586 to ~ de the bracket m~mb~r 586 between ~he 6id~es of ~he retainer bracket 565, as illustrated ln Figure 4G. Ihe U-~4~d ~racket ~emker 586 also in~ludes an inverted ~L" ~haped portion 590 at the bot~om of the ~11 .

In cperation, the pawl nEmber 561 ~buts the :retain~r bracket 565 ~ue b~ the biasLng ~f ~he ~pr~ng 569, as illustrated in ~olid lines in Figure 4C~ when the ~hift lev~r p~siti~n is n~t park P. When a shift position or gear 6elecbor lever or ~haft 591 co~nected to the manual lever 578, as illustrated ln Figures 4B and 4H, is mDved to the park P position, the rDd 573 is mLved. m e rollers 582 and 583 roll alcng the principal wall portion 565b o~ the rekainer bracket 565 and the pressure edge portion 562c of the pawl me~ber 561, respectively. On~ 583 of the rollers engages a r ~ portion 562b of the pawl menber 561 and one 582 of ~he rollers engages the ~ngled wall portion 566 ~f the retainer bracket 565, as illustrated in Figures 4C ~nd 4D. Ihis ~auses ~he pawl menker 561 ~o be displaced or rotated abc~t ~he pin 564. The rod 573 ~o~zs until ~ne end of the h~ad p~rtion 562 of th# pawl menber 561 has engaged a spaoe 592 between a pa~r ~f D~jaoent teeth 544 in ~he ~econd p ~ t carrier S24 ~ the gear a~mbly 500 ~nd the r~llers 582 ~nd 583 abutting ~nteroonnect the planar ~dge~portisn 562a of the pawl nember 561 ~nd the off~et wall prrtion 565a of the retainex bracket 565 as ~llustratd ln ~Dlid l~nes ~n Figux~ 4~q qhe ~peration i~ xeversed when the shift lever is in ~ position okh~r thEn ~he park P pbsitlon.

A :, , 1 3200~0 l~e L~shap~d portion 590 engages a slot 594 ~ a plate n~er 596 ~nnected to the valve ~ody 603 of the tr~ssi~ ~se 102 at the c~ther extr~ne of the travel , the installatiorl positic~ ~IN), as illustrated ~ igures 4H, 4I ~ 4J, ~o limit the travel of ~e rod ass~ly 572.

Dur~g ~ss~ly of the tr~ion lOO, the in~tallatic~ positicm p~events the rod ~s~sr~ly 572 frsm being ~ad g the r~d ass0ibly 572 ~n axial ali~nent w~th the guitle }:racket 565.

~ en ~he ;hift le~rer positic~n is park P pc)sition, ~2e pawl ~r~er 561 may not engage a E;paoe 592 be~ ~djaoent teeth 544 in the ~e~ond planet carrier 524 as ~7n ~n Figure 4D. ~s~ this case, the ~pr3ng 580 biases the rod 573 to~rd the end wall 565d of the bracket ~er 565. miS causes the head portic~ 562 of the pawl nE~er 56:L to ccntact a tooth 544 on the ~econd planet carrier 524. ~ihen the vehicle rolls backwzrd, causing the seoond planet carrier 524 to rGtate, the biased spring 580 noves the rod 573 and, in tNrn, noves the ~Y~d portion 562 in~o the ~ available space 592 in the ~econd plane~ carr~er 524 to lock the second plan~* carrier 524 in place.

Acoord mglv, the park locking wechanism 560 provides cam rollers 582, 583 with aver6ized bores SB4a, 585b, r~sspe~ively, to allcF,t the rollers 582, 583 to ~hi~t i~tD load-kearing oontact. Thus~ the naln ~eaction load ~ppl~ed by the o~f6et wall portion 565b ~nd the cam ~urface 56Zb of the p*wl ~e~nber 561 ~re tr2nsmhtted first between the rollers 582, 583 tD the off6et wall portion 565b and, in turn, b~ the transmission case 102. ~ence, ~ubst~Dti~lly redhced reacticn lo~ds are transmitted bo the pins 584, SB5 SD as b~ incr~ase the ~ervi oe li~e of the pins 584, 585 and rollers 582, 583.

' ~ 56 , . .

1 320~60 Ihe unction of the hydraulic ~ystem is to cooperate with the electrc)nic c:ontr~ls (Pigures 28A thraugh 28G~ to malce the trans~ssion 100 fully ~utcn~tic. P~eferr~ ts~ Figures 5A through ~L, ~ ~h~natic diagram of the ~raulic ~ys~m 600 ~r cantrolli:ng ~d ~eratir:g the fluid fl~ thra~haut ~2e tr~ssi~ 100 is ~1. me p~p assen~ly 200, clutch asselrblies 302, 304, 306, 308 ar~d 310, torque ~verter ~ssesr~ly 110 of l?igure 1, an~l ~lves to be described here~n, are ocQnnected by a plurality of ~ternal passageways, generally indicated at 602 , in or between the valve b~dy 603 (Figure 6), transfer plate ~not ~hown) and tran~ssion case 102.

Ihe fl~Ld sl~uroe of the tr~ssicm 100 is the fluid c:onta~ned in t~e ~ansmissio~ (not ~wnt whi~ ts as a reservoir. A filter 605 is attached ~o the lo~ær half of ~ transfer plate at the inlet of the transfer plate to prevent dirt nnd other foreign matter fro~n entering the hydraulic syste~ 600.

Another filter (not shown) is disposed m the valve body 603 at the pump pressure inlet to a pressure lator valve 608 to protect ~he pressure regulator ~alve 608 from any loose chips and dirt in the pump hydraulic circuit.

m e pump as~embly 200 ~s also occcected by the pass3geways 602 ~o ~ n~Ln~al valv~ ~04 which is oEupled to the 8anually ~ctuat0d shift lever or ranual ~haft S91. The n~nual ~haft 591 is connected tD the ~nual l@ver 57a ~Fi ~ e 4B), lts shift levex p~siti~n PRNoDDL ~eing generally ~ndicated by num~ral 606. The pump a8sembly 2~0 is further ciDnccted by pa~geways 602 t~ ~ pressure re~u~ator valve 608 and to a ~olenoid or fluld ~witch ~al~e 610. The p~ssageways 602 al~o oonnect the pressure regulatvr 608 tD a coDl~r or tDrgue oon~rter ~T/C) oontrol 1 3200~0 valve 612. The passageways 602 also oonnect the T/C ccntrol valve 612 to a lock-up ~LU), switch valve 614. The passageways 602 ~urther connect the LU switch valve 614 to the ~orgue ocnverter 110, ~n~ thQy also provide a path from the torgue o~nverter 110 back ~o the LU 6witch valve 614 a~ to T/C c~n~:rol valve 612. ~ c~ler 616 is ~r~ by passageways 602 to the T/C ~ntrcl valve 612. The nanual valve 604 is ~lso ~vnnected by passageways ~02 to an underdrive element or clutch apply cavity 618, an overdrive clutch apply ca~;~y 6~0, reverfie clutch appltr cavity 622 and a tw~/four shift clutch apply cavity 624. A low/reverse clutch apply cavity 626 is ~3nnected ks~ passageways 602 to the solenoid switch valve 610 and, in turn, to the m~nual valve 604.

m e clutch apply cavities 618, 620, 622, 624 and 626 are also identified in Figures lC and lD. me valves 604 and 610 are also connected b~ passageways 602 to a vent reserv~ir 628 in the manifold ~sserbly 700 (Figures 7-9) which is at a higher elevation th~n the sump ~r fluld ~eserv~ir in ~he transmlssion pan. Ihe o~her valves vent to the su~p as indicated ~y the letter ~'.

~ e ~aulic system 600 lsD includes ~n und~rdkive element or clutch solenoid-actuated valve 630, overdrive clutch solenoid-actuated ~alve 632, twD/~our ~ ft clutch ~ol~n~id-actuated valve 634 an~ low/reverse olutch sDlen~id-aetuated valve 636 whi~h will be described in 03nnection with Figures 7-9. lhe fiolenDid-actuated valves 630, 632, 634 ~nd 636 ~n~rDl the fluid flow to ~he~ r ~eSpec*iVe dutch apply ~avi~es 618~ 62~ 624 I~r2d 626r The n~nusl v~lve 604 ocn~rDls the fluld fl3w ~D ~he reverse clutch apply caNity 622~ Ihe low/reverse clutch solenoid-ac~u~ted valve 36 includes a ~eoond or dhal ~unction of o~ntrolling ~luid flow ~o the ~58' 1 320060 LU swi~ch valve 614 dur~g lo~k~p vf the tor~ue oonvertex 110 ~Figures 5G, 5I, 5J, SL). I~e two/four clutch ~olen~id-actuated ~ralve 634 also has a dual ~un~ion of c~ntr~lling ~Eluid flow i:o the ksw/x~ver~e clutch ~ply cavit~ 626 when ~he E~hift lever E~s ition 606 is r~verse (Figur~ 5C~. ~ese ~olenoid ac~ated val~res 630, 632, 634 ~nd 636 ~ te in res ~ se t~ ocnr~nd or a:~t ~ l ~ignals f m n ~che elec ~ ic oontrols.

In cne enl~xl~=ent acoording tD th~ prese~t invention, both the unYderdrive clutch solen~id-actuated v21~e 630 ~nd tw~/four ~ ift clutch ~olenDid-actua~ed val ~ 634 are aesigned ~o be n~rmally applied. Ihis EE~ns that in the absence of electrical Fx~wer, the ~clenoid-actua~ed valves 630 ~nd 634 wil} allow pressure or 1uid flow in th~ passageways 602 to ke tran ~ tted ~o th2 un~erlrive clutch apply cavity 618 and tw~/foul shift clutch npply cavity 624, respec*ively, Hence, the un~erdrive clutch ~sserbly 302 ~ tw~/four ~hift clutch assembly 308 will be applie~, re ~ ting in the tran~mdssion 100 cperating in ~e~x~nd gear. Llkewise, the overdrive clu~ch ~len~id-actuated val~e 632 and low/reverse clutch solenoid-actuat~d Yalve 636 ~re designed ~o ~e ~rmally vented. Ihis nE~ns that in the absenoe of electrical Fx~er, the Golenoid-actuated valves 632 ~nd 636 ~ 11 vent fl~id in passageways 602 and thus pr~vent fluid flow tD the ov ~ rive ~lutch ~pply csvity 620 ~ 13w/~qnnerse cl~ h ~pply ea~ity 6~6, ~espeet~ely. E~uce, the c~Yrdrive d utch as-e$bly 304 ana lowtrev~r~e clutch assembly 310 will DXDt ke ~pplied sD that the trensmi~sicn 100 ~y operate in ~csnd gear.

5he bbcblrullc sysbEm ~00 Al~D ~n~ludes accN~iL4tors 630, 640, 642 and 6~4 ~ ch ~re CYr:~KJted tD passag~ways 60~ before ~he underdrive 618, cverdr~e 620, ~wQ/four ~hifk 624 ~n~ 1C~J/SeVer~e 626 ~lutch ~pply c~vities, resF~x:ti~ely. ~s ~llustrated in Figure 6~ the ~cc~mulators ~7 , .

.. ... ,.

..

~ 320~60 638, 640, 642 a~ 644 caTprise a first ~pring 645a, a ~ nd spr~ng 645b and a piston 645c operating ~n a bore 645d lr~ the valve ~Ddy 603. ~e pu~pose of these acc~lators 638, 640, ~42 an~ 644 is to a~sorb the flu~d aE~ly pressure ~ 3xlp cushios~ the a~licatian c>f the ur}~rive 302, overdrive 304, ~/fc~ ift 308 and low/reverse 310 clut~h ~ssen~lies, respectively.

A.s illustrated in Figures 5~5L, pre3sure ~ hes 646, 648 and 650 are o~nnectc~ to the passageways 602 which lead to the overdrive clutch apply cavi~y 620, the tw~/fcur ~hift clutch ~ply ~avity 622 and the low/reverse clutch aFply cavity 6'6, respectively. The pressure tches 646, 648 and 650 provide a digital electrical ~ignal of xero ~0) value when there is either an absence of ~luid pressure or 1uid pressure below a predetermined pressure, and a value of one ~1) when there is fluid pressure present at or abo~e a predetermined pressure the passageway 602 leading to the respec*lve clutch apply cavities 620, 624 and 626.

However, it should ~ appreciated that other suit~ble pressure sensors may be employed in these ~r Q~her locations in the apprcpriate ~ lication.

Ihe hydraulic sysbEm 600 alsD includes firs~ 652, ~ 654, third 656, fsurth 658 and fifth 6~0 ball Gheck valves in the passageways 602 leading bD the l~w/reverse 626, undbrdrive 618, lDw/reverse 626, rever~e 622 a~d overdrive 62~ clutch ~pply cavities, ~espectively. The ball check val~ 652, 654, 656~ 658 ~n~ 660 ~ i~e A ~ ball c4erating ~gainst a ~at, typically ~ormed in ~he valve bcdy 603, ~nd ore used for flow oon~nDl tD qpen ~nd close parti~ular pas6ageways 602.

qhe ball is ~sted by pressure actlng against ~he ball ~nd unsea~ed b~ pressure keing applied cn ~he ~Qposite or ~eat side of the ball.

,~ 6 ~ :~ .

1 320060 As illustrated in Figures 5A t}~gh 5L, the L~ swit~h valve 614, T/C oontrol ~lve 612 and p~essure regula~r 608 in~lude 6pr~gs 662, 664 and 666, respectively, at o~e end to preload these ~lves. A then~l valve 668 ~s also ~ded to r~ulate ~e fluid flaw thrc~gh c~k valve 654 ~t higher ~luid telrQeratures.

The thermal val~re 668 closes or ~ens Z~ icular passageway 602 based on the flu~d ~r~era~xe.

As illustrated in ~igures 5A~I" the hydraulic system 600 is ~hown. m e dense shading ox hatching in the passageways 602 ~hows fluid at pump pressure. The ~parse ~hading or hatching illustrates a low fluid pressure. m e intermediate ~hading or hatching illustrates a fluld pressure be ~ that of pump pressure and a l~w press~e. m e absence of shadlng or hatching shcws the passageways 602 as vented.

~ hen the engine is mitially started, the pressure regulabDr 608 is actuated or moved by f~uid pressure to ~llow fluid ~ the pump assembly 2~0 to flow through the pressure regulator 608 between the first 670a and ~econd 670b l~nds to the T/C oDntrol valve 612, as illustrated in Figure 5A. The T/C oontrol valve 612 is ~imilArly ~ctuabed by ~luid p¢essure to allow fluid fr~m the pressure regulatDr 60B ~D flGw betwe2n the ~irst 672a ~nd ~eoond 672b lanls of the T/C ccntrol valve 612 to the LU Ewitch valYe 614. Fluid ~hen f~cws between khe fix~t 674a and ~ccod 674b landb o~ the IU ~wi~ch valve 614 ~D the bDrque ocoNerter 110. ~s ~luid pressure Doves the lock-up pisbon 188 of or ~n disengagement wlth ~he friction d~sc 199 of the lcck~up clutch a sembly 186 ~ that lock-up is nDt applied. Fluid ~lso flows ~rom the .

:

1 32Q060 torque converter 110 ~ack ~o t}~e T/C control valve 612.

Fl~d flcws between the ~econd 674b ~d third 674c lands t~ereof and thr~gh the ~oler 616 where it i5 t~toled ~d used for l~rication.

As illustrated in Figure SA, wh~ the 6hift, lever position 606 ~s park P or neutral N with the a2t~t ~peed No ~ran ~ tr~ssic)n's autput ~peed sensor 546 less than 600 r.p.m., fluid flaws fmn ~ zlsse ~ ly 200 to che manual valve 604. Fluid flaw~; thr~ugh the manual val~e 604 between the first 676a ~nd ~econd 676b lands t~ the low~reverse clutch ~olen~id-actuated valve 636 whic~ is energized by ~he transmission oDntroller 3010 and moves to allow fluid to flow through it t~ the solenoid switch valve 610. m e ~olenoid ~witch valve 610 is hydraulic or fluid pressuxe operated for reciprocal movement between a first position shown in Figure 5E and a second position sh3wn in Figure 5F.

Flu1d flows thrcugh the ~olenoid ~wltch valve 610 between the second 678b and third 678c lands thereof tD the first ball ~heck valve 652. me f-rst ball check valve 652 is ~o~ed ~y fluid pressure b~ close the flow ~a~h to the vent through the nanual valve 6 M ~nd cpens the flc~ path t~ the low/reverse clutch ~pply Gavity 626~ Fluid ~low~ thrGugh ~he ~irst ball eheck valve 652 to the low/reverse clutch ~pply ~avi~y 626 ~ehind the fQur~h hydraulic pi~tcn ~7~ t~ ~pply ~he /rever&e clut~h a~s3mbly 310 ~n a n~u~er ~ontrolled by the oqmmand ignal from ~h2 transmiEsion oontr~ller 3010 ~ent tD the low/rever5e d ut~h aolenoid-actuate~ valve 636.

AS illustrabed ~n Figure 5~, ~lu~d flow~ ~rom ~he ~nual valve 604 and ~olenGid swit~h valve ~10 t~ koth fiides ~f the this~ ball ~heck val~e 656. In th1s case, the third ~all check Yalve 656 ls redund~nt.

6~ .~ `' 1 320060 ~ he manual valve 604 ~lso allaws fluid in ~e clutch a~ply cavity 624 of the ~/f~ur shift clutc~ ass~ly 30B tQ vent to the vent reservoir 628, resulting ~n this ~lutch s~ot being engaged or ~pplied.

S~nilarly, ~Eluid in t:he clutch aE~ly cavity 618 of ~ ur~er~grive clutch ass~ly 302 is ~ted el~:her 'chr~gh the m~al v2l1ve 604 to the ~rç or through the under~rive clut~h ~olenoid-actuated valve 630.

Sane flu~d ~ran the tor~ue converter llO &150 flaws thrw gh the bleeder ball check valves 244 and 246 tD the cverdrive 620 and reverse 622 clutch aFply cavities a~ previously described. ~bwever, ~he overdrive 304 and reverse 306 ~lutch ~ssemblies are essentially vented and not applied.

Fluid from the pu~p ~ssembly 200 als~ flows to the solenoid switch valve 610 at one end of the fir~t land 678a to pressure balance solenoid switch valve 610. In other words, fluid flow pressurizes one end of the ~ol~l~oid 6witch valve 610 to allow the v~lve to neL~tain its current position ~nd prevent the valve from ~ov mg to one end or the other past its desired or p ~ r posi~ion. Fluid also flows from the pump assembly 200 tQ ~he L~ switoh ~alve 614 be~ween ~he third 674G and f~urth 674d lands and is dead-endsd. qhis is because the LU ~witch valve 614 is a single di~meter va~ve, therefore n~ ~esultant for2e exlsts to overcone the spring ~oroe of ~pring 666. Additionally, fluid from the pump a5semhly 200 flows to cne end of a plug 680 of the ssure regul~bor 60B bD p¢e~sure balanoe the pressure regulatDr 608.

Fluid from the pump a~erb~y 200 ~ur~h~r flows to the tw~/four Ehift ~lutch ~olenbid-actuated valve ~34. ~b~ever, this valve is energized by the transmd sicr. ~ontroller 3010 and m~v2s tD ~lock or close ~luid fl~w to the ~wD/four ~h~fg clu~ch ~pply cavity 6~4, .; ~3 .

.

.

1 3~0060 As illustrated in Figure 5~, wh~ the s~if~ lever position 606 is neutral N with the altFut speed No fram the transmissi~n's c~ ut ~ sensor 546 grea~r than 600 r.p.m., flu~d 1Ows fram t}~ ~np as~rbly 200 to the manual valve 604.

Fluid flc~; thr~gh ~he ~anual valve 604 bet~ the f~;t 676a ~d ee~d 676b lands ~ ~ third ball che~c valve 656.

This flu~d p~resÆe ~Ves the ~hird ball check valve 656 to clc~se the flow path tc the l~w/reverse ~ ut~h apply cavity 626.

~lence, the lclw~verse clut~ assen~ly 310 i~ r~t ~pplied, but ~nted through the first ~all check valve 652 ~ either the l~/reverse clutch solenoid-actua~d valve 636 or the manual valve 604.

Ihis prevents the tr~ssion 100 fr~n being shifted into a drive mode OD, D or L abave an ~2desired ~ ut 6peed No, i.e. 600 r.p.m.

Fluid fran the m~nual valve 604 also flows to the low/r~verse clutch ~olenoid-actuated valve 636 which is off or de-energized ~i.e. ~Drmally vented) and closes the flow path to the ~olenoid swltch valve 610.

The m~nu21 valve 604 further allows fluid in the clutch apply cavity 624 of the bwD/four shift clutch ~ssembly 308 to vent to the vent reservoir 628, resulting in this clut~h n~t bein~ engaged or ~pplied, Fluid in the clutch ~pply cavity 618 of the underdrive clutch ~sse~bly 302 vents ~ h the underdrive ~lutch ~len~id-actuated valve 630 to vent the reservDir 62a, resul ~ ln tbi~ clut~h n~t being engaged or a~plied. ~he cwcrdrive 304 an~ re~erGe 305 clutch assemblies ~ ive 8Gme fluid but are ven~ed or n~t applied ~ previously described. Fluid ~rom the p~mp assembly 200 also flcws bc o~e d of the ~ir~t l~nd 678a of the ~olenDid Ewitch valve 610 to hDld ~t ~n ~ po~itlon or ~ d c~mmw m cation by the pa5sageways 602 between ~he low/rev~rse clutch 601enoid-~ctNated valve 636 ~nd the clutch flpply cavity~ 626 of the 1 320060 law/reverse clutch as~r~ly 310.

Fluid also flcws frcm the p~np asserribly 200 to the L~ sw~tch valve 614 ar~d pressure regulator 608 as previous:Ly described. A~9ditiorlally, fluld ram the p~rp asselr~ly 200 furt}~ flows to the ~/fa~r ~hift clutch ~lesx~id~actuated valve 634.

Bawever, this val~e is energized to bloc)c 1u~d iElaw ~LS previausly described.

As illu.strated in Figl~re 5C, wher~ the ~hift. lever position 606 is reverse R, ~e n~r~al valv~ 604 attached tD t}~ ~nual lever 578 is mwed or shifted.

Fluid flw~s ~n the p~p asse~ibly 200 ~o the manual valve 604.

Fluid flaws ~:hrough the ~rlual val~re 604 bet~wee~ the f~rst 676a arld second 676b lands and through an orifice 682 to the reverse clutch apply cavity 622 between the second hydraulic piston 410 and input clutch netainer hub 312 to ~pply ~he reverse clutch assembly 306.

Fluid flaws to both xides of the faurth ball check valve 65B malcing it redundant. ~bwever, the fourth ball check valve 658 all~ws fluid flow fran the . reverse clutch a~ply cavity 622 to ~ypass the orifice 682 ~en venting the reverse clutch apply ~avity 622 ~ gh the m~nual valve 6~4.

me nanual ~alve 604 also allc ws fluid in the clutch a~ply cavity 624 of ~ t~/f~r ~hift cltltch ass~T~ly 308 tc vent to t}~e vent reser~ir 628, resulting ~n this clutch no~ being en~aged or ~plied.

Fluid in the clut~ ~?ly cavit~ 6113 of the w~erdrive clut~h assen~ly 302 vents t,h~i3h the ~nderdrive clutc~ id-a~ated valve 630.

qhe overdrive clu~ ass~r~ly 304 recei~es ~re ~luid bu~ is ven~ed or not ~plied ~s E~i~usly descr~ed.

Flu~d ~D the rever~e ~:lu~ch apply cavit:y 622 causes the reverse bleeder ball check valve ~46 to close as previ!7usly described.

6~ .

1 320060 ~ luid ~rom the pump assembly 200 flows ~hrough the tw~/four ~hift clutch solen~id-actuated valve 634, which is nct ener~ized or a~ li~d normally, t~ the ~anual valve 604. Fl~id flows through ~he n~nual valve 604 between the third 676c and fourth 676d lands of the ~anual valve 604 to the irst ball ~heck valve 652. Ihis fluid pressure ~cves the first b211 check valve 652 ~o clo~e ~he flow path to the ~olenoid switch valve 610 ~nd cpens the fl~w path to the low/reverse clutch apply cavi~y 626 ~ the fourth hydraulic pis~cn 474 to apply the low/reverse clutch assembly 310. Fluid frQm the ~ump assembly 200 further flcws to one end of the first land 678a of the sole~id switch valve 610 and the W ~witch valve 614 as previously described.

A~ditionall~, fluid flows to both ends of the plug 680 of the pressure regulator 608. S m ce the pressure area of the plug 688 is smkaller than plug 680, the valve 680 is shifted, creating a new fluid lLne pressure.

As illustrated in Figure SD, when the shift lever position 606 is reverse R and the output ~peed ~ is greater than 600 r.p.m., fluld flows from the pu~p ~ss3mbly 200 to the nanual valve 604~ Fluid flcws gh the ~nual valve 604 between the first 676a and ~econd 676b lands and ~r~ugh ~ orifice 682 to the reverse clutch apply cavity 622 between ~he ~eoond hydraulic pistcn 410 and the input clutch retainer hub 312 to æpply the rever~e ~lutch cssembly 306. T~e twv/four ~hift ~lutch ~olenoid-actua W valve 634 is energized by the transmission oontrDller 3010 and ~cves t~ prevent fluid flow t~ the ~nual valve 604, resulting ~n the ~ow/rever&e clu~ch 310 n~t beiny app~ied. This p~lts the traJlglli55iOrl 100 ~ am ~ hifte~d ~nto the ~ E;e ~Dde akove an undesired cutput ~peed No, i.e. 600 r.p.m.

.

1 320060 Fluid in the clutch apply cavities 624, 618 and 620 ~f the two/four shift clutch 3Q8, underdrive clutch 302 and overdrive clutch 304 assemblies, res ~ ively~ are ventEd as pr~eviously described, resulting in these olutches not being engaqed or applied. qhe overdrive clutch assembly 304 receives ~cme fluid but is ven~d or nDt ~pplied as previously described. Otherwise, fluid flow is similar to ~he reverse hydraulic ~c~natic of Figure SC as previously descrlbed.

As illustrated m Figure 5~, ~h~n the ~hi~: lever pDsiticn 606 i9 the dri~e ~ position, w erdrive OD or l~w L, the tran~mission 100 is cperated initially in first gear. As ~ result, the nanual valve 604 is nx~d or shifted. Fluid flows from ~he pump assembly 200 to the nanual valve 604. ~luid flows through the nanual valve 604 between the first 676a and seccnd 676b lands tD the underdrive clutch solenoid-actuated valve 630. The underdrive d utc~ solenoid~actuated valve 630 which is normally applied, allows fluid bo flow thr~ugh it and ~ e flow path to the unde~drive clutch apply cavity 618 ~ :d the ~econd ~ydraulic piston 410 bD apply the underdrive clutch as ~ ly 3~2, ., .

Fluid fram th2 nanual valve 604 ~lso flcw~ tD the ~econd ball valve 654 whlch is pressurized from koth ~ides and ~ecomes re~h~dant. Fluid from the ~nual ~alve 6~4 maves the fifth ball check valve 660 to ~l~se the flcw path tD ~he overdrive ~lutch ~pply cavity 620. Fluld from the ~nual ~valve 604 ~urther fl~ws ~D ~he ove~drive ciutch aDlen~id-ACtDItrd valve 632 whi ~ $s nor~ally vented ~nd is pq~e~lted f~l iE~ th~wgl the flaw path tx3 the clverdrive clut~h y caVi~ 6~0.

~luid ~urther flows to both sides of the third ball check valve 656, m~Xi~g it ~edun~ant. Fluid ~rum the manual ~alve 604 al~o ~lows to 6~ 1 320060 the low/reverse clutch ~olenoid-actuated valve 636. The low/reverse clutch solenoid-actuated valve 636 is eneryized ~y ~he tr~nsmission oontroller 3010 and mcves tv cpçn the fl~w path ~ the ~olenoid switch val~e 610. Fluid flcws thu~ugh the ~ol~noid ~witch valve 613 be~ween the ~eoD~d ~78b and ~hird 678c lænds to the lcw/rEverse olutch apply cavity 626 behind the fourth hydr~ulic pist4n 474 to ~pply ~he l~w/reverse clutch assEmbly 310.

Fluid ~n ~he clutch ~pply cavity 624 of the tw~/four ~hift clutch asssrbly 308, is vented as previcusly described, resulting in this clutch not being engaged or applied. Fluid in the elutch apply cavity 620 of the overdrive clutch assEmbly 304 is vented ~hrough the ovexdrive clutch solenoid-actNated valve 632, ~luid in the clutch apply cavity 622 of the r~verse clutch assembly 306 is vented through the nanual valve 604. Hence, the cverdri~e 304 and reverse 306 clutch ~ssemblies are essentially vented and not applied as pxeviously descrlbed.

Fluid from the pump assembly 200 also flows to one end of the first land 678a of ~he ~Dlen3id ~witch valve 610, the IV switch valve 614, and one end of the pluq 680 of the ~ressure xegulator 608 as previGusly descr ~ . ~luid ~rum the pump asYembly 200 also flows to ~he ~w~/four ~hift clutch ~olen~id-actuated ~alve 634. Hbwever, this valve i8 energ~zed a~d ~cved tD engage it~ ~eat bo ~lock fluid flow as p2eviously desc:ribed.

Re~erring bc Figure SF, ~he operation of the hydraulic ~ystem is ill~trat~d w~en the tr~rsnission 100 i6 ~hifted into ~ecDnd gear. I~ fihould be noted that nDne of the s~len~id-actNated valves 630, 632, 634 .

6~ .~,............................................. .

, . . .

1 320060 and 636 are e~ergized, ~o that they will each assume their normally qpen (applied) or closed ~vented) positions as described earlier.

As illus~rated in Figure 5F, wh~ the ~hift lever position 606 is m ~he overdrive OD, ~rive D or low L position, and th~ ~xansmission 100 is ~D be operated in ~eoond gear, ~he ~anual ~valve 604 remains in the ~ame positicn as first gear. Fluid flows from the p~mp asse~bly 200 to the m~nual valve 604. ~luid flows through the ~anual valve 604 b#tween ~he fir5t 676a and seoond 67~b lands to the underdrive clutch ~olenoid-actuated valve 630 which is ~rmally applied and allews fluid flow ~o the underdrive clutch apply ~avity 618 as previously ~escribed.

Fluid also flows fro~ ~he ~anual ~alve 604 to the overdrive clutch ~olenoid-actuated valve 632 which is normally vented an~ prevents fluid flow to the ov~rdrive clutch apply cavi.ty 620. Fluid from the manual valve 604 also flcws to the secvnd ~nd fi~th ball check valves 654 and 660 as previously described.

Fluid from the p~ assembly 200 also flows to the tw~/four ~hift clutch solenoid-actuated valve 634 which is nor~ally applied and allGw~ f~uid flow t~ the ~anual valve 604. Fluid flows between the thlrd 676c and fourth 676d lands of the manual valve 604 to ~h2 tw~/fo~r ~hift clutch ~pply ca~ity 624 behind the third hydraulic pis~on 448 to apply the two/four shi~t clutch assembly 308. Fluid al60 ~lows be~ween one ~nd o~ ~ifth ~nd 678e of the ~olen~id Lwitch ualve 610 and a plug 684. Be~u6e the preqsure ~ of fi~h lana 67~e ~s lar~er ~han the p~es~ure ~rea of ~;rst ~and 678a, when these lanas 678a and 67Be are ~xp~sed tD the ~*~e pressure, the ~Dlen~id Ewltch valve 61~ is maved to the left as ~hown ~n the figure. ~ence, the solenoid ~witch valve 610 is noved by fluld pressure ac~ing on it tD 2110~ fluid tD flo~ through ~ ~ 6Y , .

1 320060 the solenoid sw~tch valve 610 lbe~æen the f~h 67Bd and fifth 678e laF~s and to one end of a plug 686 t:hereof to pressure balance ~he ~olenoid ~witch ~alve 6100 Fluid ~n the clutch spply cavity 626 of the lc: wtreverse clutch assenibly 308 i5 vented as previously ~scri~d, resulting in this elutch not be~ engaged or a~plied. ~e overdrive 304 ~ erse 306 clutch ass~Lies are al~ ented as previc7u~ly describ~dO Fluid fran ~he p~p assenibly 200 further flc*~s thrwgh the LU swit~h valve 614 to ane end of plug 680 of the pressure regula~or 60B as previously described.

As illustrated in Figure 5G, when the partial lock-up feature is used m seo~nd ge~r, the LU ~witch valve 614 is moved or ~hifted bv fluid pressure, from the l~wJreverse clutch solenoid-actuated valve 636 and the solenoid switch valve S10, to ~lose ~luid flaw from the T/C control valve 612 to the lock-up clutch assembly 186 of the torque ~onverter 110 because it is dead-ended at ~econd land 674b of khe LU switch val~re 614. This results in fluid flow fram the lock-up clu~ch asseTbly lB6 being vente~ at the LU switch valve 614. Fluid flow from ~ e pump ~ssembly 200 to khe torque ~onv~rter 110 causes ~he lock-up pistDn 188 to engage the friction disc 199 0~ the ~orq~e oonverter 110.

L~xlc-up of ~e torq!le aon~ 110 c:~ocurs ~s previously described. me low/reverse clutch ~olenDid ~ctuated ~alve 636 is cycled or nodulated ~MDD) ky command ~ignals ~rom ghe ~ransmi~siDn oontroller 3010 to allcw fluid tD flow b~tween the third 678c ~nd f~urth 678d lands of ~he ~olenoid ~wi~sh valve 610 ~ one end of ~he ~ourth land 674d of ~he L~ ~wi~ch valve 614 tD actuate or ~ycle ~t by fluia pressure, r2sulting in pYrtial locX-up of the t~rque oonverter 110. Fluid also flows to one ~nd of the ~curth l~nd 672d of the TtC cDntrol valve 612~ This is ''A. ~ 1 320060 because 'che fluid to one end of ~he f~r~ land 672d m~ves the T/C cs~ntrol valve 614 to one end of its valve bore and the flu~d flc~ c~nfiguration ~tains the valve's posit:ion during ~e off period of the duty cycle~ ~using quick tcrque hli~ up ~y the loc~c~ clutch 186 and ~ w torque loss rate ~y lock~ clut~ 6 (i.e. goes ~o ~lock ~310I:~ 81~w1y).

As ill~rated in Figure 5H, w~n the ~ ating n~de of the transnission 100 is to be third ge~r, ~e ~nual valve 604 rem~ins i~ tl~e same positi~n as first gear. ~luid flcws frcM the p~rg? assen~ly 200 to the nanual valve 604. Fluid flows through the manual valve 604 between the first 676a and ~ec~d i;76b l~nds to the underdrive clutch solenoid-actuated valve 630 which ~s nornslly a~plied and allows fluid flow to ~he underdrive clutch apply cavity 618 as previ~sly described.

Fluld ~rom the m~nual valve 604 also flows to the overdrive clutch ~olenoid-actuat2d valve 632 which is energized ~y the transmission controller ~010 ard n~res to ~n the f1ow path to the overdrive clutch ~pply cavitv :620 behind the first hydraulic piston 386 to apply the overdrive dutch assembly 304.

Fluid fran "he manual valve 604 further flaws to the thir~ ~ll check valve 656 ~ich is mDved to clo~e the :Elaw path to the lw7/revexse clutcl~ ~ly cavity 626. F}u~d al50 flaws to the lw~/reverse clutch ~ler~oid-actuated valve 636 ~ch iR normally vent~d and is prevented fran fl~wing thrD~h the ~ path to the ~o~er~id Switch valve 610.

Fluid frar, the ~D~ive clut~h solenoid-actu~ted val~e 630 also flc~s to the :ol~id ~;witch valve 610 bet~ ~e faur~ 678d ~nd fifth 678e lands and to both sides o~ plug 686 c>f 1~ oler;oid ~w~tc:h valve 610 as pre~ usly describedO Flu~d fmn the werdrive clut~h ~olenoid .

. r,~ .

1 320060 actuated valve 632 ~lcws between land 670c and plug 688 and ~leeve 690of the pressure re~ulator valve 608, 5inoe fluid pressurized plug 680 has the ~3me contact or pressuxe area as plug and ~leeve 688, 6~0, ~hese plugs are redundhnt. ~bnce, Fressure area of thiræ land 670c is the only ~cti~e area, ~Dving the pressure regulabor 608 ~nd causing a new line pressure.

Fluid in the clutch apply cavities 626 and 624 of the lDw~reverse clutch 310 and ~wD/four ~hift clut~h ~ssemblies 308, respectively, is vented as previously described, resultmg in these clutches not be~ng engaged or applied. Ihe reverse clutch assembly 306 receives some fluid and is essentially ~ented ~ previously described.

Fluid from the ~ assembly 200 also flow~ tD the IU swltch valve 614 as previously described. Fluid from the pump assembly ~Od ~urther flows to the twD/four shift clutch ~olenoid-actuated valve 634. However, this valve is energized by the tr ~ ssion controller 3010 and moves t4 block fluid ~low as previously described.

As illustrated in Figure 5I, ~ the partial lock-up feature is used in third gear, the LU swit~h valve 614 is m~ved by fluid pressure to prevent fluld flow from the TtC oontrol valve 612 from reaching the lock-up clut~h a~sembly lB6 ~s ~ cusly described. ThLs, ~luid flow i8 venW ~rom the loCk-4p ~lutch a~isembly 186 ~f the borq~2 oonverter 110 at the LU ~witch valve 614.

Fluid ~rom ~he pump as~3mbly 200 fLows thr~gh the L~J switch val~e 614 be~ the thlrd 674c ~nd ~ourth 674d lu)ds t~ the torqu~ ~ 110, caus~ t~ lock-up pis~n 188 to engage the Erictioal disc 1~9 xesultin~ in loc3c~p of ~.e to.~ue oonverter 110.

Pur~r, fluid fmm the t~rque o~nverter 110 fl~s thr~gh the T/C oor~trol valve 612 past the o~oler 616 and is used ~or 1 320060 lubrication. The low/reverse clutch sDlenoid-actuated valve 636 is cycled by command si ~ ls from ~he transmission oDntroller 3010 to allcw fluld flow from the na~ual ~alve 604 thrcugh the sDlenvid ~witch valve 610 to one end of fourth land 674d of the ~U ~witch ~lve 614 ~nd fcurth land 672d of ~he T/C oontrol valve 612 tD actuate or cycle the~e valves for ~ ial lock-up of the tDrgue oonverter 110 as prlevicusly described.

As illustrated in ~igure 5J, when the full lock-up feature is ~sed Ln third geax, the lock-up switch valve 614 is ~oved by fluid pressure to prevent fluid ~rom the T/C oDntrol valve S12 from reaching the lock-yp assembly 186 as previously described. m e lcw/reverse clutch solenoid-actuated valve 636 is energized by the transmission oontroller 3010 a~d moves to allow ~ull fluld flow from the manual valve 604 through the solenoid switch valve 610 to one end of fourth land 674d of the IU fiwitch ~alve 614 and fourth land 672d of the T/C control valve 612 as previouslv described. In other words, the low/reverse clutch ~ol ~ id-actuated valve 636 is nGt ~ycledl but energized fully for a predetermdned tlme period, preventing the W switch valve 614 from being ~ycled and resulting in ~ull lock~up ~f the torque c~n~elter llD.

As illustrated in Figure 5K, w~en the operating m~de of ~he transmission 100 is to be ~ourth gear in the overdrive GD position, fluid flows ~ram the pump ~ssembly 200 t~ the nanual valve 604. Fluid flows~hr=ugh the r3nNhl valve 604 between the first 67~a ~nd secGnd :676b lan~s ~D the ~econd ball ~heck valve 654. The ~econd ball check valve 654 ~s ~r~ed ~y fl~ d~pressure tD ~lose one nOw path ~3 the rd~ldrive clutch ~pply cavity 618. Flu~d 1Ow~ frcm ~he man~al ~alve 604 ~o the undbrdrive~ clu~ch ~olen~id-actuated Yalve 630 which is energized by the transn~ssiun oontroller 3010 and:~oves to close the :

'A ~ ~,~.

... . . .

` 1 320060 other flow path to the underdrive clutch Apply cavity 618. Fluid also flows from the ~anual valve 604 to the overdrive clutch solenoid-actuated valve 632 which is energized by ~he transnission oontroller 3010 and ~ves ~o open the flcw path tD 1~he cverdrive clutch apply ~avity 620. ~luid f m m the n~nual valve 604 also flcws ~o the lcw/reverse clutch solenoid actuated valve 636 ~Lich is nor~lly vented, preventing fluld fl~w to the sDlenoid swqtch ~alve 61Q. ~luid fr3m the manual ~alve 604 fur~her ~lows to the ~hird ball ~heck valve 656 which is moved to close the flow path to the low/~everse clutch apply cavity 626. Fluid from the pump Pssembly 200 further flows to ~he twD/four ~hift clutch solenDid-actuated valve 634 which is normally applied and allows fluid flow thrcugh it to the manual valve 604, Fluid flows betweæn the third 676c and fourth 676d lands of the nanual valve 604 to the two/four shift clutch apply cavity 6240 ~ luid in the clutch apply cavities 626 and 618 of the low/reverse clutch 310 and underdrive clutch 302 assemblies, respectively, is vented as previ~usly descrlbed, res~lting in these clutches not being engaged or applied. The reverse clutch assmbly 306 receives some fluid but is essentially vented as previcusly described.

~luid from the pump as~cmbly 200 also fJows ~D ~he lock-up switch valve 614 and to the pressure xegulator 608 s pr2viou~ly descrIbed.

As ~llustrated ~n ~igure S~, when the full lock-up feature is used in ~curth gear~ the W ~itch val~e 614 is noved by fluid pressure b~ prevene fluid ~l~w ~rom the T/C cGnt~ol valve 512 ~rom reaching the lock-up clutch ~sembly 186. Thus, ~luid fl~w i~ ven~ed ~rom the lock-up clut~h assembly 186 of ~he ~orque o~n~erter 110 bo the sump as previ~usly described. m e lowJreverse clutch ~olenoid-actuAted valve 1 320060 648 is energized by the ~ransmission oontroller 3010 for a predetermlned ~ e period and moves to allow ~ull fluid ~lcw from ~he m~nual valve 604 through the solenoid switch valve 610 to one end of the fourth land 674d o~ LU ~witch Yalve 614 and the fcurth land 672d of ~he T/C o~ntrol ocntrol valve 612 ~s previously described, resulting in full lock~up ~f the torque ~onvert~r 110.

L~e ~ n~ Since a li~p-hcme m~de is ~ypically needed ln ~he presenoe of a failure, it must be designed tc, have virtually ~bsolute reliability.

Accordmgly, the transmission oontroller 3010 i~ desi~ned with a master pcwer relay ~ich will only remain energized with ~ull and propex controller operation, thus assuring the ability to achieve a pcwer-Off state. The solenoid state in limp-ho~e is ~'Off" Gr de-energized.

m erefore, the Off or "normal" state of the solenoid-actuated valves 630, 632, 634, 636 provide the needed clutch application. The EDlen~id-actuated valves 630, 632, ~34, 636 are ball-type valves (Figures 8 and 91 whlch function wi ~ t any dirt-s ~ i~ive close clearances and which will be effective even with dirt on the valve seat.

m e nanually actuated valve 604 is the only ccmponent which must ~unction tD achieve ~eoo~d gear in OD, D or L, neutral in N, reverse in R ~ park in P.

Referr~ng t4 ~lgure 5F which ~llustrates the hydraulic schematic ~or ~eccrd gear ~peration, fluid flows thrcugh the m~nNal valve 604 be*ween the fir~t 67~a and ~eoond 676b land3 and through ~he underdrive clutch ~olen~id-~ ~ ted valve 630 whi~h is n~rmally ~pplied, to the un~erdrive ~lu~ch apply cavity 618 as pr~vicusly described. Fluid also 1 320060 flGws from ~he manual valve 604 t~ the ~verdrive clutch solenoidactuated valve 632 which is norm~lly vented and is prevented frcm flow~ng to the overdrive clutch apply cavity 618, E'luld from the nanual valve 604 also flows to the thir~ ~all check valve ~56 which closes the flow path tD the low/reverse clutch apply cavity 626. Ihe ~anual ~alve 604 further allcws fluid in the overdrive clutch 3041, rev~rse clutch 306 and the low/reverse clutch 308 assemblies t~ vent as previGusly described, resulting in these clutches not being engaged or ~pplied.

Fluid frc~ the pump assembly 200 also flows through the tw3/~cur clutch ~olenoid~actuated valve 634 which is normally ~pplied ~o ~he ~anual valve 604. Fluid then flows ketween the third 676c and fourth 676d lands o~ ~he manual valve 604 tD the twD/four shift clutch apply ca~ity 624 as previausly described. ~enc~, second gear is achieved.

It is also i~portant to note that the limp-hcme mode protection feature of the present invention is also designed to allow reverse gear .to be used. The transmission 100 wlll operate in accordan oe with the hydraullc ~chematic of FigurP 5C in order o permit use of the transmlssion's reverse gear. ~bwever, all of ~he &olenoid-actuated valves will be in their ~nDrmal" ~tate.

It is ~urther important ~D note that the ~imç-hcme mode prokection feature of the pxevent invention is A15O designed to allcw palk and neutr~l operating ~Dd85 t~ be used. The tr~nsmission 100 will operate in accordan oe with ~he hydraulic ~ch0L~tic of Figure SA exoept that all of the sDlYnD~d-actua~ed valves will be ~n their "n~rmal" 5tate.

~G 1 3200~0 DIRT~ DDI~G ~L~ES In order ~D keep valves in a hydraulic ~ystem frGm sticking, it is preferable to supply them only with clean or ~ubstantially oontaminant-~ree fluid from ~he pump, taken in thrGugh a filter. Ihe LU ~ tch valve 614 a~d the T/C oontrol ~alve 612, however, are exposed to the relatiYely dirty fluid exiting the bo~que cDnvester 110 ~ere the lock-up friction clutch 186 and the tDrque converter thrust washers cDntribute dirt ~nd other oontaminants. In order t~ mhnimize ~he ~hance of these valves 612, 614 frcm 8ticking due bo ~his dirt, ~here is higher pressure fluid in the ports ~djaoent to a port ~n whi~h dirty flui~ fl~ws. In othe~ w3rdsl fluid flow oonta ~ g ~ubstantially n3 foreign matter or dirt is of a higher pressure ~han the fluid flow containing a relatively substantial am~unt of foreign m~tter or dirt in an adjacent port at a lower pressure. Thus, the pressure differential prevents the dirt from entering the close clearance between ~`.?

Lands of the valves 612, 614 ~nd the valve body 603 (See Figures 5A-L, 6 and llA).

Additionally, in acoordance with ~nother aspec* of the present ~nvention, the major valves 610, 612 and 614 f~r controlling the flcw of hydraulic fluid through the systEm 600 have been udv~ntageousl~ designe~ $o collect and ~ubsequently 6hed or okherwise rem~ve dirt and other ~cntamin2nts from these ~alves.

~ s ~llustrated in Figure lla, the solenoid ~ tch ~alve 610 includes ~t least cne, preferably ~ plucali~y of axially ~paoed circumferential grooves 692 formed ln its lands ~nd plugs. Ihe g~ooves 692 serve ~ a ~eans bD collect dirt an~ ~ther contaminants in the fluid. Similar groDves are 815D formed ~n ~he T/C ~ontrol valve S12 and the LU switch valve 614.

__ 1 320060 In ~exation, wh~ the valve 610 passes a lar~ 694 ~n the valve bt)dy 603, the land 694 will push dirt o~llected on the valve into the groove 692. ~en, whenever ~be qro~ve 692 passes ~ port 696, the fl~ fllLid through the port 696 1ushes the d~ ~an the groove 692, ~here~ keeping dirt ~nd c*her contamir~ts f:ran inhibiting the ~eratic3n of tl~ ~alves 61û, 612 ~d 614.

~ I~DIR me vent reservoir 628 is plac~d ~n the hydraulic system 600 and acts as a means ~o reduce unwanted gasses or air intermittently ~rapped within the hydraulic passageways 602, etc. qhe vent reservoir 628 is disp~sed inside ~he mzni~old assembly 700, and is further illustrated in Figure 8. ffle passageways 602 to the ~olenold-actuated valves 630, 632, 634 and 636 vent ~o a chamber inside the nanifold assembly 700 forming the vent reservoir 62B, The vent reservoir 628 maintalns a fluid level above the vent port 727 of each solenoid-actuated ~alve 630, 632, 634, 636, m e vent reservoir 628 is elevated ~pproximately thlee or four s ~ ve the valve ~oay 603. ~his, of oourse, naintains ~hat ~ame fluid level in each clutch passa~eway 602 ~nd thereby ensures r ~id hydraulic re ~ se of the overall fluid or hydraulic system 600 by elimina~ing aocu~ula~ed air in the ~ydraulic ~ysbem 600 and eliminating the~n~cessity of purging the hy~raulic passages 602 of air as has been done ~n the p~st. Additionally, ~ny trapped air is allowed tQ vent autamati~ally ~ the vent reservcdr 628.

A `` 1 320060 The reciprocal fluid or 6s~1enoid ~w~tch valve 610 is a par~icularly unique and advant~ge~us feature of tl~e pre~nt inventi~n.

It provides l~ydraulic protec~n aga~nst the ~nul tar~s ~ ation of the low/reverse clutch ~;olenoid~actuated valve 636 ar~ either ~che ~/f~ur 634 or overdriv~ 632 clutch ~;olenoid~actuated valves.

The ~olenoid E wi~ alve 610 allaws ~uble use o lcrw/xeverse ~olenoid-actuated valve 636 ts~ c~ntrol fluid f1CJW to ~2e law/reverse clutch as~zmbly ~10 and to ~he lock-up clutch ~sse~bly 186. The hydraulic protection ~eature i5 achieved ~y designing the valve 610 so th~t for a dcwnshift to first gear, a specific logic oontrolled seq~ence of ~olenoid commands fmm the transmission controller 3010 is required to allow l~w/reverse clutch applica~ion after an upshift ~rcm first gear has occurred. Moreaver, the valve 610 has been designed so that a ~ailure caused applicatio~ of either the two/four shift 308 or ~verdrive 304 clutch assemblies, while the low/reverse clutch assembly 310 is applied, will 6imply vent the low/reverse clutch assembly 310 and shift the ~ransmission 100 to second gear or third gear, respectively. Any control failure which nigh~ attempt tD apply ~he low/reverse ~lutch assembly 310 whi~e in ~econd, third ~r fourth gear is prevented from doing ~o ky this valve 610. Apply ~luid pressure ~rom two/fcur 634 or overdrive 632 or underdr~ve 630 ~olen3i~actuated val~es ~an keep the valve 610 in the upshl~ted po5ition (~pool t~ the left ~n Figure SF~ ~hich precludes a~y low/reverse dutch ~ss3mbly 310 application.

The logic sequence u~ed ~Nring ~ ~bw=sbift tD ~ix~t gear is FIRST, wzit briefly until ~he ~wD/~our vr overdrive c~utch press~re falls to less than 60~ of the fluid line pressure (generated by the ~ .

~ ` 1 320060 combination ~f the pressure regulat~r valve 508, pump assembly 200, and cther .system factors~ î SECoND~ turn O~F ~he underdrive clutch solenoidacbuated valve 630 ~- ~his will dbwnshift the valve 610 ~nDve valve 610 to its position m first gear as in Figure SE) wlthout allow m 5 ~lipFage ~n ~he underdrive clutch 302 sLnoe ~he pressure ussd is fr3m the Eolenoid end o~ a oontrol orifice V1 in the under~ri~e clutch passage (fluid from control orifioe Ul to ~he ~ole~oid-actuated valve 630 is vented at ~alve 630 while fluid between ~Dntrol ~r.ifice U1 and clutch apply cavity 618 is essentially naint~ined, resulting m a fluid pressure to keep the urderdrive clutch 302 from slipping); THIRD, wait briefly for valve motion to cease; FC~RI~.', turn CN low/reverse solenoid-actuated valve 636; and FIFTH, loo~ for confirmation fro~ low/reverse pressure switch 650; SIXTH, if confirmation i5 received, turn OFF la~/reverse solen3id-actuated valve 636 briefly to wait for valve actuation pressures ~o stabilize and SEVENTM, return tD normal downshift logic. If low/reverse confirmation is not reoeived, return logic to second gear.

Okher features of the solenoid ~wqtch valve 610 are obtained.

Firstly, by using differential areas cn ~he valve 610 bo mo~e the valve 610 instead of a ~ring, the valve 610 ~ tains the proper valve position wnth variatians in ~luid ox line pressNxe. Seoon~ly, line pressure iB always acting on one end of the valve 610 ~D put it into a positi~n to oontrDl fluid ~low t~ the low/reverse clutch ass~mbly 310 Ihus, on ~tart-up, a high ~orce is ~vailable t~ position the valve 61~ properly. A~ditionally, hlgh l~ pressure in ~he reverse R operating mode acts to dislodge or free the t~alve 610 if stuck ~n a position to allow oontrol of ~e LV ~wi~h valve 614.

':

1 320060 Thirdly, the fluid pressure top of the underdri~e elutch assembly 302 to the solenoid ~witch valve 610 is located on the solenoid ~ide of the oontrol orifice Ul tD Fl~ide for a rapid drop in the "latoh pressure" without causing a ~i ~ ficant lsss of ~l~d pressure to the underdrive clutch assembly 302. qhis proYides a m#ans ~o allcw ~he Yalve 610 to move ~ack ~o the l~w/rever~e oDntrx~l position withcut affecting shift quality.

Fcurthly, it is ~ignlficant that at least one of the three pressures which can keep the valve 610 in its upshifted position (LR v~ented and LV c~ntrolled~ is essentially equal to ~ine pressure ~1rin~ any shift which may occur, i.e. 2-3, 3-2, 3-4, 4-3, 2-4 or 4-2. ~is not only ensures contLnuous protection against failures, but also naintains the a~ailability of control of the lockup clutch 186 duriny shifts. Fluid pressure on underdrive clutch 302 keeps the valve 610 upshifted durLng 2-3 or 3-2; pressure on the overdrive clutch 304 keeps the valve 610 upshifted during the 3-4 or 4-3; pressure on the twc-four ~hift clutch 308 keeps the valve 610 upshifted during the 4-2 or 2-4~ As illustrated in Fi ~ es SF through 5L, the ~ol~n~id swl~ch valve 610 rema ~s in a valve position at one end of its valve ~ore in 6econd, ~hird or fourth ~ s 7 as well ~S during ~hif ts be~ween these actuated valve 636 ~ram the low/re~erse clu~ch apply cavity 626 and connects valve 636 tD ths W ~witch valv~ 614, and vents the low/reverse cl~ch as~embly 310 as previously described.

~he ~olen4id ~witch valv2 610 eliminages ~he need for ~ fifth ~lenoid-actuated valve for the l~ck-up nLde which wDuld add to the o~st~ 1 320060 and oomplexity of the sys~em. This d~uble duty operation is illustrated, for example, in Figures 5E and SJ.

Referr ~ ~o Figure 5E, the solenoid ~witch valve 610 is ~hGwn t~ be in a flrst position to allcw fluid ~low frcm the r~ulual valve 604 t~L~ugh the 1CM/reVerSe clutch solenoid-actuated ~lve 63S ~nd ~etween the ~exx~Nd 678b and third 678c lands of the ~olen~id swltch valve 610 to the lc~/reverse clutch apply cavity 626 as previc~sly ~escribed. ~s illustrated in Figure 5J, the ~olenoid ~witch valve 610 is m~ved to a second position during an upshift ~rom first gear to allow fluid ~lcw from the manual valve 604 through the low/reverse clutch solenoid-actuated valve 636 and between the third S7Bc and fourth 67~d lands of the solenoid switch valve 610 to one end 691 of the LV switch val~e 614 to control engagement of the lock-up clutch assembly 106 a~ previously descriked. Thus, the solenoid switch valve 610 has a first position to control fluid flow to the low/reverse clutch asse~hly 310 and a second posit;on to control fluid flow to the lock-up clutch ~ssembly 186.

~ . .

DI9ECT~CIING; NiN-C;LSE Cl~PrACe ~ dvantageously, the presen~ invention provides direc~-acting, ~on-close clearan oe ~olenDid-acbuat~d valves~ n3mely gale~4id-actuated lves 630, 632, 634 ~nd 636. An exsmple of a cDlen~id operated directional oontrol valve ls disclosed in U.S~ Patent Nb. 4,338 t 966, i~sued July ~3, 1982 tD Smith.

The ~olenQid-actuate~ valves 630, 632, 634 ~nd 636 directly control fluld flow to ~heir respective clutch ass~mblies. Since the &olenoid-actuated valves 630, 632, 634 and 636 have a non-close - 82 ',: '': . '' ',. :

.

1 320060 clearance design ~o be described herein, dirt and o~her contæminants do not inhibit ~he~se solenoid-actuated valves fr3m achieving either ~heir normal or ~olenoid-actua~ed positicn. Additicnallir, as previcusly described, the~e ~olen~id-ac~uated vzlves 630, 632, 634, 636 are designed to pr~vide a li~p-home mode of ~peration.

~ eferr ~ tD Figure 7, a n~nifoJd ~ssembly 700 i~ ~h~wn. The nznifold assembly 700 houses or conta~ns the eolPnoid-ac*Nated valves 630, 632, 634 and 636, A cover ~ 702 is ~ecured b~r 6uitable fas~e m ng ~eans 704, ~uch as a ~crew and washer as~embly, to a nx~ifold housing 701. A circuit and switch assembly 752 along w.ith two perimeter sRals 705 are sal~h~iched ~etween the cover ~ember 702 ana n~n:ifold hcus m g 701.

Referring to Figure 8, the overdrive clutch solenoid-actuated ~alve 632, which is normally vented, is shown and is identical to the lcw/reve.rse clutch ~lenoid-actuated valve 636. The solenoid which actuates valve 632 includes a stationary oore ~ 706 having an cuter cyl ~ ical shape. A threaded por~ion 707 extends from one ~nd of the oore nenker 706 and is ~hreadably engageable with the n~nifold hcus m g 701. ~n electrical o~ ssembly 710 is disposéd ooaxially around the oore ~ember 706, A ~cNable ~Ember or armabure 712 is spaced axially ~rom the core wember 706 tD form a ~rkin~ air gap 714 therebetween. An L,shbped ~agnetic ~hunt ~ember 715 is ~cured between the oore member 706 and the n~nifold housing 701. Obe edge 716 of the shunt ~Ember 715 oo~tacts or ~buts the ~rmature 712 ~D allo~ the armature 712 tD piv~t or hinge about th~ALine while efficiently tr~nsnuAtting ~he n~gnetio ~lux thraugh the armature 71Z and ~hunt ~ember 71~, A plulalitv of blades 717 are oonnected one end of the electrical ooil assembly 710 ~nd extend ~/ ~3 1 320060 autwardly therefr~T. IS~e blades 717 are ren~ly disposed in correspanding biased slc~ts 718 in the ~rcuit an~ ~w~t~h assembly 752.

A bowed or wave spr~ng 719 is disposed be~ the ~hunt ~P:r 715 and the ooil ass0ibly 710 to bi2~s or c:ause the blades 717 of ~ electrical coil ~sse~ly 710 to fully engage the slots 718 in ~e C~C~Jit and ~;w~tch ~s~ly 752 . ~Ihis ~revents the electrical contact 6~ f aces betwef~n the blades 717 and ~l~ts 718 : ~ n m~ving c~r vibrating ~hich may cause excessive wear of these oDntact ~urfaces. A~itionally, in 03njunction with a cylindrical offset portion 712a of the ~xmature 7121 this coil pvsition causes the working air gap 714 to be offset toward the center inside of the ooil ass~mbly 710, resulting in a more efficient n~gnetic flow. Also, resistors 713 are connected to the c;rcuit and switch assembly 752 and will be described subsequently.

A non~magnetic spacer 719a is disp~sed between the shunt nEmker 715 and core m~mber 706. The outside diameter of the spacer 719a is larger ~ the diameter of the oore nember 706 to avoid magnetic bridging due to ine magnetic debris in the sys~n. me spacer center i~ configured to reta~ c~ a oorres~ding urdercut of the core ~nber 706 and o~ a projection 70B ~ected to threaded portion 707 to enhance handling and to pr~vent the proje~ ion 708 fr~n contacting radially ~he dn~t ~ 715 thr~gh the ~rresp~ding hs)le $n the ~unt m~.r 715.

q~ ~ther en~ of the armature 712 llas an adjus~nent 6crew 720 1~re~dably engaged and, in bD~n, ~pable o~ cont~cting the spherical end 722 o~ a valve plunger 724, a~ that ~e valve plunger 7~4 will recipxocate in respc~se to ~pp~priate magnetlcally ~uc~ ~ctuatio~s of t~he arn~a~e 712.

, 1 320060 The adjustment screw 720 i6 w~lded to armature 712 after factory ~etting is established t~ prevent ~urt~er thread movement. The adjusbment of the screw 720 establishes the wcrking air gap 714 ~typically 0.05 to 0.20mm) with all parts in ~he u~ted or en~rgized position ~uch that: full ~orce is available at the valve 0eat; ~here is allGwanoe for valve wear; n~ise of armature 712 ~triking oore m~mber 706 is avoided; ~mall debris Ln the workin4 air gap 714 dkes not cause m~lfunctit~n; and ocnsistent pull-m ~nd dIop-cut characteristics ~re main~ned .

The valve plunger 724 is for~ed with a ~onical portion 725 w~ich, when the ~olenoid is energized, is shcwn to be m ~ealmg engagement wnth a valve insert 726, thereby closing a vent port 727 leading to the vent resexvoir 628. The valve insert 726 is dispose~ in a passagewa~ 728 w~ich oommunicates between an inlet or supply port 730 and a clutch or element port 732 leading to a clutch apply cavity.

~ilters o,r screens 731 and 733 are disp~sed m the supply port 730 and clutch port 732, respectively, tD filter s:r trap large debris (such as machin~ng chips) and prevent its distrih~tion t}~ugh the hydraulic ~;ystem 600 where it could cause malfunction. A ~vable ball 734 is disposed bet~æen a localized, non--fiealin~ tra~el st~ 736 ~n the passageway 728 and a ~at 738 sn the valve insert 726. me val~e plunger 724 ~s ~ally disposed within ~ ral passage 740 ~o~d in the Ya~ t 726 which c ~ n~ tes wlth the passayeway 7~8, vent : port 727 ~nd the clutch port 732.

As ~hown m Figure 8, the valve plunger 724 has ~ fluted oentral port~ 724a ~c~ E;~orts valve plunger 724 ocnoen~rically iD the oentral:passage 740, yet permits fluid :

8'~ , ' `-, 1 320060 to flow readily thr~gh the oentral passage 740 around the valve plunger 724 .

Conventicnally, the tran~nissicn ~hift oc~ntrol valve m~r~er is typically a 6pool t~pe valve h2lv~sg ~nds and ~ei~ recipr~cal ~etween ~s of a Ix~us~ng. me dian~trical clearanoe betweerl the lan~ls of the conventialal valve ~ mber u ~ hc~usir~ ran~ froT .0002 to ol)01 inches, resulting in potential ~tickl~g or j~mming by ~mall debris.

The present invention utilizes a ball 734 in ~n ~versized passageway 728 to allow an cpen flcw path around the ball 734 during actuation or operation.

~bnce, close clearances are not ~ ed between the ball 734 and passageway 728.

In fact, ncmentarily during the valve ball %ovement from one ~eat to the other, ~he present invention allows a b~st of fluid f1GW from supply port 730 to vent port 727 which flushes the passages, A~ditionally, the circu~t ana switch asse r~ly 752 incluaes an ~sulati~e circuit h~using 753 disposed be~ ~che cover n~r~er 702 anà t~e snanifold housing 701 (See Pigures 7 and 8). A male plu~ m~er 754 is oo~nected to the circuit l~using 753 for ~tta~nent to an external scurce of electri~al ~ 6uc~ as the tr~nsn~ssion controller 3010.

9 In operation, the overdrive clutch ~;olen~id-ac~ated valve 632 mally vented whe~ t energize~ ~i.e. ~ alrr~t flows thr~ugh the ~In~s of ~ oil ac~bly 710), As a sesult, fl~id enters the ~nlet ~ 730 :and flows th~h the passageway 72B, ~ausis~g the ball 734 ~ move and ~gage the seat 738 of the val~ ~sert 726.

The ball 734 on its ~eat 738 bloc~ luid fïo~ nle'c port 730, prev~ting fluid :Er~n entering clutch port 73~.

Ihe di~plac~T~nt of the ball 734 moves the valve plunger 724, ca~Lsing the co~ical portion 725 to be disengaged , 1 320060 vr ~vved off the valve insert 726. As a result~ ~luid from the clutch port 732 fl~ws thr~ugh ~he oentral passage 740 alang the plunger flutes 724a and between the oonical p~rtion 725 and valve insert ~26, vent mg t~rcugh vent port 727 to t~e vent reservoir 628. ~ence, ~he overdrive clutch sol~noid-actuated ~alve 632 and its rela~d clu~ch assembly 304 are normally ven~ed.

Khen the cverdrive clutch ~olen~id-ac~uated valve 632 is actuated, as shown in Figure 8, current flows thxough t~e oDil assemhly 710 and creates a ~agnetic flux loop ~hrough the armature memker 712, oore member 706 and shunt nember 715. lhis ~agnetic flux causes a magnetic attraction between the armature 712, ~hunt n~nkex 715 and t~ core member 706. This causes the armature 712 o m~ve toward and contact the edge 71fi of the shunt member 715 to reduce the working air gap 714, but not oQntact the c~re member 706. qhe ~LmatUre 712 pivots about the edge 716 of ~he shunt member 715 and displaces the val~e plunyer 724, and Ln turn, displaces the ball 734 off the ~eat 738 to allow fluid to flow from the inlet port 730 past the ball 734 by way of sage 740 through the valve inser~ 726 bo the clutch port 732.

Simultaneously, ~luid also nLm~ntarily flows out vent port 727, producing a cleansing flush of conical portion 725. The n~tion of armature 712 ccntinues tD drive ~alve plunger 724 until conical portion 725 engages the surfaoe ~f valve insert 726, thcreby closing vent port 727 and preventing oDntinued fluad flow from clutch pDrt 732 int~ vent reservDir 628 and thereky ~ausing clu~ch pre~sure bo increase toward the level of inlet pressure. Ey ~pprcpriabe time-cycling of the cNrrent m coil 710, the~e valve ports ~ill recipr wate rapidly and provide effective c~ntrol of the pressure in clutch port 732 at any desired : . , .

1 320060 level between th2t of vent reser-~o~r 628 and fluid fla~7 frcsn inlet port 730.

A5 partially illustrated in Fi~ure 9, the ~ande~ri~e clutch 630 ar~d ~/~our ~;hift clutch 634 ~olenoid-ac~uated v~ es are ~rmally ap~?l;ed wh~ nct energized or nD curr~t flaws thral2gh the windi~s of the coil asse~ly 710.

Prime n~erals are used for parts 5i~ ar 1~ he averdri~ clutch ~olenoid-actua~d valve 632 of Figure 8.

As a result, iEluid en~ers the inlet or ~upply p~r~ 730' and fla~; ~n ~e passageway 728', causing the ball 734' bo move and engage i~s seat 738' of the tw~ piece valve Lnsert 726'. When the ball 734' is cn or engaging the ~eat 738', a ~ 1 gap 739 exists between the ball 734' and another ball seat 737. As a result, fluid flows Ln the gap 739 past the ball 734' and to the clutch port 73~'. By engag~lg ~eat 738', the ball 734' prevents fluid flow from exiting clutch port 732' via passage 740' and into the vent reservoir 628. Hence~ ~he sol~noid-actuated valves 630 and 634 and their related transmission clutch assemblies 30? and 308 are n~rmally applied. :

~ en the underdrive clutch Eolenoid-actuated valve 630 is actuated, ~he anmature 712 pivots and displaces the valve plunger 724', in turn, displaces the ball 734' tD engage seat 737. As a result, ~luid flow fr~n the Eupply port 730' is blocked by the ball 734' and is prevented from flcwing to the clutch port 732'. Fluid flow from the ~lutch port 732' is allowed tD ~lcw ~twee~ the ball 734' ~n~ geat 73B' nd ~hrcugh ~entr~ pas&a~e 74~', venting through ven~ port 727' ~ the vent reservcdr 628. As wl~h the normally vented ~alves, ~lutch pressure may be re~ulated ~y time-cycling the val~e.

.

,~.., , , 1 320060 As illustra~ in Figure ~, ~e present invention provides a ~ans for reducing noise resulting i~m ~len~id va~ve a~tion. A spool 742 having a generally ~ylim3rical ~hape is dispose~ he passageway 728.

Ihe ~ol 742 can slide in th~ passage~ay 728. ~ epool 742 has ~ axially projectir~ portian 744 GC~i~ ~nto the oentral pass~ge 740 s:f ~e val~ ~eat 726. lhe prc~jecting pcrtion 744 ~xJntacts the l:)all 734. ffle E~pool 742 includes a ch~T~ 745 and an ~per~re 746 ea~ding aacially through the projecting portiorl 744, }~:h of ~ic~ allaw fluid ~low thr~ugh the ~pool 742. P" spr~ng 747 is disposed withi~ the c~r~ 7~5 and biases or lightly loads the ~pool 742 ~d t}~ }~all 734.

In other words, t~e epr~ 747 biases the ~xrojecting portion 744 into oontact w~th the ball 734 so that the ball 734 contacts its seat 738.

One end of the aperture 746 is closed by the ball 734 during pull in or energizing of the coil assembly 710. During de ~ gization of the coil asse~bly 710 (i.e. during drcp-3ut), the ball 734 will return freely, opening the aperture 746 and allcwl~g the chamb~r 745 tD refill rapidly ~o that the next pull-in can be cushioned.

qhe 6po~1 742 als~ includes a first or supply end land 748 at one end which i5 ~lightly smaller in diameter than the passageway 728.

~ 748 allcws only gradual flow of fluid out of a trapped cav ty b~ 3en land 748 an~ the ~ ifold houslng 701 in pas ~ eway 728, ~hereby . ~ pull- m veloci~y and redu~iny ~mpaC~ n~ise. Th~ spoDl 742 furth~r includes a ~eoond or element end land 749 at the othe~ end ~hich is fluted for free ~lo~ of fIuid.

In operat~Qn, during pull-in, the kall 734 ~Lv~S axially, resulting ~n axial ~o~ement of the spool 742. Land 748 allow~ only gradual flcw of fluid pa~t ~t cut of the trapped cavity ~etween land 748 .~ ~ 1 320060 arx~ the ~f~ld l~s~ng 701 in the passageway 728. I~is gradual flaw slaws the pull-in velt~city of the ball 734 ~nd relat~l ~ralve plunger 724 (See Figures 8 ~XI 9), xeducing impact r~ise wi~h the valve ~eat 726.

Dur~ dro~out, the ball 734 re~rns ~ly all~ the chan~r 745 ts~ refill rapidly so ~hat the next pull-in can lx a~shione~l.

Also, ~pring 747 will return the ~pool 742 ~ t the projecting portion 744 ~noe again contacts ball 734 t~ rest t~le ball 734 on its eeat 738. Ihe ~pool 742 may be used with both n~rmally applied and normally ~ented solenoid-actuated valves.

Referring to Figure 10, a pressure sensDr or ~wltch asse~bly 650 is ~hcwn and is similar t~ ~ressure ~witches 646 and 648 of Figures 5A-SL. Ihe pressure swltch assembly 750 ~ncludes a circuit oontact or ~ad 755 ~ cates through a bore 756 formed in the circ~it hcusing 753. A retainer 758 ~ecures a flexible rubber diaphragm 760 between the manifold h~using 701 and the cylindrical wall of the CirCNlt h~using 753 ~orming the ~Dre 756~ A oDntact cup 762 is disposed in the bore 756 be ~ ~he diaphragm 760 an~ oover menber 702. A ~pring 764 is disposed between the contact ~up 762 and oover nember 702.

m e di~p~ragm 760 ~s oompressed between the circuit housing 753 and the retainer 758 to prevent exces5iv~ ~luld pressure leak2ge while compensating ~or differences in d~mensicnal Etask-up. qhis oompression, in turn, loads the faoe of the retainer 758 ~gainst the manifold hcusing 701 6uch tha~ an as~ured, highly restrictive leak path is intentionally eskahlished to vent air frcm the hydraulic circuit bo ~3sure f~st ~witch respGnse ~undamped) to 801en2id action while allowiny min~m~l fluid flow.

, .

... ..

1 320060 Additionally, the eontaet cup 762 has a relatively laxge diametrical clearance inside of the bore 756 and a large contact gap (long stroke) oonsistent with ~ int2i~L~ng a syste~ which is highly tolerant ef dirt and debris. The oontact side of th~ contact cup 762 is cxxJn~n with the vent reserv3ir 628 to a~oid hydraulic dbm~ping (all ~ ast response~, yet prc~cts the ci ~ t c~ntacts 755 fro~ oorrDsion or electrical erosion (i.e~ contacts ~ oovsred by f.luid).

In cperation, fluid enters thruugh ~pertures (nct ~hown) in the re~ainer 758 from the ~ fold housing 701 and displa oes or deflects the diaphragm 760, The diaphragm 760, in turn, di~places the contact cup 762, causing ~he oontact ~up 762 ~o oontact the circuit contact 755 oompleting a circuit through the cup 762, ~pring 764 and cover ne~ber 702 w~ich grounds circuit oontact 755 ~o indicate the presence of pressure t3 the tran~mission o~n~roller 3Q10. ~hen the fluid pressure is remDved, the ~pring 764 returns the oontact cup 762 out of oDntact with ~he circuit oontact 755, opening the circuit and indicating an absence of yressure tD the transmission oon~roller 3Q10.

~e~ !

Current state of ghe art ~utomotive ~ransmissions vent all ~riction elements in the neutral position N of the ~hift lever. This ~eans tha~ all elemen~ needed tD pravide m~tion mLst be filled when ~elec*ing forward or rever~e gears.

The pEesent ~nvention ~eps ~he law/rever&e clubch apply ~avity 626 filled under mD5t ~tions in neutral, thNs only one ~lutch ~pply ~avity ne~ds ~D be filled to provide either first gaar or reverse gear.

qhis prvvides for faster ~hi ~ under "xockingn conditians. For the 1 320060 E;hift :Ercm neutral to first gear, ~e lmderdrive clutch 302 is applied;

for the shift ~n neutral to reYerse gear, the reverse clutch 306 is a~plie~.

In order ~ tain a couple un~que advantages, ~er, the ~;hif~ f~n n~utral to reYers~ gear is ~t pe~ y s~ply a~ly~ng the reverse c~lutch 306.

Ihe "fully-a~plied~in~Ne~:tral" lc~/Reverse clutch 310 is vented while the ~ply c~vity 622 of the reverse clutch 306 is fill ~ (~he hydraulic circuit and aontro~ling logi5 are designed so that the low/reveræ clutch torque i essentially zero before the re~erse clutch 306 can apply). The application of ~he reverse clutch 306, then, ~imply engages or couples the gear assembly 500 to the input fihaft 176, but no reaction element is ~pplied bo provide reverse drive.

me rever~e clutch applicatio~, therefore, dbes not need to be m~de in a controlled manner since it does not affect the shift qu21ity (i.e. no significant change in transmission output tDrque occurs dNring its applica~ion). Since this is the only ~hift ~ ch uses the xeverse clutch 306, this mE~ns ~hat the rever8e c~utch 306 can 8imply be applied by ~he manual val~e 604, thereb~ saving the c06t and oomplexity of an additicnal ~olenoid-actuated valve. Moreover, ~he reverse clutch plicatiGn dkes n~t inv~lve ~igniflcant energy since it o~ly ~¢oelerates gearset ihertia; it, ~ fore, does nok require a large number of clutch di5cs for energy di~s ~ tion. ffl ese advantages justify ic ~omplexity ~nv~lved in tha low/reYer~e ~du~p and reapplyn ~equen oe.

: Pc~x~lLhx31y, ~e present ~ ~n~ention p~ovldes a ~ethod for applyin3 ths rev~rs~ clutch 306. In order b~ achieve good shift : quality,~the ocntrDl m~thcdDlogy must ven~ tha low/reverse clutch apply :~ :

; :

, ,~, %~.

' 1 320060 ca~ty 626 d~1n to a ~ill level ~efore the Ixverse clutch 306 applies.

In other words, t~. ra~id dmT~ and reapply feature is u~;ed to get the low/reverse ~lut~h 310 off rapid Ly ~fo~e the rever5e clutch 306 car a~ply.

Ihis prevents excessive wear of the re~ e clu~ch 306.

As illus~ated ~n ~igure 5A, the l~w/reverse clut~ 3pply cav~ty 626 if filled, resulting in ~she lcw/rever~e clut~ as~ly 310 be~ng a~lied. qhe f~rst ball c~he~c valve 652 has its bal'L ~ated an c~e side to prevent flLuid ~ran the lcx~/reverse clutch a~ly cavity 626 ven'cing into the reverse c~t.

~ en the malwal valve 604 is shift~d to reverse R, the ~essure of the fluid ~n the low/reverse clutch ~pply cavity 626 does r~t initially allaw the ball e~f the first baLL ~hedc valve 652 to ~ve, there~y ~ta~ its seated position. lS~is aLlows direct ar~ r~pid venting of the fluid in the low/reverse clutch a~ply cavity 626 past ~che third ~all check valve fi56 and through the nanual valve 604 to the sump.

Simultaneously, the low/reverse solenoid-actuated valve 636 i5 turned off t~ prevent fluid flow to the low/rev~rse clutch apply cavity 626.

S m ce the ~anual valve 604 is shifted tD reverse R, the ~everse clutch apply caYity 622 i~ filling rapidly ~nd applying quickly bec~use there is no ac~unulator or oontrol logic fc)r the rever~e clutch 306, Dur~ this t~me ~iod, t:he t~/fa~r olut~ ~ole~id~ ated v2~ve 634 is ~i3ed to prevent fluid presE~ure hlild up 'chra~h 'che ~ever~e c~rcuit. A~ter a prede~nined tine perio~ ~n ~ b~ginning of the 6hift ~ vers~, ~he trar~ri~sian o~trollOE 3010 loc~ks for a E;ign~l fran the low/r~verse E~ressure ~wit~ 650, ir:dicating that the flllid pressure in ti~e low/reve~se ~lut~ apply cavi~ 626 has dr~ed to a ~airly sa~e levelO As ~o~ as the si~al fran the low/xeverse ~3 1 320060 pressure sw~tch 650 is detected, an ~t~onal predetermined time period of 0.19 seco~ds is a~lded to vent the law/reverse clutch ~pply cavity 626. me ~/f~r clutch solerDid-actuated valve 634 is then turned off ~i.e. de energi~ed) ~der duty cycle cx)ntrol tc: allow fluid flaw in the reveræ circuit. miS fluid flaw r~seats the ball of first ball check valve 6S2 an its ~ r seat, limitir~g ~he ~ ama~t of ~enting, ~nd fills the low/reverse clutch apply savity 6:26 bD reapply the low/reverse clutch 310. This ~ethodology is repre~Entad ~y cN¢ves or traces on a shift tape graph or recording for a shi.~t from ~eutral to reverse gear as illustrated m Figure 24L.

T~ RL~E Referring to Figure SA, the T/C oontrol ~a.lve 612 is used to regulate torque ccnverter pressure (i.e. provide various pressures) and improve lo~k-up oDntrol. Generally, normal line pressure f~om the pressure regulator 608 is used tG feed the torque oonverter 110., resulting ln only one pressure level.

Aæ illustra~ed in Figures 5E ~ SF, in first and ~eoond gear, respectively, the T/C oontrol valve 612 r~gulates inlet fluid pressure t4 the torque oonve$ter llO as de~ermined by the area between lana5 672c ~nd 672d and ~pring 664. At this valve position, the torque oonverter DutJet flow tD ~he ~oDler 616 i~ urrestric*ed.

Ref~rring to Figure 5C, ln r~wcrse gear, a passageway 602d t~ the,T/C ccntr~1 ~alve 612 is n~t presÆized. ~he T/C control ~alve 6i2 regulat:~s the inlet fluid p~essure ~o the borque cc nverter in a 8~1llilar ma~er to first or ~d gear exc~pt tha~ its range of aut}~rity is increased (i.e. usefill ~ange of ~olen~id ~utv cycle of 1 320060 about 40~ to 95~ as opposed to 60% to 90~) ~y virtue ~f passageway 602d b~ng ~ented.

Referr~ng to Figures 5H and SK, in third and f~urth ge~r, th~ line pressure to the TtC o~ntrol valve 612 is low ~a}gh ~or the spring ~64 ~ m~ve the T/C c~ntrol valve 612 to allow full urlres'cricted 1~ to the torq~e coq~erter 110. me p~essure of 'che fluid t~ the torque carlverter 110 is eQs~n'ci~lly the ~ as the line pressure ~us ~pieal pipe losses, etc.

Ref~rring to Figure 5I, ~n partial lock-up, the low/rever~e ~ole~oid-actuated valve 636 i~ cycled by ~he tran~S~Qion oontroller 3010. m is pressurizes the end of fcurth land 672d of the T/C oDntrol valve 612 enough to keep it effectively ln the position ~hown. In this position, both the torque oonverter inlet and outlet flaw are restricted, which reduces the lock-up clutch rate of torque reduction during the ~olenoid-actua~ed ~alve 636 off period as previously describedO This extends the lock-up clut d control range (i.e. uLQeful xange of olenoid duty cycle) dcwn to lower duty cycles of solen~id-3ctuated valve 636.

The ~ ~ent invention provides a ca~ oontrolled nanual valve 604. Referring to Figure llB, a pin or 6haft re=ber 770 is oonnected by suitable neans b~ one ~nd of ~he manual ~alve 604~ ffle ~haft rember 770 ~s disp~sed in a 610t or oam groove 772 of the ~anual lever 578 which is co~nccted t~ the ~nual ~haft S91 t as illus~rated in Figure 4g. m e shaft nenber 770 follows the Lrregalar path of the cam gTocve 772 to 1 320060 mcve or reciprocate the loanual valve 604 ~ally ~ its bore of the ~alve body 603.

In operation, the operat:or or driver m~ves the manu~l shaft 591 to the des~red gear or ~perating Ir~de position, i.e~ P~L.

Ihis causes the nanual lever 578 to rotateO As thie n~al lever 578 is rotated~ t:}x engag~t of th~ ~m groave 772 an~ shaft ~r~er 770 a~ts as a cam means, c~using the n ~ al ~alve 604 to be displao~d or shifted in its bore of the val~e ~ 603 t~ oannect ~he prcper ports between the lands thereof to allow fluid flaw to the proper clutch apply cavities to move the cDrresponding ~luid actuating device or clutch apply piston.

~ ordingly, the present in~ention allows additional P~NCDDL positions wi~hcut chanying either ~he m~nual valve 604 or ~alve b~dy 603. Ihis is acoomplished by the i ~ ar path of the cam groove 772.

T~e ~am groove 772 defines a park position at one end for a park operating m~de of the transmission 100 an~ an installation position at t~e other ~nd for installing the park locki~ m~chanism 560. me ~am gr~ove 772 furt~er defines a rev2rse, neutral, ~verdrive, drive and low Fosition for their oorresponding operating ~ode, ~espec*ively. Also, the presEn~c invention reduoes the travel and length of the mhnual valve S04. ffle pre~nt imr~tiol~ f~r p~ts ~olenc id ~:witc~hing ~d~es~ribed bel~) ~ile mainta~iog a ~ r~d valve, i.e. no sine load.5 irn t:he fluid flaw.

___ ~ _ A~ illustrated m Figure llB, the ~nual valve 604 is shawn.

~he manual val~e 604 has lands 676a, 676b, 676c, 676d locabed such that 1 320060 it is able to ~tch the flu~d flow betw~ the ~/faur ~hift clutch ~lenoid-a~uated valve 634 and the low/reverse clutch 601er~id-actuated valve 636.

Referrir~ to Figure 5C, an reverse gear, fluid iElows thr~gh ~sageway 602a to the n~anual valve 604. q~e mar~l v~l~ve 604 all~5 fluid to fla~ bet~ ~r~ds 676a and 676b ~ 1:hrough p~s~ay 60Zb to the reverse clutch apply CaYity 622. Fluid also ~lows fran the p~rç ~sserbly 200 th~xY~gh thQ two/four ~hift clutch ~ole~id-actua~ed valve 634 tD the l~w/rE~n~ree ~lutch apply cavity 626.

ReferrLng to Figure 5E, in low gear, i.e. first gear, fluid flows through passage~ay 602a to the nE~mal valve 604. ThR nEulual valve 6~4 is shiftbd ~r ~aved to allow fluid tD flow thl~Y~gh the ~E~nual valve 604 betwe~n ~ s 676a and 676b and t~ ugh ~ ssageway 602c and t~unough the lcw/reverse clutch solen~id-actuated valve 636 to the lowlrevexse clutch apply cavity 626. ~ s, the position o~ the ~umal valve 604 is ~uch t~ switch fluid flow bet~#en solenoid-aotuated valves 634 and 636 to allow fluid flow to the low/reverse clutch apply cavity 626 in first and severse gears.

Referring t~ Figure 12, ~he logic or nE~xxlology of thet~wsmissian o~ntroller 3010 is Ehih~n at 800~ n the kæy of the ~hicle is tlLn~3d ~n, pcL~rr~u? of the trans~ission oontxDller 3010 cxx~Irs ~ h ~ble 802. M~ctr the tran~misslon oontroller 3010 performs o~ enters a ~even mi~ 7 ms.) ~n pxogr8n or co~ t ~ock 804 called ~hift select to "~rchestrate" vl~ricus ~hods used t~ det~mine the cperating n~x3e or gear, ~.e~ first g~ar, the transmission A 1 320060 100 is presently ~ and wlli~h gear ~he transmission 100 shauld be ~rJ next, and c~ar~ t}be ts~ to each ~er ~ determi~ lf a sh:ift is rec~uired. me meth~dology advances ~o h~le 806 to calculate the speed and acceleratioql of the hlrb~ne 128, ou~ut gear 534 and eng~ne crankshaft 114 . q~e tr~ssion control 1 er 3010 n~oe;ves ir~put data fram the ~ine ~;peed sensor 320 (~ne ~peed Nt ), au~t sensor 546 (~utpu} speed No) and eng~ ~peed ~ensor (not s~n~ ~ne ~;peed Ne) in circle 808 .

In ~le 806, ff-e ~ngine sp~d Ne . ~rbine ~;peed Nt and altput ~peed No are calculated frcm the ~t data. T~e nethodology advanoes to b~ible 810 ~alled the shift ~chedule to be descri~ed under section heading "SHIFT SCEE W LE MEIHOD". me ~hift ~chedule bubble 810 reads or determhnes t~e ~hift le~er position 606, PRNODDL, of the manual lever 578 by oontact switch ~ensors (NSl, NS ~See Figure 4B) in circle 812. The shift schedule bubble 810 als~ determ mes the thrDttle angle lHRr AN~ E of the eng me, to be described under section heading ~ ~ ~NGLE CCMPUTATICN AND FAILURE DETECTICN", by an input of a po~entiome~er gnnt ~own) connected to the throttle (not ahown) in circle 814. The ~ ft ~ le bukble 010 further determines the engine temperature, tv be described under ~ecti~n heading "P~ESSURE SWITCH TEST AND TRAN5MISSIoN IEPPERAi~RE DEI}RMI~P~ION MET~0D" in circle 816. The dhifb &chedule bubble 810 uses ~he data ibems ~u~h as output 6peed No in c~rcle 815 (genera~ed ~y bubble 806), PRNoDDL (generated by cixcle 81~) 3n~ thrDttle ~ngle (genera~ed by circle 814) t4 determine ~he appropriate gear the transnission 100 ~hould be plaoed.

The nethDdDlogy ahvanoes ~ bubble 818 whlch cutputs ~he appropriate ~cmmand 6igna1s to the ~olenoid-actuated valves 630, 632, 1 320060 634 and 636 ar~d pr~perly energizes or de~nergizes th~3n based on which gear the tran~n~ssion 100 is in, as de~mi~ l:~y circle 812. ~e methodology advances to ~ble B20 to ex~cute diagr~ostic or sr~n~tor~ng r~tines.

In dia~nostic buhble 820, t} e tran~nis~si~ ~ntEoller 3010 determi~9 if ~ prop~ pressure 8witches 646, ~48 ~d 6~û, previausly described, Are pressurized ~y either loo~sing for 6i~nals ~n a specific E~ressure ~witch ~bb~tion for 'cl~ p~esent ~-gear oc~ndition of the tran~ission 100 or ~ a ~ific EJress~ h to a ~ncc~lling clutch during a pressu~e ~witch test ~o be descri~d. me trar~nission controller 3010 also de~es if the w~es in the control sy5t~1 are not shorted or o~en ~y lookin~ ~or a fly~>ack voltage or E~IF spilce during a ~olenoid oontinuity test ~o ~e described under section "SO$ ~ OID CO~TINUITY TEST METHOD". ffl e nethodology then advances t~ diamoncl 822 and determines whether a failure has occurred. If a failure has occurred, the nethodology ac~vanc~s ~o block 824 in which the transmission oontroller 3010 de-energizes the solenoid-actuated ValVe5 630, 632, 634 and 636 whic~ assume their n~rmal positions to allcw the tlans=ission 100 to operate in seoond gear in the drive node, i.e.

}imp-hQme mLde previGusly ~ scribed. If a failure has not ~ ed, the ~*thcdology a~vances tD the shi~t 6elect block 804. Based on the ~alculated ~peeds and ~ ft ~ e output (SSCoTP), the metho~ology determines if ~ ~hift is required. This process is dbne every 7 ms.

Sinoe th~ ~hift ~elect block 804 campares th~ gea~ the trz=~mi~ion 100 is presently in, tD the SSCUTP, the m~thodology aaYan oe s tD diamcnd B~ ~nd deter=dnes if ~ shift or ~ar change ~s requ1red. If a ~hift is required/ the methGdoIogy advanoes ~ block 828 ~alled the shift logic to be described ~erein. Oth~rwise, if a shift is ~?

'.

1 32~0S0 .

n~t ~red, the methodology advances tc dia~r~nd 830 and looks at the lodt-up ~chedules, i.e. a plot of 1~ AN~ E verses Nt, etc" to deterrnine if lock-up of the torque con~rerter 110 ~s r~q~red.

If s~ift ~elect block 804 again for an~er 7 ms. lo~p.

Otherwise, if loc:lc-up i5 requlred, the rre ~ dology advanoe s tc~ dia~n~l 832 an~3 ~etermines if the torque oonverter 110 is presently J3cked~up by looking for a flag ~hat has previously been ~et during full 13ck-up of ~he torque aonverter 110. If the t~rq~e oonverter 110 is presently locked-up, the methodology returns to the fihift Eelect block 804.

O~herwise, the methodology advan oes to block 834 called partial lock-up logic or methodology, to be described under ~ection heading "TO~QUE CCWVERIER IOCK-UP METHCD", for the torque aon~e ~ r llOo If a ~hift or ~ear change is needed or required, the shift logic bl~ck 828 uses one of twelve um que shift programs or routmes. Ihe .6hift routines are 1-2, 2-3, 2-4, 3-4 ~upshifts); 4-3, 4-2, 3-2, 3-1, 2-1, (downshifts); and N-l, R-N, N-R ~garage shifts) bD be described herein. The shift logic block 828 has bo identify the proper shi~t logic r wtine, an~ ~hen execube it. Ihe shift logic block 828 controls the ~olenoid actuated valves 630, 632, 634 ~nd 636 ts shif~ the transmission 100 ~rom its pre3ent gear to the next g~ar in a ~mooth .

After the 0hift lDqic block 828, the methDdology ahvan oes to diamDnd B36 and determines if lock-~p of ~he tcr3ue ocnvert~r 110 is required as p¢eviausly described~ If lock up is req~dred, the ~ethodology advan¢es ~o diamond 838 and detenmines whether the torque converter 110 is already locked-up as previously described, If the ,~,~, i~ 1 320060 torque converter 110 is n~7t already locked-up, the tra~lsmiS5iOn oontroller 3010 exe~tes tl~ pa~:tial lwk-up blocX 834, t~ be described here~ .

me partial loc3c-up blo~c 834 is used to ~ ~lip of the torque oo~verter llO.

Slip eq~als Ne ~us ~at. par block 834 instrucl s or causes tl~e tras~nissio~ 100 to ~ully lock, partially l~k or fully ~ k the t~rque oonverter 110.

If unlock is desired, the trar~nission o~ntroller 3010 Wl11 hold the solenoid-actuated valve 636 in ~he de-energiz~d or n~rmally vented mDde to m~ve the LU switch valve 614 and allow fluid pres~re tD disengage the lock-up clutch 186. I p2rtial lock is desired, the transmission oontroller 3010 wlll reduce slip t4 a l~w or predetermlned desired value, but not completely eliminate it~ The transmission oontroller 30iO calculates the 61ip by Me n mus Nt based on the input from the ~ensors previcusly described. The tr~smission controller 3010 ccmpares ~his to a prede ~ desired value of ~lip, e.g. 60 r.p.m., and thus, determines if the borque conver~er 110 i5 slipping too n~ch or too little. If boo ~ch 51ip occurs, the tran3mission controller 3010 will increase the dut~ cycle (nON" time) of the lowlreverse clutch solenoidactu~ted valve 636 and the W ~witch valve 614, ~hich will incr~ase the pressure differential across the lock-up clutch ~ss~rbly 186 an~ thus, decrease the ~llp. Ihis technigue ~s called ~pulse~width modulatic~n.

If ~ull lo~k-up ls desired, the tranrr~ssion ocntroller 3010 will gradually ~ncrease the fluid pressure bo the lock-up clutch 186, a~ding m~re ~CN~ ~ycle time to the ~Dlen~id-actuated valve 636 thereby increasing the ~N" cycle time a~ the IU switch val~e 614 until m~ximum, xesulting in zero slip.

- ~ ;

1 320060 Returni~ to dia~nd 836, if the ~a}~nission controller 3010 deter~es 'chat lock-up of the torque cc7n~tex 110 i5 not requir~, the methodology advar~ces to }:uk;ble 840 to execute diagnos'cic ~r mon~tor~n~ routines as previausly described.

Similarly, if the trarlsm~ssion c~troller 3010 de~s that the ~o~3ue o~ilverter 110 is already l~ked-up in diamond 838, the meth ~ology advanoe s to b ~ le 840 to execute diagnostic or ~ tDring routines as pre~iously ~escribed.

Further, once the partial lock~up ~lock 834 is completed, the methodology advanoes to bubble 840 t~ execute diagnostic or ~ toring routmes as previously describ~d.

From diagnostic bukble 840, t~e methodology advances to diam~nd 842 and dete ~ es whether a failure has occurred as previously described. If a failure has occurred, the methDdology advances to block 844 and causes ~he transmission 100 to default ~o or operate in second gear. Otherwise, if no failure occuYs in di~mond B42, the methodology advances bo diamo~d 846 and determines if the time period for the diagnostic loop has expired ~y any suitAble m~th~d ~uch as looking at a oounter. If ~he time has not expired, the nethodologn~ advanoes to bukble 840 to execute the diagnostic routines again ~ntil the time period has expired. If the time ~ riod has expired, the ~eth3dology a ~ s to bubble B48 b~ calculate ~ s Ne, Nt and No as p ~ ously described. The ne*hodolsgy tben advan oes to bubble 850 tD perform ~ shift ~chedule as p~evicusly described u5ing P~NCDD~ circle 852, output speed No ~ircle 855, THRr ~NGLE circle 854, and engine temperature circle 856.

To perfonm the ~hift in a ~mooth manner, ~he tr2nsmlssion c~n~rDller 3010 slip~ the clutches of the mNlti-clutch assembly 300.

A /C'd 1 320060 The transmission oontr~ller 3010 has to control the pressure on applying clutches and releasing clu~ches in an orchestrated n~nner.

Tb do this, the methodology advances from the shift ~ le bukble 850 to kubble 858 and determ m es the appropriate rate of accelerati~, called the Wdesired ac oe leration" (alphadeSired or u*) tc ~Gntr~l the turbine 128.

Ihe desired acceleration nay be predetermined by an equatian, point/slope interpolati~n or any o~her sNitable method. m e nethodology advan oe s t~ bu~ble 860 and calculates the present ~cx~leration lalphat or t) of the turbine 128 based on turbine speed Nt which tells the transmission controller 3010 how quickly the shift is happem ng. r~he transmission controller 3010 indirectly ccmpares the ~alue of desired aooeleration with the calculated acoeleration. This nay be acoomplished by placing the above values into an equation to decide the duty cycle for pro2ortianal control to ke descrIbed. The method~logy advances to bubble 862 to output the appropriate co~mand 6ignals to either actuate and/or deactuate (turn logi~ally either "ON" or "OFF") the sDlenoid-actuated valves 630, 632, 634 and 636 for the engaging lapplyl or disengaging Irelease) of the clutches.

For upshifts, if the turbine 12B is decelerat m g ~co fast, ~he transmission controller 3010 reduces the pressure on the applying clutch by either actua ~ and/or deactuating ~he ~012noid~actuated valves 630, 632, 634 and 636 in bubble 862. Fbr downshifts~ if the turbine 12B i5 accelerating too rapidlyl the transmlssion cDntroller 3010 ~ncreases ~he pressure on the applying clutch ~y either actuating and/or deactuating the ~olenoid-acblated valves 630, 632, 634 and 636 ln ~ubble 862. If the burbine assembly 128 is accelerating at ~he deslred ~cceleration level, the ~ol~noid-actuated ualves 630, 632, 634 and 636 are e~ther 'A~ /3 ;:

, . ' ' ' ' 1 3~0060 actuate~ and/or ~tuated to c~ he shift or gear ~hange.

At t~e end of 7 ms. loop, the methodology a~vances to diamond 864.

Ihe tr~ission oontroller 3010 taLli~-s ~ he ratios of Nt to No again to detennir~ if the ~hift or gear c~hange is oc~plete.

If No ~nd Nt are at pr~er ~ralues, ~.e. ratio x No = N~ for a predetermi~ ti~[e period which is different ~or eac:h shift, the tran~n~ssic~n ocntroller 3010 determines ~ ~t the ~hift or ~ear change ~s co~plete. m e nethodology returns bo the beginning of the cvntr~l logp t~ ~he fihift 6elect block 804. If the ~hift or gear change is ~ot ~ lete, the methodol~gy reburns to the ~hift logic block 828 to repeat ~he method as previcusly described.

The shift "select" routine or method in block B04 of Figure 12 falls in the ~ain loop i~mediately a~ter sysbem start-up in b~bble 802 of Figure 12. ffle shift schedule routine of bubble 810 is called before shift ~election analysis is perfon~ed. æll other key vaxiables such as cutput ~ d No, turbine ~peed Nt, ac oe lexation, etc.:are also updated prior b~ shift selection analysis. m e Ehift 6chedule rcutine of bubble 810 detenmiNes the app~opriate gear the transmi~ion 100 of the vehicle be placed ~n (See Figure 13B) as de~crlbed Lubseque~tly herein.

~his informa ~on i~ oonNeyed by ~etting the bits of ~hift schedule cutput" ~ qhe ~hift selection block 804 cQmpares the geax r~lat0d bits of the in-gear oode (IGCODE) as defined by circle 812 and 55CUTP. If they are equal, no 6hift is r~quired. ~n ~bis ~ase, the m~hodol~gy will aecode what gear the transmission 100 is in and will revalidate the proper "clutch" and "solenDid" ~tates ~i.e. either ~A ~o~ ` 1 320060 logic~lly "ONI~ or "OFF") of the valves 630, 632, 634 and 636 (Figures 5A-L).

m e shift selection method ~Figure 13B) has enormous oo~plexi~y.

In order to ~u m mize the size of the n~thod t3 a nana~eable level and t~ derive R~M and RoM eficacy, a ~echnique usin~ a ~hi.ft ~cGn~rol table" is employed. Each rcw of the hift cDntrol table has four ~ es. m e shift control table format is defined as follows:

M~SR IGCCDE SHOODE IF IGC~DE TRUE OoMPLEMENT ~ E (1) (2) (3~ (4~ m e SHCODE is the "shift oode", i.e. from first tD second gear. IGCCDE is the in-gear code, i.e. present ~Qera~ing gear of the transmission 10~. M~S~ is the eight bit binary oode for the result of a logical cperati~n..

As illustrated m Figure 13A, the ~hift 6elect block 804 is generally shown ~or a shift selection while the tr~lsmission 100 is operating "in gear", i.e. the transmussion 100 is presently in first gear for ~ le. After power-up m bubble 802 of Figure 12, the nethcdology entRrs ~he shift select through bukble 866~ ~he nethodology advances ~o block 868 and ~ ints tD the beginning ~r start of ~he shift ccntrol table (f~rst r~w), previcusly described, whlch iS stored in ry. The nethodology advano~s ~ block B70 and prepares a ~select ~skn ~M~ ~ro~ which the IGC~DE and SSÇUTP re "logically PND-ed". The n~thDdology advances ~D block 872 and ~ompanes ~ask ~M) With the first ~ybe in the shit oontrol table row. Ihe methD~ology advances to diamon~ 874 and determines wh~ther a na~ row was fçund.

If a match~ w was famd, the methodology ~dvance~ to block 876 as~ points A faS .

1 320060 ~o the next r~w in the shift oon~l table.

Il~e ane~lo~r~ then loc~ps back to dia~nd 874 previously described~ If a mat~ r~7 wa5 fcund at ~arncnd 874/ the methc~ology a~vances to di~nd 876 and determines ~ether the preserlt IGaO~E e~s the Eecond ~yte of the ~hift ~tr~l table row.

If the p~ t IGCO~E ff3uals the se~nd ~e~ ethodology ~dvances tt~ block B78 ar~ picks tl~e third byte c~ntaini~2g the shift to 3 e perforll~d, i.e. first eeo~nd gear.

If the present I~G~E does n~t equal the s~nd }~ytel the n~ology advances to blo~k 880 and piclcs the ~ourth ~te ~nta~ the ~hift t~ be performed. 1~ meth~dology advanoes fr(3n blocks B78 and 880 to bu~ble 882.

At ~ble 882, the n~Lhodology returns or goes to tc~p of shift in shift logic block 82B of Figure ï2 to perfo}m the shift just ~elected. m e shift select block 804 is 8hcwn schematically in Figure 13Bo If the present ~hift is to be abandoned ~or a new shift, i.eO a shift selection while the trangmission 100 is presently performing a shift, a ~election process called "change-mind" analysis is used as illustrated ~n Figure 13C. During the ~hift loop, the meth3dology enter5 the change1mind portion of the shift selection block 804 ~hrough ~ le 884. The methcdology then ~hances to diamond 886 and determines wdYth~r a new shi ~ s~ ~ e i~ different fram ~he present shift ~cheduJe by looking at ~he ~hift scbedule output gssouTp) which may be a ecded regi~ter. If nDt, the ~ethodology ~dvances ~o bu~ble 888 and detenmines ~hat change~mind analysis i~ ~t allowed and oontinues ~he pre~ent shift~ If ~he new ~hift 6chedu1 ( ~ ) is different from ~he present ~hift ~ le, the ~ethcdolo~y advances tD block 890 and vectDr~ tD the proper change~mind processlng point based ~n a change ' : A ~o~ t 320060 mind table stored in mernory ~ich is s~lar to the shift control table.

In ~ther wc~rds, the m~thodology uses 2 ve tor ta~sle c~riented method for analysis of each "present ~hift" and jur~s ~ the praper ~cess point.

q~3e methodology then ~avanees to block 892 ~nd performs ~:lcs usin~ key variables (i.e. ~peeds, t.hr~ttle angle, ~peed ratios, SSCX~IP, IGCGDE, etc.~ at its a ~ r~priate processing point. m e net~x~dology adsrances to dlamond B94 and det ~ s ~ether chan~e-mi~d o~ndi.tions are valid by the old SSCUTP not ~stchiny ~he nR~ or recent 55CUTP. If the conditions are nct valid, the methodology advances to bukble 888 p~eviGusly described to oontLn~e the present shift. If the chang~imind conditions 3re ~alid, the methodology ~ nces b~ bukble 896 and aborts the present ~hift an~ selects the new shift from the prDcessing point.

~ ~ ~rD The shift schedule method determines the apprcpriate gear in hhich the transmission 100 should be plaoed. The shLift schedule method ~irst debermdne~ the present gear of the transmission 100 ~y the ~hift lever positicn 606 of the nanual lever 578 in cixcle 812 of Figure 12.

Based on ~he ~hift lever positlon 606, the ~hift schedule nethDd de ~ s the apprcpriate gear in whlch the tr ~ ssion 100 should plaoed.

Referring to Figure 14A, the ~ukble 810 of ~igure 12 ~or ~he ~hift 6chedule methDd is ~hown. qhe ~ethodology enbers rom the ~hift ~elect block 804 through bu~ble 900 and advanoe s to diamond 902. ~t d~amDnd 902, ~he ~eq~h~d~logy detenmines whether ~e ~hif~ lever pc~ition ~SIP) 606 of ~he ~nual lever 578 i~ park P or neutral N by reading a coded ~ignal ~rom the Gensors NSl and ~S2 (Figure 4B) to be described.

A ~o~ 1 320060 If SLP 606 is park or neutral, the raethodol~y advance~ to block 904 and sets the new altput ~SSWl~) of the shift scl~ule (SS) to neutral.

Ihe me~odology th~ :returns or ~ts thrwgh h~le 906.

At di~nond 902, if SLP 606 is not park or neutral, ~e ~ology ~dvances ~ diYnd 908 and s3ete~ ~whe~r 3iLP 606 is severse R }~ ignal fram the sensors NSl and NS2.

If SLP 606 is reverse, the methodology th ~ advances to block 910 and sets ~hift schedule ~o rever~e. m e ~e ~ ol~gy then returns or exits thrcugh bubble 906.

At diamDnd 908, if SLP 606 is ~t reverse, the nethodology advances to block 912 o~ncludes or det ~ es that 5LP 606 is equal to overdrive CD, drive D or low L. The methodoloqy then advances to ~lock 914 and selec~s tw~ adjaoent lines based on ths present shift schedule and the shift schdule graphs shcwn in Figures 14B thIx~lgh 14D for a SLP 606 o overdrive OD, drive D or low L. me methodology advanoes to blo~ 916 ~ scans these lines usi~g a ~echnique called ~point slqpe" (PSLCPE), t~ ~e de~cribed under ~ on heading "PSLOPE METHOD" (Fi~ures 15A and 15B) which is a linear interpolation technique (N~ on X-axis and throttle angle on Y-axis). The ~ethodol~gy advances to diam~nd 918 and determines ~*rthYr ~here i~ a n~w ~hi~t ~chedule tD a ooasbdown shift, l.e. &eoond bD first gear ~rom the SOUTP (~r a downshi~t) and throttle ~ le ~for ooast versus ki~k). If there i~ a n~w ~hift 6chedule to a coastLswn ~hift, the rethcdology ad~anoes t~ bl~ck 9Z0 and checks the g ~ ratios of the year sssembly 500 ~y perfonminq ~peed ~alcNlations to avDid a ~hDck~ r3m a pcw~r-plant rever~al Bituation. A power-plant reversal ~tuation or condition exists when ~he w~eels of the vehicle drive the en~m e thrcugh the transmission during decelera~ion rather A ~a~ 1 320060 ~an t}e eng~ driving the tr~ssion, in b~rn, drivi~g t~ ~eels.

me m~thodology advances to di2 morx~ 922 and det~e~s whether a Ex~wer-plant re~ersal situat~on or ~dition ex~sts.

If ~ E~;wer~lant reversal c~ndition ~x~sts, ~e met~dol~T a~oes to bloc3c 924 and ~es not change 'che shift ~dule. lhe m~dolos~ reb~ns or exits thr~h }~ble 92S.

I~t dian~nd 918, if there is ~t a new ~lift ~ch0dule to a o~astda~ ~hift, the meth~dology ~dvan~s tc~ block 928.

Also, if a pa,ær-plant ~eversal conditio~ d~es not exist at dia~nd 922, the n~ethodology advances to block 928.

At bloc!c 92B, t}2e met~xsdology allcws or a ~w 5hif~ ~e.

The ~ethadology then advanoes to bloc3c 930 and checks for diagnostic situations or o~nditions as previc usly described in oonjunction with Fig-lre 12. The methodology advanc s to diam~nd 932 and determines whether a diagnostic situation or oondition exists.

If a diagnostic oondition does not exist, the methodolo~y advances to bloc~ 934 and allows the shift ~chedule to proceed or be changed tD the new shift s~hedule. If ~he diagnostic oondition doe s exist, ~he nethodology ~dvances ~D blo~k 936 ~nd does not change the : ~bift schdule.

The methodology advances from blo~ks 934 and 936 to bukble 938 and exits or returns.

: ~ .

::

' ~ ~0~ . ...

1 3200~0 ~ ferring ~ .

Figures 15A and 15B, t:he "point slq?e" (PSIl~)PE) routine of block 916 of ~ re 14A i5 slK~wn. me P~laPE method determines the throttle angle given ~utput E~3d Nc~ by ~canni~ tl~e E~ift li~es ~n Figures 14B thra~gh 14D Eitored as a tablE~ ln the Ir~ry of the transnission ~ntroller 3010. A~ the start of the PSI~E r~utine in bu~le 1000 of Figl~re 15A, the methodology advances to block 1002 and temporarily stores the value ~or X in ~he memory of the transmission oontroller 3010. The ~ethodology then advances ~o diamond 1004 ~nd d~ ~ es whether X is less ~han or equal bD XO ~Figure 15B) which is a point on the ~hift line. If X is less ~hEn o¢ equal to X , ~he methodology advances to block laO6 and gets or ~ the value for YO and returns or ex1ts thrcugh ~ubble 1008. If X is greater than XO~ the nethodolo~y advanoe s to dlam~nd 1010 and detenmines whether X is less than ~. If X is less ~ an ~, the methDdology advances to block 1012 computes the slope between the points ~ and ~ 1~ me methodology ~hen advances to block 1014 and oomputes Y ~ased on YR plus slope. The ethodology then returns or exit3 thr~ugh ~ubble 1016.

~ ~At diamDnd 1010, if X is not less than ~, the methodology : advances to diam~nd 1018 and dbtermines whether the method is at the end o~ a table of values for ~he ~hift ~chedhle gr~phs IF1gUre~ 14B-D), i.e.

XO; YQ; ~; YR X~; Yn.

If the ~ethod is ~ot at the end of the table, ~ ~e~dO1O9Y ~nDeS tO b1OCk 1020 and ~08S tO the n~:t r~ Of 1che table. ~The methodDJogy then locps back bo di~mond 10l0.

~ If the net~cdology 1s ~t ~he end of the table a~ diamond 1018, : the nethodDlogy aavances bo block 1022 and ooncludes or determines that the valu~ for X is not in the table ~ut g~eater than Xn (Figure l5B~, :

' ~ .

~1 3~6D an~ gets the Yn value, i.e. the l~st value Yn frcrn the dat~ table based on the value for Xn . me Ise~dolagy then returns or exits thr~gh bu~le 1016 .

The 6h:ift logic block 828 contains twelve unique shift prograns.

me shift l~ic bloc}c 8213 identifies the ~hift logic or ~autine to be executed. ~br example, if t}x tran~nissian 100 is in fi:rst gear and the ahift schedule cu ~ t (SSO~TP) chan~es to call for ~eoond gear, the ~hift selection block 804 pic~s a SHCODE and 6hift logic block 828 identifies and executes the SHOCDE ~or first bo ~econd (1-2) logic.

Each of the twelve different ~hifts involves extensive calculations an.d logical nanipulations to determine the ~ON" or ~OFF" ~tates of the solenoids of the ~olenoid-actusted valves 630, 632, 634 and 636 (Figures 5A-L) for engaging (applying) or disengagmg (releasing) of the ~lutches for the shifts. Ihe~e shifts ar.e organized into three sets of shifts as follcws: upshifts 1-2, 2-3, 3-4 and 2-4;

:

: dDwnshifts 2-1, 3-1, 4-3, 4-2 and 3-2; and garage shifts N-1, N-R and R ~ The methodology oonsists of ~hree major routines, cne for each of the abcve ~et~ of Ehifts. Tb naXe this possi~le, a "Control Table" n~thod i6 used. The key parametric entities ~re i~bedded in a shift oontrDl table as~follow~:

:

:

:;~ ` A .

. .. ` ~ : .

1 320~0 ~ . ~ ~ EC~ BIT ~1) A~Y EIE2~ BIT (1 }~DR. ~ VF (A~PLY) ~1 NI OEAR (irlitiati~g ~a~io) (2) NJ ~R (destinaticn r~tio) (2) DEST~ION ~ M~SK (1) All calibration variables are segregated into a separate 'cable call~d a "Vol~ Table" for exanple, a~ ~ollows:

~ ~a3s 103 ~F CU~H/MS~ 54 ~ ~V n ; ~ 1802 C 1 1851~ , 17 ~ PE Q~ ~: 74 ~ ::: : ~ :

duct develc~rent, ~e key flaw-r~e and vol~retric ~ ~: p~r~eter6 can be e~ficiently and ~nageably alter~ AS a ~ult, each : ~major ~hift~ rautine (upshift, d~nshi~t or garage ~hift) cas~ do ane of . . .

' ' : , " ,~ . .

:

1 320060 its nany shifts just l~r getting ~e necess~y fixed par~eters fran the E~hift control table ar~ the calibration (volumetric, flow rates, etc.) data fram the v~l~ne tables.

Accordir~ly, this ~ift l~gic neth~d prav~dles 'c}~e foll~7~r~ advantages: efficient ~nanag~nt of R~l ar~ uroes c~f the tran~ssion controller 3010s efficiency ~3urir~s3 product calibration cycle; and defect pr~ventiveness ~ ring dev~l ~rent aue to the 6egregation by upshifks, ~awnshift6 ~nd garage ~hifts ~nd by fixed versus calibration parameters.

~ eferring tQ Figure 16A, for upshi~ts of the shift logic block B28 of Figure 12, ~he methodology enters the ~tart ~r tsp of ~hift in the shift logic block 828 thr~ugh bu~ble 1100. The methodology advances to diamDnd 1102 and determines whether the torque oonverter 110 is presently in the lock-up mode as previously described. If the tDrque converter 110 is presently locked, the methodology advances to block 1104 and mstructs the transmissiGn controller 3010 to unlock the torque ccnverter 110 when ~lip from the present gear ~oward the target gear begLns, i.e. fr~m first t~ seoond gear. The ~ethodology then ~dvances to block 1106.

At di~mond 110~, if the bDrque converter 110 is not in the lock~up ~Lde, the ~thD~ology ad~noes to block 1106. A~ block 1106, the transmission co~tr~ller 3010 ccmpu ~s variAbles, Euch as t~ ( rcmoirins t~ nearly fill the apply clutch, tr (time t~ neaxly release), DCt ~torque phase duty cycle) etc., 8tates/flags bo be used in ~hift logie equati~ns and.i~teroepts/calculates variables u~ed for ~learning", to be describe~ under cection heading LEhRN MET~ODOLOGY" a~ the end of the shift. lhe ~e~hDdology ~*vances bo block 1108 ~nd &olves a :~ A ~'3 1 320~6~ predete~ined logic equation for the ~ly el~rent ~uch as a clutch.

T~e methodology then.a~vances to diarr~nd 1110 ar~ determLnes whether the ~olenoid ~or the a~ly element or onoaning clutch F,hauld Ix logically I~ s~ld be ap~reciated that the frictioq~ ele~rent (apply or release) E;uchas a clut~ is b~rned logically "ON or ~F" ~y either the energizatian ox de~ergizatic~ of the ~oler~oid-actuated valve.

It ghtNld also be ap~reciated that ~' or "Cq;F" can be either l'aF~lying or venting" of the functics element~ If the apply clutcil ~}x7uld be ON, the ~thodology a~ces to diarc)nd 1112 and detennines ~ether the apply clutch is ~ter duty cycle ~antrol, i.e. solel~oid-actuated valve to the clutch i5 cycled "ON" and "O~ y looking for a flag previausly eet. If the apply clutdl is not under duty cycle oDntrol, the methodology advances to block 1114 and s ON or applies the apply clutch by energizing or de-energizing the ~olenold of the re6Eeotive solenoid-acbuated val~e. If the apply clutch is under duty eycle oontrol, ~he methDdology advances to block 1116 and ~tarts or sontinues t~e d~ ycle.

At di ~ 1110, if the apply clutch ~hould nDt be CN, or ~pplied the nethodology ~dvances t~ block 1118 and turns OFF or disengages ~he apply ~lukch. qhe ~thDdolo~y ~dva~oes ~nom blocks 1114, 1116 or 1118 ~o block 1120 and 001ves a predetermined the release clutch ~r of~going clutch logi~ eguation. The nethDdology adVanCe5 to d~a~ond 1122 ~nd de~ermines wh~ther the release clutch ~r off-going clu~ch ~hould be O~ based on salculated ~peeds, thnottle angle and SS0UTP. If ~he release clutch shDuld not ~e CN, ~he nethodology advances to block 1 320060 1124 and ~ns OF~ or disengages t~e release clutch.

Ihe n~thodol~y then ret~rns or exits~ tl~ugh h:~ble 1126.

~ t dia;nond 1122, if the release clutch shauld be aN or applied, the methodology advan~s ~o dian~ 1128 and dete:~nir~s ~ther the release clutch i s under ~uty ~le ~n~rol ~y lcol;ing for a 1ag as previalsly descri~ed.

If the releaæ ~lut~h is not under ~ty cycle aontrol, the methodology advar~ s to block 1130 ~nd ~ s (~ or a~ lies the release clutch. me ~e ~ ol~y retulns or exits thro~gh bukble 1126.

At diamond 112~, if the rel~ase clutch i5 under duty cycle oontrol, ~ methcdology advances to block 1132 ~nd 6tamts or oontinues the du~y cycle. ~he methodology ~xits thrcugh bukble 1126.

~ eferring to Figures 16B and 16C, the dkwnshift logic for the shift logic block 825 of Figure 12 i5 shown.

The m~thodology ent~rs through bubble 1200. The nethodology advances tD diamond 1204 and determines whether the torque oonverter 110 is unlocked as previously described. If the borque c~nverter 110 is not unlocke~, t~e ne~hodology advances t~ block 1206 and aborts partial or full lock-up cperation.

The ~ethodology advances to block 120B.

At di ~ 1204, if the borque converter 110 is unl~cked, the ~ethodology ~dvan~es to block 1208~ At block 120B, the transmission c~ntroller 3010 co~pu~es ~ iables and states of flaqs tD be used in ~imiLar Ehift l~ogic ~ tions of the upshift logic. Ihe meth3dolog~ ~ s bo diamDnd 1210 ~nd ~etermines whether the pre~ent shift is a dbwnshi~t ~D ~irs~ gear by the s50urP. If thR presen Ehi~t i5 a hift ~o first gear, ~e me ~ dology a ~ nces to di ~ l 1212 and determines whether the ~olenoid ~witch valv~ 610 has n~ved to the low 'A ~ 1 3~0060 gear position (See ~igure 5E). Ihe position of the ~olenoid ~witch valve 610 is de ~ d ~y checking pressure switch data fn~ the pressure ~witches 646, 648 and 650 within a predeternuned tlne period.

If the sole~oid 6witch valve 610 has maved t~ the low ~ear po5iti~n, the methDdology Ad~an oe s to di~mDnd 1214 and determines w~ether ~he ~len~id switch valve 610 has naved back bo the high gear or lock-up position lSee Figure 5F~. If the solenoid swltch valve 610 has mcved ~ack ~D the high gear position, the methsdology returns or exits ~hrcugh bubble ~216, ~ t diamDnd 1212, if the oolenDid switch ~alve 610 has not m~ved to the low gear position, the me~hodology advances bo block 121B and executes sDl~noid switch valve oontrol logic ~energizing ~nd de-energizing the fiole~oid actuated val~es 634 and 636), pre~iously described, to move the solenoid switch valve 610 to the low gear po6ition. me methodology then advances to block 12~0.

At di2mond 1214, if the ~olenDid switch valve 6l0 has not mDVed back to the high gear pDsition, the methodology advanoes to block 1220.

At diamond 1210, if the present shift is n~t a downshift tD first gear, ~he meth~doloyy advances tD blo~k 1220. At blo~ 1220, the transmission controller 3010 olves the release clu~ch shift logic equation. The methodology ~ ces t~ diamond 1222 ~nd ~e ~ es whether the ~elease clutch 6hould be t~r~ed ON or applied as previously described. If the release clutch ~hould not ~e turn~d 5~, the methoaology advances to block 1224 d turns CFF or disengages ~he release clutch.

At diamond 1222, if the rel~ase clutsh should be turned CN, the nethodology advances to dlamond 1226 d de~ermines whether the release clu~ch is in the duty cycle mL~e as previcusly described. If ~he f6 . .

,` :

1 320060 release clutch is not in the dllty cycle n~de, the nethodology advances to bl~k 1228 and turns CN or ~pplies the release clutch.

If the rclease clutch is ~ the duty cycle mcde, the me~ology a~vances to !bloc:lc 1230 and ~ s or sont~nues ~she release clutch dllty cycle.

The methodology advanoes ~ blocks 1224~ 1228 and 1230 ~ diamond :1232.

At diam~ond 1232, the tran~nissi~ ~ntroll~r 3010 determi~s ~ether ~2e present ~ift is a da~shift tc first c.~ar as previalsly described.

If the present ~hift i~ a d~s~ft to first gear, ~e meth~dology advances t~ ~d 1234 and determines whe~er the sc:lenoid ~tch valve 610 has moved to the lcw gear position as prev~c;usly de5cri~ed. ~ ol~id switch valve 610 has not maved to thc la~ gear positi~n, the methodolo~3y exits t~r returns ~h~ugl~ ible 1236.

If the soler~id ~;witch valve 610 has moved to the lc~w gear position, the methndology advances to bloc~ 1238. If the present shift is not a i~t to first gear at block 1232, the nethodology advances to block 123B.

At block 1238~ the tr~nsmi5sion oontroller 3010 ~olves the shift logic equation for ~he apply clutch and intercepks/calculates the nQcessar~ data for ~learning" at the end of the shif~ to be descrihed ~ubsequently. The ~e ~ logy advances tD ~iamond 1240 and determines ~ether bo turn ~N the ~ ly clutch.

I~ the transmission oontroller 3010 determines not tQ tNrn ON the apply clutch, the ~ethodDloqy advances ~3 block 12~2 and turns OFF or disengages the ~pply ~u~ch. If the transmission oon~roller 301~ dbte~lllille5 tlD tU~I ClN the ~pply clutch" the lll~do~ dVallCeS to diam~nd 1244 and determines whether th~ apply clutch is in the duty cycle ~ode as previously described. If the apply clutch i5 no~ in the 1 3~0060 duty cycle mode, ~ methodology a~ances to block 1246 ar~3 tu~ N the a~ly clutch.

If the apply cl~tch is in the duty cycle ~de, the methodology advances ~o block 1248 and ~ ts or ~ntinues the apply clutch duty ~ycle. qhe methodology advances fran bloc)cs 1242, 1246 and 1248 to block 1250.

At block 1250, the tr~ssion co~ller 3010 olves a nan~ontroll~g ~lutch ~ihift logic equa~ion s~mîlar to the controll~g ~ift ~ogic equaticms ~d ~or th~ shif~ lt~ oc~r as p~evialsly described. A clu~h other than ~e needed to malce the shift or gear change is called the non~trolling clut~. I~ais cllltch is cycled ~N and O~T ~y the a~ropr~ate solenoid-actuated val~e to ~rave shift ~uality. me n~thodology adv~nces imn blo~lc 1250 to dianond 1252 and det ~ es ~ ether to t ~ ON or a ~ ly the non controlling clutch based on calculated speeds, ~hrottle angle and SS0UTP. If the tr a ssion con ~ ller 3010 determines not to turn CN the nQn-controlling clutch, the nethDdology ad~ances ~o block 1254 and ~urns OgF or disengages the non-oontrolling clutch. If the transmission o~ntroller 3010 determunes to turn C~ the nDn-controlling clutch, the ~ethDd~logy advances ~o blcck 1256 and burns ON ~he n~n-controlling clu~ch. ~he ~eth~dology returns or ~ ts ~nom bl ~ 1256 ~nd 1256 through bukble 1258.

Re~erring ~o Figure 16C, t~e garage ~hift ~ethDdology ~or the ft lo~ic block 828 of Figure 12 i6 ~h3wn, The nethod~lcgy enters the ~hift logic block B28 through b~ble 1300. The ~ethcdology adYan oe s to block 1302 and turns the ~on~oontrDlling clu~ches ~ither ~N or OFF, ~.e.

engages or di~e~gage~ the clutches ~ot needed to perform th~ gar ~ e shi~ts. m~ methodology ~d ~ s bo di~msnd 1304 and determines whether the present ~hi~t is a garage Ehift to fLrst gear by looking at sHooDE~ ~/~ A , ~ . ... .

.' 1 320060 If the present shift is a garage ~hift to f~rst gear, ~ he m~ dology advances to dianond 1306 and dete~nir~s whet:her the olenoid sw~tch val~e 610 has maved to tl~ f~rst gear position (Figure 5E) as previcmsly aescribed.

If the ~oler}oid E;witch valve 610 has not ~ved to ~ first gear position, 'che nethodology advances to blo~c 130B ~I perfo~ns solen~id switch ~alve ~ntrol l~gic ~s previc~sly descri~ed.

The m~thodolo~3y t~ e~its or re~curns thraugh b~ble 1310., At ~ian~nd 1304, if the l3hift is not a gaxa,ye ~hift to f~rst gear, the methodology advances to bl~ 1312.

At di3n~d 1306, if the ~;olen~id switch valve 610 has maved to the first gear positian I the met}~dolo~ lidvances to block 1312.

At block 1312, the 1:ran~n~ssion amtroller 3010 caT~utes variabl~s and states of flags to be used in a controlling shift logic equatian similar to those in the upshift logic.

The methcdology advances bo block 1314 and solves the controll ~ clutch ~lift lo~ic equAtion. m e meth~dology advances to diamDnd 1316 and deteLmines whether tD tNrn oN ~he contrDlling clu~ch as pre~iously describ2d. If thR oontrDlling clutch is rio~ t~ be turned ON, ~he me~hodology advances bo block 1318 ~ turns Ç~F the oontroll~ng clutch.

If the OGntrOlling ~lut~h is to be turned G~, ~ nethodology advanoes ~o di ~ 1320 ~nd ~eterNunes whe ~ the controlling clutch is under duty cycle oo~trol as previously descr~bed~ If the ocntroll~ng clutch ~ not urder duty ~ycle aDntrol, ~he methodology advanoes o block 1322 and turns oN ~he controll~ng clubch. If the oDntroll~ng clutch is under du~y cycle oontrol, ~he ~thodology advan~s tD ~lock 1324 and starts or 0ntinles the ~pp.ly ~lubch dut~ cycle. Ihe methodoloqy retNIns or exits ~ram blocks 1318, 1322 ~nd 1324 ~hrough bubble 1326.

1 320060 Partial lc:~ck-up (~W~ of the torque co~verter 110 is used in tral~lis5iorl 100 is o~erating in "t~p gearn, ~.e. t~e highest gear ~vailable acoc rdirlg to the ~hift lever positial 606 tP~DDL) o PIll is used for 6tea~-state slight slippage q?eration. ~n either PL~l or c~eratic~, a re ~ rn to UL c~eration is effected upon any of the follLh~ing crx~aitions: thL~ottle angle less t~n a predet ~ ed angle, e.g., 2 degrees, turbine speed N~ less than a predete~TL~ed speed, e.g., 1400 r.p.m. in ~cl~rth gear; ~tart of a dc:~Y3hift; start of a sl~ed change m an upshift ~r; appli~ation of the brakes of the vehicle.

In PLU, the ~ethDdology oontrols the initial application of the lock-up clutch assembly lB6 and ~aintains a li~ited slip oondition if FL ~s not used. me ~ty c~ycle (DC, 9~CN period) of the law/reverse clutch solenoid-actuated valve 636 ls calculated acoor~ing to the follc~wing:

deltaDC = -.8 aelta DC (i-l)+K(Ea-A).

ffle methodology att~ts ~ ntrol 61ip at a p~edete~in~ ~alue, e.g. ao r.p.m.

Ln each .02B 6~ c~ycle, ~e Irethodolo~y fin~s the slip error, whic~ is Ne minu5 Nt minus a predete~ni~d value s~ as 80 r.p.m, q~is ~nd three p~evious slip es~ors are used ~o calculate an antiei~ted slip error Ea. ~Ihe differ~oe betwe~ Ea ~d an anticipated error ~dificatian ~n A is ~ultiplied ~ a ga~n K ~o give a ~ty cycle ln~r~ent rm, i .e. either 1:he uc N" olr aCE ~?n time of ~CbR lc~tr/.rev~se ~lu~h ~olenoid-act~ated valve 636 ~o c~le the W 6wi~ valve 614.

In effec~t, this p~avldes a propor~ional/integral/differential oontrol with san~ filterin~ Lncluded bec~use of l:he poor qualit~ of the Ne data. Ih~ _ ~ 1 320060 other duty cycle ~cre~rent ~ a:>nsists of a oonstant, such as -. 8, times the previous ~uty cycle ~arE!IIto 5his p~des a lead/lag to ~nprove sys~sn stability.

mis basic o~erati~ is n~dified in a Rnm~er of ways de~i~ al canditi~ns. me gais~ K is reduced }~ alf ~n seocn~ gear in r~tic;n of the higher plant gain due to higher line pressure.

Also, ~he gain ~ is high at large errors ~n or~ o gain control more quickly, and low at ~mall errors ~n order t~ i~prove ~tabili~y. The "~-1 ~eDm prDvides the ~oll ~ features: ~or values of error ~bove 30 r.p.m., it cause~ the logic to try bD ~untrol ~he rate of error ~r slip reduction to about 300 r.p.m./~ec., rather than oontrollmg ~he error to zero as ~ e, in order to provide a ~mooth pull- m: and for values of slip below 10 r.p.m., it backs the duty cycle ~ut ~omewhat fasl~r than it w~uld o ~ ise, in order to reduce the exposure to FL b~rsionals at law Nt.

The initial duty cycle is 60~ in thlrd or ~our~h, and 55% in ~eoond because of the higher li~e p~essure. This value is also the ~FFer limlt ~or the first five ~ycles. Otherwise, during tip-ins rabor backs off the accelerator pedal of the vehicle), the duty ~ycle w~uld ~ t rapidly before ~he lock-up clutch 186 applies, causing a ~harp pull-in.

For ~ull lock-up, once PLU has brought the ~lip dbwn ~ 80 r.pOm.~ ~he duty cycle ~imply ~ ts ~y 1~ per cycle in order to inish the pull in ~mLothly. Onoe 90% 1 reached, the ~ethodology r~oes to: ~ull ~N. In ondex bo ~revEnt immedia~e EL durlng tip-ins before the lcck-up cl~ 186 is a~plied~ o25 ~ s of ~UI is re~uir~.

_ _ 1 320060 Re~erring to Figure 17, the torque oonver~er lock up Trethodology for tlle partial lwk~up block 834 of Figure 12 is sh~. ~t the start of the loc3c-up analysis in ~le 1600, the n~thodology a~vances to block 1602 ar~ ~hec~ all c~ditions ~hat may E~clu~ rtial lock-up ~peration as pxe~ sly described ~i.eO to unlock)~, me m~thcdology a~vances ~o diaremd 1604 and determines ~2ether any of t~ ccJnditions in block 1602 prevent par~ial l~c-up aperatior~.

If any c~r~ n pr~nts partial lock-up operation, the nethodology ~avar~ces to block 1606 and sets all conditions ~resets ~11 bits ~ the tr~ss.ion ~ntroller 3010 that were used during partial lock-up) ~ ~ock the ltorque converter 110 of the translr~ission 100. q~e methodology then returns thralgh h~le 1608.

At di~T~nd 1604, if there are no conditions which prevent partial lock-up operation, the nethcdoloqy advanoes to diamond 1610 and determines whether the tr ~ ss1on controller 3010 is presently partial locking the torque conver~er 110 by looking ~or the absenoe of a flag as previGusly described. If partial lock-up is presently happening, the ~ methodology advances bo block 1612 and checks the position of the throttle and turbine qpeed Nt fDr conditions that require unlock operation as previ~ly descr~.

The methodology advances to diamcnd 1614 and de~nines whether unl~k ~UI.) ~eratio~ is requ~ based c~ the ~ ~n block 1612.

If unlock operati~ is requi~, the ~logy advahoes to blodk 16û6 previ~usly described to ~e~ all oanditions to unlock the bDr~e ct~nverter llû.

If ~ lo~c-up is nc~t presently lu~ni~ ~t di~r~d 1610 or mllock c~erati~ is not requ~ at diarr~nd 1614, ~he methodology ~dvances to blo~k 1616 and c:hecks for conditic~s previalsly described .

.

/.2 7 ' .

:

:

~ 320060 that w~uld allow partial lock u~ c~p~ation (i.e. prevent unlocJc :~cm ooc~).

The me~ol~y ~dvar~es to diamond 161B and det~s whether all the oonditio~s in bloclc 1616 were ~atisfied~ If all the At dia~ 1618, if all the c~ litians Ln blo~k 1616 were satisfied, the ~ dology a~vaT~ ~o Ibloclc 1620 and eets the ~nitial CQ12ditials (i.e. bits i.r; the tr~s5iC~Zl CoJ~ r 3010) ~or going ~xn unlo k to E: artial 1Ock-up. me 3aethodo10gy a~anoes t~ di~nd 1622 and dete~s ~}etl~ the ~thcdo1Ogy is at the ~tart of ~ partial 1Ods~p time period, i.e. the ~ rt~ point of a time period for the duty cycle of va1ve 636. lhis is ~co~r~lished ~y ~k~g at a oourlter in the trar~nission ~ntro11er 3010 whic~ ~ycles ~ran zero to four ~zero bei~g the Btart o;E a time period).

If the methodology is not at the ~tart of a partial lock~ me period, the nethodo1Ogy rett~s.

If the methl~do1O~y is at the start of a partial lodc~p time period, the n~tl~dology adv~ces to block 1624 and ~ ss for canditic~s ~at allow fu11 1O~k-t~p (El~ opera~ion ~i.e. pr~nt unlock fran ~ring). T~e m~thodology ~vances to d mDnd 1626 ~ det~r.i~s whether full l~-up of the tlorque ~nverter 110 is already occurr~ }:y ~ or a ~ s pre-.ria~sly descr~bed.

If :Eull 1Ock-up is rx)t ~30cu:~ing, the met~logy ~van~es to di~n~ 8 a~ ~etermines w}~t~r oll conditic~ns ~heclced in block 1624 all~ full lock~p o~ratian. I~ all ~nditions ~11GW fu11 lo~k-up opera~ or fu11 lo~p ~ ~lready oocusring a~ dian~d 1626, the ~ dology ad~ranoes bo blo~k 1630 an~ so1v~s the equatians, pq:evi~ws1y described, ~r full 1Ock-up.

The netl~1Ogy t~ returns.

'A /~3^ t 3~0060 ~ t diamond 1628~ if any of the ~di'cians in block 1624 do not all~ full lock-up o~ratlon, th~ metl~dology ~dvances to block 1634 Eu~d 60lves ~e equations, prev~ausly descr;bed, for partial lo~ The metl~odology th~ advances to dianond 1636 and dete~nes ~e~r all ~s l:hat preclude partial loclc~up aperatioqlt as E~svialsly descr~bed, were satisfied. I all ~heclcs or co~diti~s were n~t ~atisfied, t:he ~ology a~vances ~o dism~nd ï638 ~ dete~nines whet~r the fault c~vunt is at Dr e~ ds a ~redete~nin~ maxin~ value.

If the fault camt is at the pxed~termi~ maxi~ value, th2 methDdology advances to block 1640 and perforns unlock operatiGn and . ~ores the iEault codes in m~ry of the trar~ission oontroller 3010.

If the ~ault count is not at the predetennined ~ value~ the neth~dology aavanoes to hlock 1642 and updates the fault count.

Ihe nethodolc~y returns fram blocks 1640 and 16424 Also, if all ~afety cl}ecks ~ere E;atis:Eied at di~nond 1626, t~e netl~ology returns.

~ mL~ ~D l~e presen~ im7ention provides an Uadaptive idle" neth~d.

7tive idle i5 a ~eature wher~ in the idle o~ndition with the engir~e ~g and the vehi~le æt~d ~ '~'CDn ~D" ~ or "L , ~ae E~DL posit~aal is alnDst like a neutral, ~.e. resulting ~n a b~rbine-free îdLe, in oontrast to a ~nnal ~rbir~stall~d idle. mis r~uctic~ in ts:)rque co~verter torque ~s engine tor~aue, and thus i~raves idle A true neutral idle ~der these oDnditi~s ~ s r~t possible, because ~his i~ 1ies a ccnplete xelease of oq~e of the first gear 1 320060 friction el~nts (~e underdrive clutch 302 in ~is case~. men, when the throttle is operled, the clutch apply cavity Ir~st fill, w~th the eng~ne and turb~ne ~g ~way be~ore the clutch can a~ply; a highly unsatisfactor}~ la~ch will result.

In the near neutral ada~ Idle strategy, the underdri~te clutch 302 is maintained at a very lightly applied l~dition, r~ady to pick up torq~e wh~ the throttle is ~ed~ ~is o~lition is inferred fram a ~light differ~oe ~ets~een engine Ne and ~r~ine Nt ~ ~ and ~us the strategy is to oontrol the duty ~ycle of thl3 underdrive clutch ~olenoid-actuated valve 63û for the underdrive rlutc~h 302 to maint~in this differes~ce. ~e target ~ine apeed INj~ is 50 r.p.~n. belaengine speed Ne if the engine ~;peed N is at or below its tar~t ~AIS), then decreases as the eng~ne speed Ne incre~ses ~ove this. Ihe duty cycle oontrol is a proportional/integraltdifferential c~ntrol based on turbine speed error (actual versus target).

If the throttle is opened or if the vehicle is r~lling at m~re than a few miles per h~ur, adapti~e idle exit is triggered. It may be tha~ ~rake-off triggers the exlt as well; this is intended as a feature to prevent a driver from leavLng ~he car while it is in ~daptive idle, by returning it to a normal creep idle ccndition if the driver remcves their ~oot f~m the brake. ffle ~ve idle exit routine incre~ses the pr~ortional/integral turbine deoeler~tion cc~trol, with desired t~ deo~leration ~ ing with throttle o~ ningl A di~ c~ throttle effect on duty ~ycle is ~l~o included in order tD get earliex refipon&e nnd thus prevent runaway a~ previously describ~d.

A /~5 " ~ 320060 Ib allaw for qu:Lck respon~ ehicle la;~ch, ~he urlderdrive clutch 302 is not fully released, I:ut is all~d ~ slip. ~e z~unt of slip is c~ntrolled ~y dut~ cyclir~g the ~derdrive clutch 302 us~ng a "s~ady ~tate" ada~tive idle equation. 13pon ~cle la~c~ aptive idle exit), ~e rate at ~ich the ~rdrive clu~ch 302 ~s a~lied is aolltrolled by ~uty ~ycling t~e underdrive clutch 302 using an Yexit~ .~tive idle equa~on lto all~r ~or E;n~ clu~ch applicatior,.

Sir~e ~ive idle unlr~c 'che en3ine wh~ the vehicle is b~ht to a Gtop, the engine can be idled at a lc~r E;peed whi~h will cause an ~ncr~se in fuel econar~.

Pefer~ing to Figure 18A, the a~tive idle metlx~dology 1700 is shawn.

At the ~tart of ~e adaptive idle in b~:b~e 1702, the Zr~'chodology advances to block 1704 to solve an ~ ptive idle co~ditions equation. me adaF~ive idle oondition equations ~ay be def~ed as follcws:

SET: (Throttle angle less than 2~) and (Mo less than 250 r.p.m.) End tBRAKE-CN) : (Throttle ~ngle greater than 4~ or ~No gxeater than or equal tD 250 r.p.m.) or ~BR~RE-OFF) Ihe ~bove conditiar~c have t~ be ~et tD get inbo or out of adapti~e idle.

The xesult ~f the above eguations i~ for setting or ~learing a flag whi~h ~s ~*ored. Ihe nethodbl ~ ~dvances to diamond 1706 and de ~ s whether adapkive idle is ~n a ~teady ~tate~ nDae (Figure 18C~ by looXIng ~or ~ flag or performing calculations o ~peed for ex2~ple. If ~daptlve idle i~ w t in the 6teady ~tate m~de, ~he ne~hldD~ogy advEnces t~ di~mond 1708.

.

A ~?6 ~` 1 320060 At di~n~l 1708, ~he tras~nission controller 3010 determir~s whether a~aptive idle is in ~n ada~tive idle "exit" ~de (Figure 18C) by loo3cing for a flag or performing calculatia~s of ~d fiDr ex~ ple.

If noti the meth~ology a~vances ~o diEm~ 171Q ar;d ~nines ~etl~r the ~tive ~dle oonditians previcsusly de~cribed are ~ ~y loolcing for a ~lag of block 1704. I~ the a~ve idle o~ditio~s are n~t true, the ~ology ~vances to 3blo~s 1712 and turlls ON or ~lies the ~ive clu~ 302.

Ihe m~dology then reb~ns ~gh bubble 1~14.

At ~iamond 1710, if tt~e ada~tive ~dle ~ditio~s are true I the methodology advanoes ~o block 1716 to ~olve the ~ive id:le entrance equatioq~, represent~g part of the alrve illustrated in Figure 18C.

Ihe ~daptive idle entranoe equation may be defined as follows:

O ~til lNt (i) is ~reater t~n first gear Nt plus 50 r.p.m.] and ~Nt(i) is greater ~ lO0 r.p.m.l, then T(i~ = 7700 ~or one e:ycle In the abave e~aticns, T(i) i~ the calculat~d ON time of the ~d~driv~ clutch solenoid-actuated valve 63û at the ~tart of each cycle, and Nt(i) is the c~t ~bine speed. qhe underdriv~ clutc~ 302 is kept ~ully ~T li.e. T(i) - 0) ~til ~aptive idle conditicns are met. ~e ane~dology advawes to ~1718 and deter~unes whether the entran~e ~o ~ ~dle is oo~le~e ~y looking for a flag or perfo~ ~tic~s of ~d ~or ~nple.

If ~ entranoe is not o~nplete, ~she 2lletl~dology ~vanoes t:Q blo~k 1720 and t~r~s t~T ar disengag~s the underdrive ~ut~h 302. ~f the entranoe ls CXlDplete7 ~le met:hodology a~vances ~o blo~ 1722 ~ initializes predetermined variables such as the percent ON tine (i.e. T(i3 ~ 7700 for o~e ~yclel for adaptive idle , '~L ' 1 320060 steady state n~xde. The nethodology advances k3 block 1724 and starts the duty cycle of the sDlenoid-aGtua~d valve 630 ~or the underdrive clutch 302, The methodology ~hen returns th~n~ugh k~ible 1714.

At diamond 1706, if the transmlssion 100 ls in the adaptive idle ~teady state n~xde, the ~ethodology adv3n oe s to di~us~nd 1726 and dete~ nes whether the ~daptive idle oo~ditions prev.iously described in block 1704 are true ~y loDking for a flag. If the ada ~ive idle o~Qditi~ns are true, the ~ethod41Ogy ~dvan oes to block 1728 and ~olves the adaptive idle steady state ~quation each predetelmined tI~e period of the duty cycle (See Figure lBB). m e ~teady state equati~n m~y be defmed as follows:

T(i) = Tli~ 36 INt(i) - Nt~i-l)] ~ 24~Nt(i~ Nt(i 2)] ~ 4 lNt(i) - Nd~ where:

T(i-l) - previous cycle ON time for the solenoid of the ~olen~id-actuated valve; and Nd Z desired turbine speed.

If the adaptive idle oonditicns are not true, ~he methodology advanoes bo block 1730 and initializes predetermined variables previously described for the adaptive idle exit mcde, representmg part of ~he çurve illustrated în Figure 18C, ~he exit equation nay be T~i) = T~I + 8400 until (~t is less ~han ~500), then T(i~ e .~TAI ~ 2240 for cne cycle, where:

TAI ~ last T(i) in ~daptive idle be~ore adaptive idle ~xit The ~ethDdology advanoes ~rom blcck 1728 Bnd 1730 to block 1732 and ~nt~nues the duty cycle ~or ~he underdrive clutch 302. The methodDlogy *hen returns through bubble }714, .~ -`` l 32Q060 At diamorsd 1708, if the tran~nissio~ 100 is ~ the ada~ e idle exit ~de, the me~ology a~vances to di~nd 1734 ~nd determ~nes whether the a~laptive idle oc)nditians ~n blos~k 1704 previausly described are true ~y loolcing for a flag.

If the ad~ptive idle ~ditions are e, ~e methodology ~ances to bloc~k 1716 previausly described to ~olve ~ e ad~ptive idle entrarloe equation. If the adap~ive idle conditions are not true, the methcdology advances t~ diam~nd 1736 and ~beeGmines whether a p~edetermlned adap~ive idle I~Xit time has been exceeded by looking at a timer~ If t~e ada ~ ve ~dle exit ~ime has b~en exceeded, the ~ethodology advances tD blc~k 1738 and ends ~daptive idle operation. The methodolc~y advances to block 1740 and t~rns ~N or applies the underdrive clutch 302. The methodology ~h~n returns ~hrc~gh bubble 1714.

~ t diamond 1736, if the adaptiv~ idle exit time has not been exoeeded, the methodology advanoes tD diam~nd 1742 and de~ermines whather the transmussion 100 is presently in first gear by looking at ~peed ratios of Nt bo No. If the transmission 100 is presently in first gear, the n~thodology advances to block 1738 previously describ0d ~o end adaptive idle operation. I~ ~he tr2nsmission 100 is not presently Ln first gear, ~he ~ethodslogy adv~n~es t3 block 1744 and sDlves the Ddiptive i~e eKit equatiGn each ti~e period ~f the duty cycle.

Tha e~ut ~tion may be defined ~s ~ollows:

T(i) = Tti~ 52 lNt(i) - N~ 1)] - 34 [Nt~ N~ 2)] ~ 700 ~ 14 qhr~it ~ 25~ ~lhr(i) - qhr ~i-l~l, w~ere:

Thr~ ourrent throttle angle .

, 1 320060 m e methcdology advances to block 1746 and oo~tinues the duty cycle of the solenoid-actuated` valve 630 for the underdrive clutch 302. m e ~ethodology ~hen returns.

~L ~ ` .

The PRNoDDL ~eth3d is used tD read sensors ~ensing the position of the ~anual lever 578 to determine the driver-selected operating n~de or shift l~Ner position 606, i.e. PRNODDL. ~e~erxing tD Figure 4B, the n2nual shaft 591 i~ oonnected tD the ~anual lever 578. Neutral start ~ ng o~ntacts or oontact swit~h ~ensors ~NSl and NS2) threadably engage the transmission case 102 and are m radial ali~nment with a p~jr of circumferentially 6paoed outwardly e~tl~:lin3 projections or metal areas 3084 ~Figure lg) when the Ehit lever position is park P. The n~tal ~reas 30B4 extend thrcugh an m sulator or cap ~ember 578a made of plastic ~nd di ~ sed partially and circumferentially about t~e manual lever 578. The oontact swqtch sensors ~S1 and NS2 can only be grcn~ed they are in radial nlignment with th~ metal ar~as 3084 on the n~nual iever 578. A further detailed descripticn of the s~ructure is found ~nder ths ~ ~ CONlRoL CIRCUITS" h~ading.

T~e gear E21ector ox shift lever position (P~NODDL) is neasured by ~he c~ntact 6wltch eenuDrs NSl ~d NS2. ~ev~r~e liqht oontacts ~Ll and RL2 in Fi ~ 19~ are ccr:YKCtei b~ the ~ackup lights of the Yehicle in a known ~ann2r, NSl can only be groun~ed in park P and n~utral N.

I~e oDnt~ct ~w~tch ~ensDrs NSl and NS2 cann3t be grounded ~ith RL contacts closed. As a result, the o~ntact ~witch ~ensor~ NSl and NS2 n~Xe elec~rical oontact with the RL oontacts when ~he m~nual lever 578 ~30 :

1 320060 is Ln the reverse position. }~ence, continui~ to 'che bachlp lights can only exist in rev~se R.

Referring to Figure 19, ~he ~N~DL method ~; sh~n sc~tically. q~ ~ 1eVeLA 57B an~l ~p member 578a ~ct as a c:am ~d the c~ntact ~witch eensors NSl a~d NS~ act as the follawer. NSl and ~S;2 provide a binary zero in~u~ ~ t}~e gente~ t~nir~ or spr~ loaded contact pin 3082 is gr~ded ~ ntac~ t~e metal areas 3084 on the marn~al lever in 578. RL1 and ~L2 p~de manual lever 578 pushes ~pring loaded contact p~n 3032 on the o~ntact ~witch sensors NSl and NS2 u~ard dis~3necting ~ m~a:L o~tacts 3088 of the a~ntact ~ h sensors NSl and NS;~ with the ~L caqltacts.

~br ex~ , NSl, NS2, and ~ L2 provide a zero ~.~t l'he ~ng inputs are s~1n in the table below:

P R N OD D L NSl O 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 RLl O O O 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 NS2 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 RL2 O O 1 1 1 1 û O û 0 1 0 0 a~DE p TlT2D R D N TlT2 aD T2 D T2 L lhe ~RNa)DL ~es are verifi~d by p~essure ~wi~h data to be descrLbed hereill.

If thi~ engine of the vehicle is running (Ne is less than 500 r.p.m.), the tra~nissian oontroller 3010 che~cs its permanent ~nory to æe if t}le PRNC~DL c4de dete~nir~ above COrre5pOq~d5 with ~essure ~it n the p¢essu~ E;w~tches 646, 548 an~3 650 (Figures 5A-L~ ~t the last "Engine ru~ing" c~heck (nPRNaDDI, ~R").

If t}2e data c~n~esponds, the transmissian controller 3010 displays a valid A ~3-~ ~ 3 ~ ~ ~ 6 0 P~)DL oode.

If data does not oor~spond~ the tx~ssion ot~ntroller 3010 displays "?~" and reports "PRNODDL Failures - E~gine Off" to permanent n~nory.

If the eqlgine ~s ~ at or abave ~ determi~ spe~3d (Ne ~ual or greater than 500 r.p.m. ~, the tr~srnission oontroller 3010 reads the P~DL oode as ~oYe-described.

If P~X)DL code is valid, the tran~nission cDntroller 3010 verifies with the pressure switch data in the table belc~w:

P~L a~Re S~l~ I~R 2-4 ~D PN 0~ ~FE R O~F ~FF C~F OD,D~L C~N ON The transm~ssion ~ntrol logic relies on the Shi~ Lever Position ~SLP~ methodology. ~o identify l:he n~de of transm~ssion o~eration selected ~y the driver to p~c~vide }~steresis betheen t:he P~NODDL pcsitions, and to perm~t lini~ eration of the tran~ission oc~ntroller 3010 withc~ut functio~g P~DDL oontact switch sensors ~NSl, NS2, RLl, RL2) lt~ utiLiz~ng pressure ~ ch data frcan ~e pressure ~M:it~S 646, 648 and 650 ~Figures 5A-L) ~o ~den~fy the three l~rdraulic ~des of ~er Ition (i.e. reverse R, neutral N And drive D) .

In the SLP ~dology, P, R, N, ~nd CD (averdrive~ PRNar)DI- oodes are aeoepted as c~rresp~di~ ~draulic E~rt~ lpark ~d neutral ~ dentical) candi~an nust occur first. l'es~ for 5LP position ~he~i~ pressure ',~ __ .

1 320060 sw~tch ~nput) i~ only done w~th t~Tporary or imralid ~des present since this is the ~rea where l~draulic porting c3~anges oocur.

Referring to Figures 20~ and 20B, the ~ift le~rer position (SLP) methodology is ~.

At the bsg~ ~n block 1800, tl~e ~lethodology advances to dia~nd 1802 and dete~ni~s wl}ether the PRNC~DL oode ~PC) (NSl, NS2, RL1~ RL2) is ~ual to ~ oode for park P neutral N or a temporary code ¦Tl) ~tored in nemory in the ~xansmission oDntroller 3010. ~f PC is eqyal bD park, re~erse or a ~ orary code, the methDdology advances to ~lock lB04 and ~ets the ~hift lever po5iti~n ~SLP) 6Q6 (Figures 5A-L) equal to ~eutral. If PC is not equ21 to park, neutral or a ~emporary ccde, ~he nethDdology advances tD diamcnd 1806 an~ determines whether PC is equal tD reverse R or overdrive OD. If PC equals reverse or overdrive, the methodology advances to block lB08 and sets the SLP 606 ~qual to PC. If PC is not equal to revexse or averdrive, the methodolo~y advances to diamond 1810 and detenmmes whether PC is in drive ~ or low L. If PC is drive or low, the methodology advances to diamond 1812 and determines whether SLP 606 is reverse or neutral. If SIP 606 ~s nct reverse or neutral, the methodology ~dvances to diamond 1813 and ~e ~ s whether a neutral to ~irst gear (N-l~ shift ls in pxDgress by looking for a flag. If a neu~ral t~ f ~ t gear ~hift is nDt ~n progress, ~he ~ethcdology advances to block lS08 previously descrIbed an~ sets SLP 606 equal to PC.

If ~ 606 i rEverse or neutral at diamond 1812, or ~C dbes not eq~al drive or J~w at diJmcnd 1810, or a neutral to fir~t gear ~hift is in progress, the nethDdology advances tD diamond 1814 ænd determines whe~her PC equals an in~ralid c~de (I) st~red in m~m~ry.

If PC is an ~nvalid oode, the methodolog~r advanoes tQ di2mond 1816 and determines 1 320060 ~ether a PI~ODDL F~ (PF) flag has been set.

If PP ~s not ~een set, the methQdology advances ~o block 1û17 and ~let~nine~ ~ether a c~nt n o~ a cou~ter is greater ~han a pr~deter~d value E;uch as lS.

If the co~nt n is greater than ~ E~ etermined ~ralue, the ~æthodology advances to block 1818 ~d sets ~F.

If the oount n i5 ~: 91:eater t~ the pre~e ~ nined value, the m~thodology zldvances ~o block 1819 and increments ~he count n. The methQdology then advances ~o diamond 1821.

If PC is not an invalid ovde at ~ d 1814, ~he nL~thodology advanoe s to block 1820 and sets the oount n on the ooun~er equal to a predetermined value ~uch as ~ero. Ihe sethodology then advances to diamond 1821. If PF was previously set at diamond 1816 or once the PF flag has been set at diamond 1818, the methodoloqy advances ~o diamond 1821 and determines whether SLP 606 is reverse. If SLP is reverse, the methodology advances to ~lcck 1822 and tNrns oN th2 low/reverse clutch solenoid-actuated val~e 636. me ~ethcdol ~ then advancas ~o diamond 1823 and determLnes whether the low/rever oe pressure switch 650 is equal to one or pressurized. If the low/reverse pressure ~wntch 650 is equal t~ one, the methDdGlogy advances to blo~k 1824 and ~ets SLP 606 ~ to ~eutral. This occurs because the low/xeverse pressure ~wit~h 650 is pressurized or producing a ~ignal ~ al of cne (See Figure 5A) only when the transmission lO0 is ~ot in reverse gear and the 1cw/reverse c}utch 310 i~ be ~ ~pplied. If the low/reverse pressure switch 650 i~ ~ot equal t~ ene, the n~thodDlogy ~dvances t~ block 1837 tD be describea.

If ~LP 606 is n~t reverse at diamDnd 1821, the n~*hodolo~y ~d~noes to diamond 1826 and determin2s wh=*h;r 5LP 606 ~6 ~qual to neNtral. If SLP ~ neutral, the methodology advances tD block 1827 to 6et an SLP test flag. m e ~ethod31cgy then advances tD diamond 1828 and ' ~ J~ ~ 320060 determines whether ~he cverdrive pressure switch 646 is equal to one or pressurized. If ~he overdrive pres~ure swi~ch 646 equals one~ the ~ethcdology advances ~o blocX 1824 and ~ets a count Z on ~ ocunter equal to a predetermined value such as 43. The n~thodolo~y then advances to block 1830 and sets SLP 606 equal to overdri~e CD. qhis cccurs because ~he overdrive clutch 304 is being ~ppli~d ~hen the overdrive pressure ~witch 646 is pre~surized or producing a signal equal to une 3See Figure 5H). If the cve~drive pressure ewitch 646 does not equal one, the meth3dology advan oe s to diamon~ 1832 and determines ~hether ~he low/reverse ~ole~oid-actuated valve 656 is ~N, th2 pressure ~witches 6461 648 and 650 are not pressurized or axe equal ~o zero tSee Pi~Jure 5C) and Ne is greater -than a predet ~ value, i.e. 500 r.p,m. $f that criteria is txue, the methodology advan oes to block 1834 and ~ets SLP 606 equal to reverse. If that criteria is not true, the methodology returns.

At dianond 1826, if SLP 606 is not n2u~ral, the methodology advances to diamond 1836 ~ determunes whether engLne speed Ne is less than a predetermined ~peed, i.e. S00 r.p.m.

If e~gine sp~ed Ne is less than the predeteLmaned speed, the nethodoloyy advan oes to block 1837 and decrements ~he oount Z an the oounter by a predeterwined value. The methodology then ~dvances to block 1~38 ~ claars the,SLP test flag.

qhe ~e~hodology then ~ . If englne ~peed Ne i8 ~ot lcss than the predetermined ~peed, the ~ethodology ~dvanoe s bo diamond 1839 ~nd determines w~e~her a ~hift is ~n progress or o~curring by looking for a ~lag. If the ~hift is in progress, the nethod~loqy ~dvances bQ diamcnd 1840 and dete ~ es whether a neu~ral ~D first geAr ~hift ~s in progress as previ~usly described. If a neutral b~ first gear ~hi~t is n~t in { r ~ ~3~ ,~ .

1 320060 progress, the methodology a~vances ~o bloc}c 1837 previously described.

If the shift is nc>t ~ progress, ~r a neutral to f~rst gear shift is in progress, the methodology advan~es to dia~r~nd 18411 ~nd dete~nines the Lt~ E witch valve 614 i~ ~eing a~lied a~; ~ ~sult of the l~w/reverse elem~nt ~lenoid-actuated valv~ 636 being ~ergized or c n an~ lc~w/reverse E~essure ~3witc~ 650 equals one a~ ~oth the t ~ /faur 648 and sverdrive 646 pressur~ ~witches equal z~ro. If that criteria is txue, ~he ~e ~ ology advances ~o blocX 1842 ~nd ~ets SLP 606 equal t~ ~eutral~ If that cri~eria i~ ~ot ~rue, ~he methodolcgy advances to diamond 1843 and de ~ s whether the trans~ission 100 is presently in fourth gear by ~alculating ~peeds. If the ~ransmission 100 is presently is fourt~ gear, the methodology advances bo diam~nd 1844 and determines whether the pressure switches 646, 648 and 650 egyal 2ero. If the pressure switches equal 2er~, the ~ethodoloyy ~dvances to block 1842 previously described. If all the pressure switches 646, 648 and 650 do .not equal zero, the methDdDlogy advances ~o blocX 1837 previously descrlbed.

If the transmlssion 100 is ~ot presently in fo~r~h gear, the methodology ~vances to dia~ond 1845 and dbtermines whether oGunt Z equals a predetermined ~alue ~uch as zero. If Z dbes not equal zero, the ~ethodology advanoes to block 1837 previously descrLb~d. If Z equals zero, the ~ethodology adYances to di ~ 1846 and determines ~hether the trangmission 100 i~ presently in flrst gEar by speed caloulations, the low/revexse pressure ~witch 650 equals cne ~nd turbine ~pee~ Nt is greater than a predete~mined r.p.m~, or the pr ssure switches 646, 648 and 650 equal zero, o~ the low/reverse pressure switch 650 ~quals cne and a neutrAl bD first gear shift is in progress. If any .

A /'3~ 1 320060 of that criteria is not true, the methodol~gy advances ~ di~nd 1847 and det~es whether ~e SLP test flag has been s~3t.

If the SI~ flag has not been set, the methodology advanoes to block 1837 previausly deÆibed.

If t~e SLP test flag has }~en ~et, the nE~th~logy ~dvanoes to ~loc}c 1~48 and ~ets Z ~qual to a predetenr~ value ~ ~s 43.

The methodology then a~lvances to block 1838 previcRlsly descri~ If ~ny of the criteria ~ dia~nd 1846 is true, the nethodology advanoes to block 1849 and sets ~he SLP test flag and ~rts or a~ntin~s a SLP timer t5LPT1. me methodology then ~dvances to diamond lBSO and determines whether the tin~ on the SLPT tin~r is greater than a predetermined time period.

If l:he time ~ the SLPr ti~r is not greater than the predetermined time period, the nethodology retums. If lthe t~ oql the SLPT timer is greater than the predetermined time peri~l, the methodolcgy advances to diamDnd 1851 and determines whether the transmission 100 is operating in first gear by performung s calculations. If the transmission 100 is ~ot operating m first gear, the me ~ logy advances tD block 1852 and ~ets ~LP 605 ~qual to nEutral. me ~ethodology then advanoes b3 block 1838 previously described. If the ~ransmission 100 i6 operating in first gear, ~he ~ethodology ~ s tv diam~nd 1854 and detenmines whether the low/reverse pressure switch 650 equal8 ane. If the low/reverse pres 6witch 650 db~s not ~ one, the ~ethodology advan oes to blo~k 1856 and 6ets 5LP 606 egual bD xeverse (See Figur~ SC). The nethodology ~hen advanoes b~ block 1838 previcusly descr~bed. If ~he low/reverse pressure switch 650 dbes equal cne~ the methodblogy advances tD block 1852 and sets S~P 606 equal tD neutral ~See Figure 5A). The methodology ~hen a~vanoes ~ block 1838 previously described.

A ~3~iæ 1 320060 ~ ~ ,.. .

The purpose Qf ~he ~cceleration ~alculatiun i5 ~0 oontrol transmission operation durinq a ~hift or gear change.

The ac oe leration calculation determlnes the actual acceleration of the t~lrbine 128. rhis is a major factor in determining overall response of the c~ntrol system.

Referring to Figure ~2, t~e calculated 6peed bubble 806 is illustrated. At mDst speeds, the speed calculation is made by c3unting the number of teeth 319, 544 during a predetermined cycle and dividing that tooth oount by the actual time elapsed bebween the first and last to~th. Time is measured by ocunting clcck cycles in the ~ransmission controller 3010. m e tooth center lines are determined by read mg a magnetic sensor 320, 546 for t~ sixty-tooth input clutch retainer hub 312 for turbine speed N~, and for the twenty-fcur-tooth second planet ~arrier 5~4 for outpu~ ~peed No, respectively. At lower speeds, when no tooth passes during the 7 nillisecond ~ms.) cycle, the update rate must be ex~ended to ~re ~ one predetermm ed cycle, i.e. 14 ms., 21 ms., etc., to provide data down to the ndlL~nu~ speed needed.

Referring t~ Figure 12, the calcula W ac oe leration b~bble B60 is~illustrated. ~celeration is calculated by dividing the speed change bstween the last tw~ rE# m~ements by the average of the tw~ elapsed ti~s.

~ .

~ /3~ 1 320060 Nt = n (i) /T ~i~ alphat = t ~ n(i-1~/T O. 5 [T (i~ (i-l) No = 60n ~ 24T (i) N~ = calculated turbine r.p.m.

No = c~lculated al~ut r.p.m.

alphat ~t = calculated t:urbir~ acoelera~;on, r.p.m./6~c.

n(i) = r~ of teeth in lates~ ccNnt n(i-l~ = no. of teeth in pre~ s ca~t T(i) = time re~uired for nli~ eoonds T(i-l) = time required fQr nii-1) teeth, etc.

For turb~ne speed Nt and acoeleratiorl alphat, the calculation range is fr~m 40 to 6500 r.p.m.

Acceleration ~st }:e calculated as soon as practical after reading ~rbine ~ data because any time use slw~ the~ averall syst~sn resp~se.

For ~ ut ~peed Nc~, the ~alculatian range ~s frn 40 to 6090 r.p.m.

Due to problems with low speed ~ata ~rity, the ~: ~hange ox any ~ e nust be limited ~:>

plus/m~nus 30 ~r.p.m. when the previous a~tput E;peed ls less than 300 r.p.m.

At low ~ (balc*r ~bout 1500 r.p.m.), an alternate metl~d of caIculating t~l:~e acceler~tl~ i~ used.

At ~gher speeds, hcwever, the nm~u~ inl~it ir~; ~ ~ine ~#d ~2~ uld generate a large : ~ ~rst~rder alternating~ a~eler~tiol~ te~n ii~ this a~roach were used, :: :

lb ~ o~: ~is, a first-order ~lter is ~plcs~ed, which ~alculates a~elerati~n over an ~tire revolution. ~ is calculated - ::

1 320060 bas~d on each ql~lrter-revo.lution, the ~c~or~h previcus ~peed (one rev~lutiQn before) is` ~ubtracted, and ~he difference i5 divided by ~he ~ for the one revolution. Eecause thi8 acceleration calculation is m~re delayed, Fxurticularly at lcw ~peed, anticipati~n is necessary in order to achieve acceF~ le frsquency re~x~nse.

m e follchnLng table defines the speed and ac oe leration calculations as functions of ~, ~he nn~ber of q~urter revrlutions times.

~ c O represents 1DW ~peed operation. A3 the t~rbine. accelerates, when 11 or more teeth (out of 60~ pass ln 7 ms., ~he ~witch to quarter rev~lution is Lnitiated and Q begins to increment. Af~er the fifth ~ xev3lution, one rev~lution acoeleration can b# calculated; and after twv more quarter revolutions anticipation ls effected. Low speed operation is resumed when more than 11.3 ms. is required for a quarter revolution.

S2 ' Nt (i) at O n(i)/T(i) Nt-n(i-l?/T(i-l) oL(i) .5 * ~T(i) ~ T~i-l)] 15/T li) n u 2--.9 n .5* lT(i) t l'~ 5--6 n ~_ n 2 * lT~i) t T(i-4)] 7 n ~I a ' ' . .

1 320~60 where:

n(i) = no. of ~th in latest ~t ~assurL~ng 60-tooth ~eel~ n(i-l~ z no. of teeth in previ~us cc~t T(i) = time ~ for n(i) keeth, ~ec~ds T~i-1) - ti~ ~ed ~or n(i-l~ teeth, ~tc.

N~ calculated burb~ne r.p.m.

~i) = calculated ~rb~ne acoelerat;on, r.p.m./~ec.

ut = turbine acceleration term for use in shift logic ~a = anticipated turbine acoeleration, w~re a = (l/4) * E (36-3B) ~ ($) - (52-5B) ~a (i~ (20-2B) *o~ 2) ] ~(i-l) = calculated accel. ior previaus quarter revolutian, etc.

B -- INT [~t/512]; l~nit B 9 :

The purpose of th0 pre~sure E;witch test ~th~d is to verify that ~CIFT" el0Ent or ~lutch pressure E~witch2s will read high if a failure ~hould oocur.

The purpose s~f ~ tr~nissiofl ten~:ra~ure de~nation meth~ ~s to de~nine ~ t~ rar~nission 100 has wa~ned u~ Ewficiently to ~ se nc~rmal r~sp~se requ~e~rents wl~n the trarl=lli55i~ oontroLler 3010 sets the init~al trar~nission ~era~re range ~r) to either ~waxm" or "~ld".

/~/ ' , . ~.

1 320060 Refer~ng to Figures 2~A ~rough 21C, the metl~:dology for the pressure switch test' ~ transm~ssion *e~erature deterrni~tion i5 ShO4nl at l9Q0. ~t the beginning or start in block 1902, the meth~dology advances to dia~nd 1904 and determines ~ether the tr~ssion 100 is presently ~erating in firs~, E;ec:~d or third gear l~y perfo~ E;E~eed calculations. If the transm~ssion 100 ls no~ pre æntly operating in first, ~eoond or ~h~rd gear, the ~ethcd~logy advan~es to diamond 1905 an~ deternunes whether the shift lever position ~SI~) 606 is reverse R or neutral N by either the SLP or PPNODDL nethods pre~iously described.

If SLP 606 is reverse or neutral, the ~ethodology advanoes to block 1906 and clears a re-test flag.

Ihe ~ethodoloyy then advances to block 1907 and turns OFF or ~erminates the pressuxe ~witch test. If SLP is not reverse or neutral, the metholology also advances to block 1907. The ~ethcdology then advances to block 1908. At block 1908, the transmissio~ oontroller 3010 resets a timer to a predetermined value 6uch as zero and sets a default value ~f time oDrre ~ ding with th~ee ~econds if a pressure ~witch test flag (PSrF) has heen sæt or eleven s conds with ~he transmission ~luld temperature oold; five secDnd wqth the transmission temQerature fluid waLm; and bw~ ~econds with the ~ransmission fluid te~perature hot~ Once ~his has been accomplished, ~he methodolog~ re ~ .

At diamDnd 1904, if the transmission 100 is operati~y in either f;rst, seooDa or third gear, ~he ~ethGdology advanoes ~ diam~nd 1~10 an~ determines wh~ther the ~hi~t lever position (~LP) ~ethDd or ~est, previously descrIbed, ~s oN or ~n prDgress by lookin~ for a flag. If the SLP ~est is ON, or Ln progress, the methDdolc~y ~dvances to block 1907 previ~ sly descr ~ ~ te~in~te the pressuxe swltch test. If the .

1 320060 SLP test is not O~, the methodology advances to diamond 1912 and detennines whether eng~ne speed N is less Jcl~n a predetermin~ speed, S, i.e. 650 r.p.m. when the tran~n~ssion flu~d t~r~rature is oold, or ~e~s ~an 1000 r.p.m. ~en the tra~nissicn fluid ~perature is warm or ~ot.

Also, the ~ra}~Lissio~ ocntrollex 3010 de~ennines whether a No/Nt E;peed check fault cc~nt l5CF) is greater than a predetermined v~lue or a pressur~ switch fault oount tPSF~ is grea~er ~han another preae ~ d value. If $ny of ~he above criteria is ~et in diamDnd 1912, the nethcdology advan oe s bo block 1907 previou51y described bo ~erminate ~he pres Æ e switch test. If all of the criteria i5 not me~ in diamL~d 1912, ~he methcdolog~ advances bo blcck 1914 ~nd ~tarts or continues a timer. me methDdology t~en advanoe s ~o diamond 1916 and deternunes whether the pressure swltch tcst is CN or in progxess by lcoking fox a ~lag. If the pressure ~witch test is not C~, the methodology advanoes to dizmond l91B and dbtermines whether the time on the timer is greater than a predetermined time period. If the time on ~he timer is no~ greater than the predeternined time period, the methDdology returns. If the time on the timer is greater than ~he predetermIned time period, the ~ethodology advances ~o diamond 1921 and determines ~ ther g~F is less ~han a prede ~ ed val~e such as 60 and the ~5F equal~ ~ero~ If that criberia is nDt true, the ~ thDdology ~ s tD block 1908 previcusly described. If that cribexia is true, the ~2th4dology ~dvanoes to di~mond 1922 ~nd deee~mines wheth~r a olenoid ~ontinuity test, bo be bæen ~nactive for ~.prea2termdned time period, i.e. greater than 400 ms, lcoking for a flag. If ~ ~vlenoid oon~inuity test has not been inR~tive for the predetermined time period, ~he methodolo~y returns. If ' _ .

1 320060 the ~olenoid csont~nuity test has ~e~ inact;ve for moxe or greater than the predetermined ~ period, the ~ dology advances to block 1924.

At block 1924, the tran~3nissi~ controller 3010 b3~ns ~ or activates the ~essure ~w~tch testl ~ets o~nt n cm the ca3nter equal to a predete~ value such as zer~, and turns ON both the t~/f~lr ~ift 634 2n~1 overdrive 632 solenoid-actuated valves. ffle ~tl~dology th~n advanoe s to bloc~ 1926 and re~ets the timer equal b~ zero and ~ets a default value cDrrespcnding to ten seconds with ~he transmission fluid temperature oold; four ~eoD~ds with the transmission fluid t~mçerature warm and sixty seconds with the transmission fluid temperature hot.

The methodology then returns.

If the pressure switch test is ON or acti~ated at diam~nd 1916, the methodology advances to block 1927 ~nd adds a value of 1 to the count n on the oounter such that n equals n plus 1. m e me ~ ology then advances to di~mond 1928 ~Figure 21B) and determlnes whether the tran~mission 100 is presently cperatm g in first or second gear by performong speed calculations and the OD pressure switch 646 is ON or pressurized. If that criteria is true, ~he methDdology aavances tD block 1930 and turns ~ the overdrive ~olenoid-actuated valve 632. The methodology then advances to diamDnd 1932. If that criteria is not truet the ~ethodology advanoes to diamond }932 and determines whe ~ r ~he tran~qmission 100 is operating in first or third gear as p ~ ously descr ~ ~nd ~he bwD/four 6hi~t pressure switch 648 is UN or pressurized. If ~hat criteria is true, the ~ethod~logy adYances to block 1934 ~nd turns OFF the twD/fcur ~hift ~olenoid-a~tuated ~alve 634.

m e methDd~lo~y ~hen advances t4 di~mDnd 1936. If that criteria is not true, the methodology ~dvanoes ~o diamond 1936 and ~eb~rm mes whether A 1 320060 the transmission ~rature range is hc:~t or the caunt n is greater than a predetermined value such as 7.

At dian~nd 1935, if the transm~ssion fluid tesrperature i5 not h~t or t~ c~t rl is not greater t.han 7, the me~dology ~vanoes to diamo~d 1938 and determ~r~es whether the ~/fcur shift ~oler~id-act~ted val~re 634 has bee~ t~ed ~FF.

If the tw~Jfaur shift K~lerY~id-actuated val~e 634 is not OE ~, the T~thodology reh~ s. If the two/faur ~vl~noid-actuated ~alve 634 is OFF, the m~thcdology advanoes to di~m~nd 1940 and determlnes whether the engine temperature is greater ~han a pr~determlned temperature such as 75 degrees F (Fahrenheit). If tAe engLne ~ rature is gIeater than the predetermined temperature, the ~ethodology advan~es to block 1942 and determines or concludes ~hat the transmission temperature range is warm. If the engine temperature .is nvt greater than the predetermined temperature, the nethodology de ~ es or concludes that the tr ~ ssion temperature range is still cold. The methodology advances from block 1942 and diamond 1940 to diamond }943 and determines whe~her the ~ount n is less than or 0qual to a predetermined value ~uch as 5. If n is greater than 5, the methodology ad~ances to diamo~d 1948 ts be described. lf n is less than or ~qual to 5, the meth~dology advanoes to diamDnd 1944, which is tially ~et to zero, and de ~ es shEth~r a oount x on a oounter is ~ter than Qr equal to a prede ~ ed valu2 such as 8~ If x is less than 8, the ne~hodol~gy a~vances bo block 1945 and adds a predetenmined value of 1 t~ x ~uch that x egua}s x plus 1. Ihe methodology then advances b~ diamDnd 194~. If x ifi e9ual ~0 or greater ~han the predetermined value, the ~ethodology advanoes to ~iamDnd 1946 and determines if the en~ine tmperatur~ is greater than a second ' A. - ' ' 1 320060 pr~determin~ ~mpera~e such as 145 degrees F~ If the eng~ne ten~erature is greater than the sea~nd predete~ed ~erature, ~he methodology advalces to block 1947 and determines or ot:~ncludes that the tran~n~ssion fluid t~perat~re is h~t and ~vanoes to ~nd 1948.

If the engine ~eratllre i6 not greater than the ~:~nd predetermined ten~perature, the transmissioQl controller 3010 nEIin~ins that the ission fluld temperature i~ warm and advances to di~m~nd 1948.

If the transmission fluid ~emp~ratNre is hot a~ diamond 1936, the nethodology advances t~ diam~nd 1948 and ~e~ermines whether the transmlssion 100 i5 cperatmg in third gear and th~t the two/four solenoid-actuated valve 634 has been turned CFF (l.e. at block 1934).

If that criteria is true, the nethodology advances to block 1950 and clears the retest flag (RTF). m e methodology then advances to block 1951 and turns OFF or terminates the pressure switch test and returns.

If ~he criteria Ln diam~nd 1948 is n~t true, the metho~ology advances bo diam~nd 1952 and determlnes whether the transmission lO0 i~ oæerating in #eoond gear and the overdrive solenoid-actuated valve 630 has been turned OFF. If the above criteria is met or true at diamond 1952, the ne*hodology advances to blook 1950 previously describ~d. If the abo~e ~riteria is not met at diamDnd 1952, the methDdology advan oes to diamand l95q and determines whether the ~r~ssion 100 is operating in first ~ and the twD/~a~r 634 and averdrlve 630 ~;olenoid-act~ted valves have ~ turr~ t~F.

If that criteria is true, the meth~dology ~vances to bl~k 1950 previa~sly descri~ed.

If that ~riteria is nlDt trueO the methodology aavances to ~an~d 1955 and d~terrnines whether the value of n is greater than or equal ~o the value of Z.

If n is less than Z, the ~re~ology returns.

If n ls grea~r than or equal t4 Z~ 1 320060 the methodology ~dv~nces to dianDnd 1956 and determi~s whet~r tl~e transmission ~luid te~sperature is ct~ld.

If ~ tran~nission 1uid tesnperature is cold, the methodology aavances *c block l9Sl previausly descri~ed to tenninate the pressure ~;witc~ test.

If the ~ssion fluid ~perat:~re is no~ a~ld, the net~ology a~vanoes to diar~d 19S8 and d.eterm~nes wl~ther the retest flag lRIF) has ~een ~et. If the ~1 h~s been ~et, the methodc1Oqy advances to bl ~ 1960 and reports a pressure 6witch test failure to the diagn~stics to be described under se~*ion heading "ON-EQ~RD DIhGNOSTICSn The methodolcgy then ~dvances to bukble 1962 and goes to 6hutdown n~de. I the RIF is not set, the nethodology advan oes to blcck 1964 and &ets the RIF and the time ~) the timer equal ~o a predet ~ ned value such as 5. me nethodology ~hen advances to block 1951 previously described to terminate the pressure swltch test and returns.

me preferred method of determining ~he fluid temperature of the txansmission 100 is an "ac~umulated run time" method. This methDd predicts To, tran~mission fluid tempcrature. It bases the prediction on ambient and/or engLne coolant temperatures and on ob ~ transmQssion an~ engine warmrup rates. By using a~bient bempera~ure, the eng me block heater-Q u5e is ~ncornodated. If engine temperatune is lower than ambi~nt, it wlll be uçed sin~e ~t is more accurate. In the absence of any ~ rature ~ens~r data~ -3F is used for æmbient. Ihe sensDr data is received via the CCD llnk ~rom the ~n3ine ~ontroller 3Q20.

; qhis nethod:inoludes measuring ~he time ~pent in a ~Dn ~ tral gear condition ~hich represents effecti~ely torgue oonverter ~lippage.

~: ~When the torq~e ocnverter 110 is slipping ~h:ile transmitt;ng torque fromthe engine t~ the transmission lO0, heat is generated ~y energy .

1 320060 ocnversion. This heat elevates the tempera~ure of the txansmission fluid. The trangmission cDntr~ller 3010 mDnitors time (TR) ~Fi~ure 21D) and approximates wlth ac oe ptable accuracy, ~he quantity of heat generated, and thereby the elevation of ~ransni5sion fl~id ~e~perature.

Testing can be oonducted tlo dete ~ the relationship between the "run time" TR and the quanti~y of te~perature use ~T) Ln the transmissio~ sump as illustrated in Figure 2iD.

The nethcd mcludes reading ~he temperature of the engLne ky an input ~ensor and multiply mg the engine temperatuxe ~y a prede~ermined value such as 0.1. The nethod also includes reading the ~empera~ure of the ambient air by an input ~enSDr and nLltiplying the ambient temperature (TA~ by a predetermined value suoh as 0.9. The~e values axe added together to obtain the temperature point on the To ordi~late. The transmission oontrDller 3010 mDni~ors or resumes the run time period (TR~ once the ~LP 606 does not equal neutral N and Ne is greater than a ~redetermined speed such as 800 r.p.m. Ihe measured run time is multiplied by a predetermined slope value ~uch as 10 and is added to the summed value of the ~ltiplied eng1ne and Pmbient temp~rature. Thus, the equation of the curve To in Figure 21D n~y be defined as follows:

To - (.9TA ~ .1 E) ~ 10 * TR Aoo~rdingly, ~ To is less than 40 Fahrenheit (F), the transm~ssian fluid ~emperature wqll be predicted or set ~o c~ld. If To is greater ~ 90~ F, the ~ransmission 1uid bemperature will be pxedicted or ~et to hot. Otherwise, the transmission fluid temperature is predict~ as or set bo warm.

Additionally, a transmission temperature flag ~O ~super c~ld) all~ws for near norma1 operation under~sub-zero oonditions. This flag A ~ 1 320060 is set ~hen To is less ~han 0 F and clear~d when To is greater ~h2n 10 F. The super cold flag ~O is used by the tr~nsmission oontroller 3010 tv exte~d shift times and inhibit a third tD first (3-l) fihift ~y 6etting a ~lag. Other uses are also availa`ble.

Accordingly, ~his alternative, ~u~ preferre~ method allows the transmission o~ntxoller 3010 tD de ~ e the transmission fluid temperature withcut a dedicated t~mperature sensDr immersed in the transmission fluid.

..

m e purpose of the driver circuit continuity test is to check the solenoid circuitry for proper operati~n. Since the solenoid drivex oontrols the yround slde of each solenoid ~Dil 710 (Pigure 8), a direct Ehort to grownd in ~he line from the solenDid of the sDlenoid-actuated ~alves 630, 63~, 634 and 636 to the transmission con~roller 3010 wculd energize the solenoid coil 710 at a p~wer level that can resul~ in permanent ooil damage from overheating. An ~ circuit ~or direct .

short to supply vo~tage) wvuld also prevent turning the ~olenoidactuated valves "CNIl. Since these failures result in a loss of the normal inductive "OFF" spike ~See Figure 22E), a test which checks for the presenoe o4 thi~ qpike is ussd to confirm circuit CDntinui~y.

qhe tr2nsmi6sion:clntroller 3010 of the present ~nvention uses cne ~pike nonibor circuit to ~est all ~he solenoids of t~e ~olen~id~cbuated valves 630, 632, 634 and 636. The transmissi~n cDntroller 3010 uses a un~gue schedbling method or xcutlne to ensure ~hat the response of t~e spiJce mc)nitor circuit is fr~n the a~propriate solen~>id as ~ha~ the blocks arx~ ci~6i enclo~ed ~ the dashed line of Figures 2?B : . ~ ' 1 320060 and 22C. ~en ~e ton~ue converter 110 is ei~er ~ unlock or pull~bac3c, n~ ~oleno.ids are ~der duty cycle ~ntrolO me ~olenoids of the solenoid actuated valves ane tested sequentially to g~rantee the sp~ce monitor circuit response is ~ ppropria~e ~les~oid.

~ en t}~e torque conver~er 110 is in partial lock~p, the l~w/revexse clu~ch soleno.id-actuated val~e 6~6 i~ ~der dl~ty cycle linterrupt~ control. Ihe low/xeverse clutc~h ~ole~ id-actuated valve 636 is tested by looking for ~he spike mDmt~r eircNit respon~e caused ~y normal turn OFF (de-energizing) via the inter ~ ~ontrol. The remaining sol.enoids are then tested in seguence.

If ~he lcw/reverse clutch ~olenoid is CN ~energized), a low/reverse intersup~ is di~abled to guarantee the spiXe mDnitor circuit response is from the solenoid under test and not from the low/reverse solenoid which is under in~errupt control. If the low/~everse clutch solenoid is ~FF, a low/reverse re~irculation driver is turned CN to mHke ~ure the spike mDnibor circuit has recovered from the spike caused by the last turn OFF of the low/reverse clutch solenoid vi~ the internupt.

~his ne~hod or technique guarantees that the response of the spike mDm tor circuit is from the 2pprcpriate solenoid.

Referring tD Figurec 22A through 2ZD, th~ n2thcdol ~ for the ~olenoid ocntinuity test is ~wnO ~ the beginning, in bukble 2000, the nethodology advanoes tD di ~ 2002 and determines whether the sol~noid oDntinuity test is in progress ky lookin~ for ~ ~lag. If the ~olen~id cantinuity test is nDt in progresst ~he nethodology advances to diamDnd 2Q04 ~nd de ~ e ~hether it i~ time bo run ~he ~olenoid continuity test by l~oking for a flag ~or example.

If it i5 not time to run the ~olenoid oontLnuity test, the ~ethodology returns. If it is 1 320060 time to run the ~olenoid cDntinuity ~estl the methodology advances to di~mond 2006 and determines whether a shift is in prcgress by looking for a flag. If a shift is in progres~, ~he methodology returnsO If a ~hift is not in progress, the methodolog~ advances t~ diamond 2008 and determines whether the Ehift lever position (SLP) ~est, p~eviously descriked, is in progress by looking for a flag. Xf the ~ ~est is in progress, the ~ethDdology returns, If the SLP test :is not in pr ~ ess, the methcdology advances ~o diamond 2010 an~ detexmines wh~ther the pressure swntch ~P/5~ test, previously described, is in progress by lo~k ~ or a flag. If the P/SW test is in progress, the methodology returns. If the P/SW test is not ln progress, the methcdol~gy advanoe s to block 2012 and ~ets a "solenoid test in progress flag", "turn ~lenoid ON" flag, and a "low/reverse LR solenoid under test" flag and returns. The above methodolo~y is used because a solen3id o~ntLnulty test s ~ ence cannot occur while a shift, shift lever position test or pressure switch test is in progress.

At di ~ nd 2002, the transmission oontroller 3010 determines whether th~ ~olenoid cont~nuity test is in progress as preYiously described. If the &olenoid oontinuity test is Ln progress, the methodology advances to diam~nd 2014 and determines whether a SLP ~est i5 in prC9ress as prevL~sly ~e~cribed. If a shift lever position test in ~n prGgress, the ~ thodology a~ ances bo block 2016 and aborts the test sequen oe by clearing the "solenoid test in progress~ flag and advances t~ block 2018. At block 201B, the ~ransmission oontroller 3010 Obtp~*~ the r~cn~l inrgear ~olenDid ~ask 5~.e. logical g~a~es) to the ~olenoid-actuated valves and returns. If the SI~ test i~ not in progress at diamond 2014, the nethodology adv~nces ~o dia~ond 20~0 and ~, _ ,.

:

~ 320060 detennir~s w5~ether a shift is in ~rogress as E~reviously descri~ed.

If a shift is ~n progress, the n~t~ology advarloe5 tY:3 bl~k 2016 previausly described. me a~ metl~ology is used to i~nten~t the test 6equ~0e ~or a shift le~rer position test or a shi~t in progress.

If a ~ihift is ~t in progress, the meth~ology ~vances ~o dia~nd 2022 an~ aete~ni~s w~ether t31e law~reve~se ~ole~oid-actuated val~re 636 is under test ~ l~ king for a flag for example. In the test EequEnce, each ~olenoid-actuated val~e ~us~ be ~est~d ~eparately to ensure that the response is from the appropriate ~olenoid. I~erefore, if the low/reverse ~olenoid-actuated valve 636 is l~t under test, ~he ~ethodology advances to diam~nd 2024 and dbtermines whether it is time to turn ON the sDlenoid under test ~y looking for ~ fLag for example.

If it is time to tur~ CN ~he ~olenoid under test, ~he methDdology advances to block 20~6 and turns ON the 6Dlenoid under test, clears the Hturn solenoid CN" flag, and clears the "in partial lock-up ~PL) last locp" flag and returns. If it is not time to turn oN the solen3id under t~st, the methodology advances t~ diamond 2054 ~o ke described.

At diamond 2022, the transmissiG~ oDhtr311er 3010 determines whether the low/reverse ~olenoid-actuated valve 636 is under test by lDoking for a flag for ex~mple. If ~he low/reverse solenoid-actuated val~e 636 i~ under test, the method~1 ~ advan oe s bD di~mond 2028 and determlnes whet ~ p~ltial lock-up of the tD ~ ccrnerter 110 is in p ~ ss k~ lDDkiI!g for a flag~ If ~ lock-up is ~ot in progress, the nethodology ~dvances ~ diarDnd 2024 previously described. If partial locX-up i~ in prDgress, the nethod~logy ~hvan oe s bD diamDnd 2030 and determines whether it is time to turn CN the sDlen~id-actuated valve under test as previously descrlbed. If it is time ~o turn ON the A /s~ 1 320060 solenoid-actuated valve ~der test, the ireth~dology advarlces to di2~,0nd 2031 and determ~nes whether the met~dology i5 at the start of a partial lock-up period, pre~iously described (Figure 18B), ~y loo}cing for a flag for ~r~le.

If the m~th4dology is at the 6tart of a partial lock~ period, the methodolo~y re~rns.

If the meth~dology is rx:tt at the start of a ~ al lock-up period, the methc~ology advanoes to block 2032 and clears a Uspike ~Dm ~or edge detect~ flag/ a "spike response" flag, a ~turn oN ~olenoia" 1ag, and ~first partial lw k-up period h2s elapsed" flag. The methodoloyy t~en ~ nces to block 2033 and 6ets a ~in partial lock-up last loop" flag. The nethodology then retl~ns.

At diamond ~030, if it is not time to tNrn CN the solenoidactuated valve under test, ~he methodology advances bo diamond 2034 and determines whether partial lock~up of the torque oonverter 110 occurred in the last loop by lo~king ~or a flag. If partial lock-up did not occur in the last 1OGP, the methodology advances to block 2035 and sets the l-turn CN solen~id" flag. me methodology ~hen advanoes to block 2036 and cutputs a nonmal in-gear ~clenoid mask as previcusly ~escribed~ The methodology then returns.

If partial lock-up occurred in the last loop at diamDnd 2034, the ~ethodology advances to diamDnd 2037 and determ1nes whether a "spike response" previously de~cribed was received from the low/reverse interr~pt. If a ~pike response ~ not reoelved, the methodolo~y a ~ ces to diamDnd 2038 and determines w~ether the paItial lock-up peri~d h3s exp~red by lookiny for a flag for example. If the per~od has nct expired, ~he nethodology ~dvan~es t~ block 2036 previausly described. If the period has expired, the me~ ~ ology advances to diama~d 2040 and deternines whether the "flrst partial lock-up period A ~3 1 320060 has elaps~d flagl' has ~een 6et.

If the flag has nf~t ~en set, the methodology advances to block 2042 and sets the "first partial lock up period has elapsed" flag. me ~ettodol~ then a~v2mces 'LO bloc~s 2036 previc usly descri~d .

If the flag has l~ et, the ~e~ology advances to dian~ 048 t~ be descri~ erein.

A~ dia~nd 2037, if a spike respcnse was no~ reoeived, the ne ~ dology advan~s to block 2044 and points ~o the next solenoid-actuated valve to be besbed. ~he nethodology then advances to ~lock 2046 and sets the "turn solenoid ON" flag. The methodology hen advances tD block 047 and outputs the normal in-gear ~olenoid mask for ~Xe solenoid-actuated valves as previcusly descr ~ d. m e methodology then returns.

At dia~ond 2040, if the "firs~ partial lock-up peri.cd has elapsed flag" has been set, the methodology advances to diamond 2048 and determlnes whether a ~econd failure has occurred by looking for a flag for example. If a seoond failure h3s occurred, the methDdology advances to block 2050 and n~tifies the diagnostics, to be described, of ~he transmlssion oon~r~ller 3010 and advances ~o shut dçwn node. If a eec~nd failure has n~t occurred, ~he methodology ~vances to block 2052 and sets-a "first test failed" flag, ~ets a "~hiPt inhibit" flag, clears ~he ~colenoid ~est ~n progr~ss~ flag, and reschedules the next test oeqoence, in a pre~ebenmuned time period, i.e. 2 ~eoonds.

The ~thodology ~ a~vanoes to bloclc 2047 pre~riously descrilbed.

At dia~nd 20i4, the t~an~nissio~ ntroller 3010 detern~s whether the law/reverse solen~M~actuated valve 636 i8 urlder test as previalsly describe~.

If the law/reverse sol~id-ac~tuat~d valve 636 is under test, the nethodology advances to dian~nd 2056 and determines 1 320060 whether partial loc~c-up of the t~rque converter 110 occurred in the last loop ~y looking for a flag, If partial lock~p occurr~d in the last lo~p, the me~dology advarlces ~ block 2058 and ~ets the "tu~n ~oler~oid t~N" flag. I~e ~thodology af3vances ~o blwk 2059 ar~ autputs the no~nal in-gear Eolenoid mask as previalsly describ~d and ~turns~ If the 1awlreverse so1enoid-act~ted ~alve 636 is nc~t under test or partial 1Ock-up did nut oscur ~n ~he last 1~p, the nethcdology advances to diam~nd 2060 and determines whether the 1cw/reverse æolenoid~actuated valve 636 is CN as previously described. I~ the 1owtreverse ~o1enoid-actuated va1~e 636 is not CN, the meth~dology advances to block 2062 and turns oN the LR/LU recircu1ation driver to guarantee that the spike monitor circuit has recovered. me method~logy advances t~ b10ck 2064 and delays for a predetermined time period (T2).

The methodo10gy then advances to block 2068 to be described h2rein.

At diam~nd 2~60, if the 1cw/reverse so1enoid-actuated valve 636 i~ ON, thq me~hodology advances t~ diamDnd 2065 and determines whether the LR/LU in~errupt is enabled by 100king for a flag for example. If the LR/LU in~e ~ is enabled, the methodo10gy advanoes to block 2066 and disables the LR/LU in ~ . me methDdo1cg~ then ad~ances to bl~ck 2068. If the LRILU in ~ is not enab1ed, the nethodolo~y ~dvances to diamond 206B and c1ears the ~pike moni~or e~ge detect" ~lag. m e ne ~ ology then advanoes tD blosk ~070 ~nd turns OFF the ~1enDid-ac~ua~ed va1ve Un~Rr t~st. The me~hcdo10gy then ~dvanoes to diamDnd 2072 and determines whether the spike moni~Dr circuit has responded by look~g fDr a back EMF ~pike ~hen the ~o1enoid is turned OFF. If the spike m~nitor circuit has respo~ded, the n~thodolo9y advances to b10ck 2074 and sets A ~pike response~ f1ag. If the spike 1 320060 mDnitor circuit has not responded 9 the ~eth~d~losy advances ~o diam~nd 2076 and determines whether the predetermlned time period (T2) has expired by looking at a ~imer for ex3mple. If ~he predetermuned time period has not 9~xpired, the methodology loops back t~ diamDnd 2072 previously described. If the predetermined time period has expired, ~he methodology ~dvances tD block 2078 and clears the "sp.ike response" flag.

Fro~ blvcks 2074 and ~078, ~he ~ethodology ~dvanoe s t~ block 2080 and restores the LR/LU recirculation drivex and LR/LU interrupt to their original ~tate. The methcd~logy then advances to di~mDnd 2082 and determ mes whether the "spike response" fla~ has previously been ~et.

If the spike response flag has not been set, the methodology advances to diamond 2048 previously described. If the spike response flag has been set, the methodology advances to diamond 2084 and determines whether all fcur sDlenoid-actuat~d valves 630, 632, 634 and 636 have ~ tested by loo~ing to see if four spikes have been received. If all four solen~id-actuated valves have been tested, ~he methodology advances to ~1 ~ 2086. At block 2086, the txansmlssion oontroller 3010 cle~rs the "shift inhibit" flag, clears the "f;rst test failed" flag, olears the "~olenDid in prcgress" flag, and reschedules the next ~est sequenoe ~n a predetermined time period such as 10 secDnds. m e mr~hodology advanoe s t~ block X047 previcusly described.

The purpose of the thxottle angle ccmputation and failure detection ~ethod is bD oocpute ~he thr~ttle ~ngle and bD detect any failures of the ~hrottle pot and associated c;rCuitry as described in U.S.

Patent Nb. 4,~37~361, issued ~anuary 20, 1987, in the name of Killen, et. al. 1 320060 The throttle angle value is used in circle 814 and 854 of Figure 12 for the shift schedule method (Figure 141. This parameter m~st ~e checked and upon detecting a ~ailure, a default throttle value is uEed to en~lre ~atisfactory operation.

Referr ~ to Figures 23A and 23B, the mathodolcgy for the throttle angle oomputa~ion is shown. The méthodolcgy starts in k~ble 21~0 ,~nd then advances to di~mond 2102. At Idiam~nd 2102, ~he transmission controller 3010 determmes whether the r,~w throttle angle data ~ ~ ) fr3m the thrattle pot is greater than or equal to a predetermined value such as eight degrees ~See Figure 23C). If that criteria is not true, the methodology advances to block 2156 to be described. If that criteria is true, the methodology advances to diamond 2104 and determunes whether a shift is in progress by looking for a flag which is set when the shift begins. If a shi~t is m prcgress, the nethodology advances to block 2106 to be described herein.

If ~he shift is not in progress, the methodolog~ advances to diamond 2108 to detenmune whether the raw thr~ttle angle data ( ~ ) is less than or equal to the closed munimNm throttle value (THRo) of the throttle data minus a predetermlned val~e such as 1/2 (0.5) degrees (See ~igure 23C). If that criteria is true, the nethodology advances to block 2110 ~nd increm2n~s a throttle ocunter such as a timer in the nethod~logy. The methodology then advan~es to diamond 2112 t~ de ~ whether ~he minLmum thrvttle ca~ter is equal to a prede~ermined value 6uch as ~ix oounts. If that criteria ~5 ~0~ txue, the nethDdology advanoe s to diamond 2114 to be described herein. If ~hat criteria is true, the neth4dology advances tD block 2116 and _ 157 1 320060 decrements the clos~d ~ throttle ~ralue (THRo) of the raw throttle angle data (~RD~o me methodology advances to diamc~d 2118 to be d~scribed here~n.

At diar~nd 2108, if the raw ~ttle angle data is 9redt~ than the closed truni~ throttle value minus a E~ ~nin~ value such as 1/2 ~0.5) degrees, the net~dology a~vances to di2~ 2120.

At diamond 2120, the tran3rLission controller 3010 determ~nes whether the thr~ttle angle at update (THR) is greater than or e~ual to a predetermined value such as 1/2 aegree (See Figure 23C)~ If that criteria is not true, the methodolcgy advances to block 2106 to reset ~he ~ imum throttle ccunter. If that criteria is true, the methodology advances to diam~nd 2122 and determunes whether output ~p0ed No is less than a predetermined value such as 200 r.p.m. If the ~utput ~peed No is less than the predetermined value, ~he methodology advances to diamond 2124 and determm es whether eng me s ~ Ne is greater than a predetermined value such as 400 r.p.m. but less than a maximum predetermined value such as Ne ( ~ engine speed) plus a value ~uch as 50 r.p.m. If that criteria is true, the methodology advanoes tD block 2130 to be described. If No i5 not less ~han 200 r.p.m. or Ne ~s nDt greater than 400 r.p.m., or Ne is nDt less than Ne plus 50 r.p.m., the methodology advances to diamDnd 2126 and determines ~hether the P~NCDDL cGde from th2 oantact ~witch $ensors NSl and NS2 equals drive . I f the PRNODD~ ccde d~es no~ ægyal drive, ~he ~ethodoloyy advanoes to block 2106 previo~sly describedO Xf the PRNODDL code does egual drive, the nethodology sdvan oes ~o di~m~nd 2128 and determines whether engine speed Ne i5 less than turbine ~peed Nt nunus a pr~determined ~alue ~uch a.s 50 r.p.m. If tha~ criteri is not tYue, the nethodolcgy advanoes ~o block '~' '' ' .

1 320060 2106 previ~usly described.

If tha~ criteria is tnle, the rr,ethodolcg~ advances ~o block 2130 and ~ncrements the minin~ ~chrottle counter. ~e methodology advanoes to dian~nd 2132 and de~nines w~e~er the throttle ~ter equals a pre~ete~nir~ value ~ 5 28, If that criter~a i5 not true, t}~e methodol~y advances to ~i~ 2114 to be descr~bed herein.

If that criteria is true, the methodology ~vances to block 2134 and ~nts tlle clc~ minin~ thrc~ttle value of raw throttle angle data and aavan~s ~ r~ 211B.

At di~unond 2118, ~ ~cransmissi~n ocntroller 3010 determi~s w~e~er the closed mini~ throttle value is greater than or equal to a predetennined value E~ch ~s eight degrees, but less than or equal to a ma~i= predetermined ~Talue such as ~orty-eigh~ degrees.

If that criteria is true, the neth~dology advances to block 2106 pre.via~sly described. If that criteria i5 not true, the nethodology advances to block 2136 and limits the closed ninimum throttle value. The meth~dology then ~dvances to block 2106 previGusly descriked to reset ~he nunimum throttle oounter. The methcdology then advanoes to diamond 2114~ At diam~nd 21i4, the transmission contrvll~r 3010 determines whether the raw throktle angle data is greater than the close~ ~hroktle value. If that criberia is nDt true, the ~ethodology ~ ces tD block 2138 an~ ~et3 a new unlimited thrnktle angle egual to a predebenminrl value ~uch as zerD. The ~ethodology then advances bD block 2140 tD be described ~erein.

At diamond 2114, if the thrDttle data is grea~er thæn the closed minlmum throttle value, ~he methcdology advanoes to di~m~nd 2142 and detenmines whether ~he new unlimited ~hrottle angle is less than or , 1 320060 equal to a predete ~ value such as 100 degrees. If that criteria is n~t ~rue, the methodology adv~nces to block 2156. If that criteria is true, the nethodology advances t~ block 2140 and up~ates the throttle angle memDry lccation with THR~ just computed. The methodology then advances to diam~d 2144 (See Figure 23~) and determlnes ~hether the change in the ~ew unlimibed thr~ttle angle (,~THR) is be~ween a predetermined range such as -5 tD 5 degre~s. If ~hat cxi~eria is not true, the methodology advan oes to block 2146 and ~ets the change in ~hrottle angle within a predet ~ lim~t ~ch as ~/- 5 degrees. Ihe nethodolog~ then advances to block 2147 and ~ets the delta ~ throttle exce~ded limit flag ( ~ ) equal to cne. The meth~dology then advanc~s to block 2148 ~o ~e describa~ herein.

At diamond 2144, if the change in the new unlimited throttle angle is between thé predetermined ran~e, the methodology advances to klock 2145 and clears the delta throttle exoeeded limit flag (set equal to zer~). From block 2145, ~he methodology advances to block 2148 and calcula~es a new throttle angle ba ~ on the old throttle angle at te plus the change in throttle angle. The n~thodology aavances to diamond 2150 and determines whether the throttle error counter ~) is ~reater than a predetermin3d value ~uch as 192 ccunts. If this criteria ls true, the nethcdology advanoes tD bl~ck 2154 to be des~ribed.

If that criteria is not true, the ~ethDdology ~d~ances t~ block 2152 and sets ~ thlottle angle ~t update equal to the new ~hYottle angle beca~se normal ~ atlon of the ~ is occurring. m e n~thodol~gy advan oes bo diam~nd 2154 and determines whether the ~elta (~ ~hrottle exceeded limlt flag has previously been ~et. If that criteria is true, the nethodology then advances to block 2156 and incre~ents the throttle ~,,,, , : , .. :

. ' .

1 320060 err~r c3unter~ The methodology advances to diamDnd 2158 and deternuules whether the throttle errDr counter i~ greater than or equal ~o a predetermined value such as 255. If ~hat criteria is true, the n~*hcdDlogy advances to block 2160 and sets ~he thY~ttle err3r oounter t~ this predetermined value and repor~s a fallure to the diagnostics providing that engine speed Ne is greater than a predetermined value ~uch as 500 r.p.m. and the raw thr~tle ængle data ( ~ ) is less than a prede~ermined Yalue ~uch as 6 ~r greater than a predetermined value ~uch as 120.5. 1he nethodolog~r then returns. If the throttle error counter is less than the predetermine~ value, the ~ethodology adhrances to diamond 2162.

At diamond 2154, if the delta ~hrottle exceeded limlt flag has not previously been set, the nethodology advances to diamond 2164 ~o determlne whether thé throttle e~nror counter i5 equal to a predetermlned value such as zero. If the throttle error ~cunter equals zero, the ~ethodology returns. If the t~LnDttle errDr oounter dbe5 not equal zero, li~e. an error has sccurred), the methodology advan oe s to block 2166 and decrements the throttle error count~r. m e ~ethodology advances to diamond 2162 to determine whether the throttle error ocunter is greater than a predeteLmined value such as 192. If ~hat criteria is not true, the n~thodology re ~ s. If that cr~teria $8 ~ e, khe ~sthodology ~dv ~ s to block 2168 and sets the throttle angle data equal to a pred~termiDed value ~uch as 25 degrees ~default value) and inhibits lock-up operation ~f the bDrgue oD~erter, previously descr~bed, by 6etting a flag for example. Fr3m block 2168, the nethodology returns.

A ~ 1 320060 The present invention pxo~rides ~ully adaptive electronic transn~ssion controls. meSe adaptive controls perform ~heir fwlctions on real-time feedback ~ensor in~or~atio~, as is likewise perfor~ed b~ electronic antiskid ~rake oDntrols. Additlonally, the adaptive aontrols ~learn" ~ icular information b~ mDnibor~ng data su~h as ~he value for the fill time and apply rate of ~he applying element such as a clutch.

~his ~nformation is thRn ~tored in ~he ~emory of the trangmission controller 3010 for future use.

The upshift methodology uses the learned values for the fill ~ime and a~ply rate ~torque build-up rate) of the ON-coming or applymg element such as a clu~ch and for the release time of the OFF-goLng or releasing element such as a clutch. Learning apply element fill time permits timing the begLnnung-of-fill so as ~o compensate for orifice ~ize or clutch clearance variations, etc. ~ the apply ra~e and release time allow~ ccmpensation for varia~ions in orifioe ~ize, clutch capacity, ~olenoid response, ~nd t3rque requirement ~Lncluded to scme extend, di~ferent e~gines3. Alth~ugh l ~ is restricted t~ the ~OT m~e/ same te~perature cc~pen=tion occurs between ~ummer ana winter~ In the pcwer-ON upshift9 the n~thc~oloyy adjusts the apply and release ~vents ~ that release element 61ip occurs just before the apply ~lement b~gins ~o develop tcrque. Slip must ~e allowed b~ occur ao that the release and apply events can be identified by ~peed n7~urem ~ts.

In simplified t~xms, xelease time is meaÆed ~S ~he interval between initial~element-vent and beg m mng-of slips ~ill t~ne is frcm A`5. ~2 , .

.

1 320360 ~g~g~f-fill ~ end-of-h~alang; and apply rate is fram end-of-b~T~along to beginn~ng-of-sp~dchange.

Bump along is a term co~ned to dRscribe the ~ang-bang (fixed peroent ON~ time) control period that the methcdology uses to ~tain a E~mall anwnt of backward ~lip prior to the a~?lication of the a~ply el~t. ffle neth~dology delays either the beginnirlg of the release vent or the begi~ning of apply fill EO as to ac:hieve ~7prox~nately o~e ~ycle of h~r~along.

Ihis control n;ethodology reduces the release ele!lrent p~ess~re to the ~ that will still ~ort the input torque reaction, there~y es'cablishing the o~cin~n beginning c~itions fc>r the el~nt exch~nge.

me a~ply rate, then, is selected to ~evelop the torque ~eeded to begin speed change just as release element net-a~ply-p¢essure reaches zero.

Thus, the duty-c~cle-controlled apply rate matches the ballistic release rate of the OFF-goLng or releasing elenent. lhe purpose of the matched exchange, of course, is to minlmize fight between the elements. Pelease time and apply rate are both learned relati~e to the throttle angle.

Once the speed change beg ms, the apply element pressure is oontrolled to provide the dbsired turbine acceleration ~lphat. Ihis ~peed change oontrol i5 the heart of adaptive oDntrol ~ince it adapts to ~ ges in engine tDrque, friction coefficient, ebc. ~d prcvides oonsisbent oontrol.

lhe acoeptabil~ty of the pawer~ ~p~hift nalst be verified with the appr~riate engine oDntrol se~dology. ~lith carburetors, the engine ~ Ne dro~s qu~c~:ly ~nd may pull ~e turb~e 128 ~gh the spe2d çhan~e fasber t:han des~red. m:iS ~ result in both element~ going Dr ~taying off, whiic~, if the throttle is cpened, will result in a runaway bump as both elements raoe to ~pply. ~n order to prevent this, A 1 320060 methcdology was devised which uses both el~ments to cDntrol the speed change and gradually. acoomplish the hand-off. With ~he electronic eng me control, the ~ngine may vary between power-ON ,and pcwer-OFF. It nay even prcvide the correct p~ogrammed ra~e past the ~arget 6peed (Nt = Nj) withcut either element oDntrolling, thus defeating the above approach. MethDdology has been added which simply turns CN the apply ele~ent when the ~peed change is complete. Also, with this shift, it i5 desirable to release the CFF'-gomg element qui~kly t3 avoid excessive engine bra~ing torque.

The learned term for fill time is time rsmalnlng to nearly fill, Tf. Using Tf nuni~izes the possibilit~ of a too aggressive element application and allows the use of a duty cycle to ~of~en the initial application. Tf is ac ually calculated from the learned clutch fill v~lume, Vf. This tenm is stored in cublc inches SID that different flcw rates may be used to calculate T. This allcws the ~ame le ~ volume ~o be used for different shifts which ~ay have a different line pressure The prsgram or nethsdology oontinually tracks the fluid vvlume needed to apply each elan~nt.

me learned term for release time, above, is time to nearly releasej Tr~ whlch is calculated as K~ * T6 ~ .0630 TB is a table value for the r~nu~a} observed relea~e time. ~ is the learned nultiplier for that individual Each~ge. S moe T~ ~ ies with THR ~i.e. engine tDrque), a nNItiplier provides the best data ~atch ~or the variables being acconnoa~ted. m e .063 ~econd~, tDgether wlth the Tf differential, provides a nargin ~o ensure that fight is n~nlmized.

.

A 1 320060 For g~od kicXdown feel, it is essential that the shi:Et occur ~ckly.

Ihe use of acc~nulators ~elays the olutch or el~nent release ~o every effort is made to ~ze ~he acclmulat.or fill/vent tim~s.

The met~logy bDns ~F the release el~ent alt th~e ~art of the 6hift arxl does not a~ply it again until tur~ine acoeleration exce~s a desired levei ~y a small al[~ nt. P, du1:y cycle (DC) may t}~ be initialized a~ updated tD provide proportional control ~or the ~peed change. m e prinEu~! element DC acoeleration or prop3r*ional o~ntrDl (DCalpha~ i.e.

variable peroent CN or OFF time) ~ni~ializati~n level is calculated for Ne and Nt, the torque converter characteli~tics, and the element capacity; each DCalpha update is kased on an anticipated turbine acceleration (alphat) error.

As lllustrated in Figure 24~, a shift tape of the transmission characteristics for a thir~ to first (3-1) kickdown shift i~ generally shown at 2200. Curve 2202 represents throttle an~le. As thrvttle angle increases, enyine speed Ne ~ in curve 2204 also increases.

Simultane~usly, ~he release element is released as ~hcwn ~ curve 2206 to ~ its torque capaeity~ In o~her w~rds, for a third to fLxst ~3-l~ gear kickdown shift, ~he averdrive clutch 304 is released at the start of the shift. As dhown by cuxve 2208, the fluid pressure of the oierdrive clutch 304 ~ents down. When the borqu~ capaci~y of the overdrive clutch 304 is low enough (at the fill ~Dlume) ~ the ~urbine l28 will breakaway snd a speed ~hange w~ tart as indicated by nNmeral 2210.

me present invention l~mits the rate at which the turbine 128 accelexates. This i5 acca~plished by calculatiny and oowparing an ,4 ` ~GS ~ 320060 instantaneous blrb~e acceleration ~alphat) hc~ n curve 2212 against a des~red acceleratlon ~alphade5ire,d or ~) level shown in cun~e ~214.

(~ce the spe~d change begins at 2210, ~he oontroller 3010 at~ts to mat~h alphat appro~tely eq~al w~th alphade5~ t P desiredl ~che rl~lea5~ el~rE~t is re~plied to control the rate at whic31 the turb~ne 128 aocelerates. me release element is reap~lied under ds~ ycle~ acceleration or proportional oontrol I~Calpha) to provide a controlled slcpe of ~peed change on the turbine 128.

As illustrated in Figure 24A, curve 2212 of alphat crosses c~rve 2214 of alphadeslred at point ~216. At point 2216, the overdrive clutch 304 is reapplied by duty cyclmg the solenoid-actuate~ valve 632 as shown by part 2218 of ~urve 2206.

Simultaneousl~ with speed change, the kickdcwn me~ ~ ology adaptively applies the applying element (low/re~erse clutch 310) as shown by curve 2220 based on the rem.inlng turbine ~peed change which has to occ~r. As turbine speed Nt in~eases in ~ e 2222, ~he methcdology c~mpares ~he actual turbine ~peed ~t t~ a target speed N (for a 3-1 ~hift, f~st gear ratio of first gear Nj). Eecause the change is made at a kncwn rate ~because oDntrolling release element a~ ~hat ~ate), the methDdology ca~ predict how m~ch time ~ to fill the applying element. T~e methodology attempts to get ~he applying element filled after achieving the target qp~d Nj for a predetermined time period such as 120 ~s, which region 2224 of curve 2214 is 4al~ed "~Dld-speed" ~hen ~t exoeeds the target ~peed Nj at p~int 2~26, i.e. ~nters the hold speed ~egion 2224, alphadesired is lowered a~a m to a negati~e G6 1 320060 ~alue at poLnt 2228 ~n curve 2214 ~ that ~he release el~ment will prevent further increases in Nt. ~ is again used for improved response before reentering DCalpha ccntrol. rme release ele~ent hold~speed oontinues until the apply element is filled, begms to d~velcp tDrque, and pulls Nt dcwn ~o the taux~et level, Nj. The methodology then turns OFF the release element when Nt equals N~.

To reduce the energy (and pnovide a faster ~hiftl, 1~ is us2d to limit the hold-speed period bD the minimum that will accomplish the ~apply" identification and imprc~e "shift feel". Tb kn~w whether to turn CN the ~ply element (i.e. cause ~he ~olenoid bo ~pply1, ~he nethodology stzrts which a "h~ld-speed" time allc~anoe and adds to ~hat a time- ~ plete-speed ~ ge, which is calculated by ~Nj Nt)/alphadeSired. This ~ime available (frcm now until the element should apply)", is clbntinuously c~mpared ~o the "time ~ ed ~elenent volume divided by fill rate)" and the solenoid-actuated valve is turned ON or OFF ac requlred. Since the ~ethodology tracks element volume during solenoid OFP and CN times, there is little error that can develcp if alphat i~ lower ~han alpha~eSired. ~hen alphat i8 low and the actual Nt beccmes 1 ~ than projec*ed, the methodology si~ply burns OFF the element and waits for Nt bo ca~ch up ~o She projected level. If ~Phat ~s higher ~han alphade5ired~ ~he oontrols have no means to catch up, but ~in oe the initial release element ~ent time and the alphadeSired ~feather" oontrol cause ~lpha~ to ~e lower than alPhade5ired there is nv oplortullty f~r significant afall-behind" exror ~o develop.

Ib achieve 120ms. of hDld-Gp0sd, ~he p¢esent ~nventi~n utilizes "adap~ive~ kickdown ~tart lugic whlch is based ~n a ~learned" fill A ~6-~ 1 320060 vol~ne of the apply~ng el~rent.

The equation for tl~e lcick~c~wn start logic nay be defined`as foll~s:

N > Nj - S, where 5 = alPhadesir~d tf P S is the kickd~ start value ~r.p.m. of turbine ~n~) ~ic~ equals f ~ P desired As ill-lstrated in ~ re 24A c~ve 2232 repre~ents t}~e kickda~ et~t value S~ tf is the ti~Te r~eded to fill the applying elenent to ~che level that will prwide t~e ccrrect 2~mount of buT~ aloq~g ti~ or kicX ~ hold-spe~d time (:i.e. 12~ . It is oontinuouslv updated and includes oompensation for any expec~d duty cycle use during the remalning fill time~ t~ is calculated as follows:

t~ = lVf - V3 - ,12 Kf Limit: tf 2 0 M ' Qf Kf = DC COMFEN5ATION FACTOR: Corrects for the reduced fill rate when DC use is expected. Kf = 1 for kickdown shift Vf - fill vDlume of the applyinq element Qf = flo~ rate of the apply mg element ~ M = oorrection factor for line pressure : V = instantaneous element w lume Sinoe Mj is the ratio ~ltiplied by Ni, Nt ~an be oontrolled at ~ desired slope by the releas~ element ~o that Nt goes to Nj dur ~ tf~ having 12~ms of hDld-~peed tD oompletely fill the apply ~lement. tf is continN~usly ~alculated to give the kickdcwn ~art value S. Whenever N.~ crosses S (l.e.

Nt ~ Ni - S~, the ~pply element is turned ~N which reduoes S beeause ~he apply element is filling. If ~j - S ~ N~ ~i.e.

Nt falls kelow S), the apply element is turned OFF. Thls results in an ~ irregular or variable DC on the apply element.

In other w~rds, once the : `:

A ~ , ,,, 1 320060 kickdcwn st~ value S is calculated, ~e transTIissic>n controller 3010 cc~es Nt to S.

If Nt is greater ~han Nj ~us S, the n~thodology ~nstructs the transmission o~ntroller 3010 t~ ;N the ~lying eler~nt to reduce S to zer~ enoe, the xrethodology dri~?es S to equal zero just a~ Nt ~sses or equals Nj at point 2226.

Ihis allcws 120ms.

shift qualit~. ~ ise, the shift ~uality w ~:Ld be ~Ijerky~ if the apply element were ~pplied just as Nt crossed Nj.

~ . _ Referring to Figure 24A, until alphat crosses alphadesired for the first time at point 2216, the release alement is held oompletely OFF so that any initial speed change is n~t delayed. Once the sp~ed chan~e is complete at poin~ 2228, it is desired not to overshovt alphade5ired.

Therefore, a duty cycle is calculated that will hold or maintain alphadeSired. me ~urbine torgue calculaticn is used to calculate the Lnitial x~r oent ON ~ , irdicated ~t 2216, for the dhty cy~le ~DC~ of the relea~e element.

The initial percent ~N time of the release element for either a ~hift or garage shift ~s calcula~d as follows:

Initial ~60N = ~ + iT~ - It * alphade5~red) /Kt ~, DCo ~ Zero 'cox~lue ~C estimate It ~ F.qu~alent burbine ~ner1:ia ~t ~ Gain, I)C tc~ turbine ~rque ~T~ ~ In th~ quation, DCo is t}~e dutv c:ycle ~ded ~o ma~ntain fill pres ~ e c~n the release el~rent, which is predetermir~ ~ralue. It x ~desired is the n~t torque tD ~aintain desired acceleration which is ; .

:

1 320060 also a pre~etermuned value. Xt is the gain from the ~C to the turbine torque which is a predetermined value. DCo, It and Kt vary for the shift involved, i.e. fcurth to ~hird gear~ fourth to second gear, etc.

Ihe equation ~Dr turbine borque (Tt) is defined bel~:

t ~XlNe K2Nt~Ne if Nt iS less than K3N 41 e t~ e t ~rea or egual to K3~e As illustrated ln Figure 24B, the equation for ~he burbine torque (T~) is derived by the graph ~f ~urbine t~rque Tt di~ ded by ~ ine ~ Ne ~quared (which is ~he ~ame as ~mpeller speed squared) versus speed ratio of turb me speed N~ divided by engine speed Ne which is curve 2280. For turbine ~peed Nt less than a predetermined constant K3 tines engine ~peed Ne the equation for turbin2 torque Tt is indicated by ~ 2282 of cNrve 2280. For turbine speed Nt equal to or greater than K2 multiplied ~y Ne, the equation for turbine torque Tt is indicate~ by: part 2284 of curve 2280.

: :~igure 24B is based on ~he characteris~cs of a particular m~del of ~ e oonverter. This c~n be used at any time that the lockup clutch i~ disengaged t~ ;calculate an i~put borgue to the transmission 100. ~or:a particular elemen~ Lnvolved tk~oKing what its capacity is), the transmission ccntrDller 3010 can calculate the DC ne oessary to provide the ~ppropriate level of element bDrque (i. e . initial DC~ .

: ~A~ter the initial Eercent GN ~ime for the DC, the DC adaptively aajusts bo maintain ~lPhadesired :~ :

1 320060 The only learned quan~ ed ~r ma}ci~ ~nshifts is the fill tine of the a~ply~ng el~nt or clutch.

As prev;ia~sly nEntioned, the elenent vollDnes are acbually le~d and stored.

Fill times are calculated by usir~ the learn~d element vclurre arN~ priate fl~ rate fram a lo~k-u~ table and graph of fl~w rate characteristics for each elenent for ex ~ ple. Ihf~ learned volu ~ information for a given element is ~hared be~we~n dif~erent ~hifts, ~oth upshifts and dGwn~hifts. m e flow rate used acoounts ~or the individual hydraulic flow rates and ca~pensates for line pres~ure differences which exist between different ~hifts ~ . for element fill ~ates, not ~ent rates~.

~ i~h a ooastdown ~hlft, howeYer, the pump 200 will nDt, under all conditions, have the capacity to maintain the regulated line pressure. Tb ~smpen~ate for the result m g low line pressure, a learned fill rate is used for coastdcwn shifts only. This fill rate is set at .the regulated line pressure level with each start-up (because wqth cold luid, the pump 200 will ma m tain the regulated press~re) and it will learn any reduction in ~he fill rate with each ~ubsequent ~hi~t.

Le~rning filI ~ with ~own~hifts is s~milar to upshifts in ~hat the beginning oE apply (end of fill time for ~he apply element) is identifi ~ by the ~ of a 'h~ld- ~ " control naintained by th2 releaso ~lement in Fx~#r-CN shl~s. Implicit with this ~s ~he necessity of ~ tablishing ~ome ~h~ld-speed" cDntrol rather than timing an exact application bD ~e described herein. It is alsD necessary to halldl OFF and ~ i:illeS oc~rrectly 6~1oe th2 fill e~$1~ iS ~ a m n~ s ~N;

the flcw rates, nenticned above, provide this capability.

.

A 1 320060 qhe learn logic ~or ki.ckdown shifts tracts the instantan~ous v~lume of the apply element and ccmpares that value wnth the current fill volume such that the apply el~ment is aompletely fill~d at ~he end of the hold-speed reglon.

As illustrated ~n ~i~ure 24C, cNrve 2250 represents a desired acceleration (~*3 of the tur~ine 128. Cur~e 2252 represents turbine ~peed Nt a~d curve 2254 represents a target speed (Nj ) of the turbine 1280 Curve 2256 represents an in~tan~aneous fill vDlume (VI) of the apply element and curve 2258 represents the current fill volume ~Vf) of ~he apply element. As Nt apprDaches Nj, Nt cames within a predetermined ran~e 2260 of Nj. At point 2263 wh~n Nt reaches the lower limlt of the predetexmined range 2260, the learned volume (VL) sf the 3pply element is latched at that volume of the instankaneous fill v~lume (VI). Once Nt leaves the upper limut of the predetermined range 2260 at poLnt 2264, the learned ~olume ag~un tracks the instantaneous fill v~lume until Nt ~nters the predeterm m ed region 2260 at point 2266. At pDLnt 2266, the learned volume of the apply element i~ la~ched at that value of the mstantaneDus fill vDlume. At ~he end of ~he shift (EOS), the transmission ~ontroller 3010 takes a step out of current fill volume (Vf) which is a peroentage of the difference be~ Vf and VL at point 22~6.

Ihe ~ill vDlume (Vf) of the apply element is also "learned" and adaptively adjus*ed based on bunp-alang [i.e. element ~lip~. As illustrated in Fiyure 24D, a ~hift tape of ~he transmission characteristi~s is ~hcwn for ~ ~irst bo seoond ~1~2) up~hift. Curve 2270 represents the stored or previously learnad current fill vDlume ~V) of the ~pply elem~nt. Curve 2272 represents the ~nstantaneous , _ A `~"` 1 320060 v~lume (VI3 Df the ~pply element ~i.e. tw~/faur shift clutch 308).

Curve 2274 represent~ ~ learned volune (VL).

While a shi~t is in pr~gress, ~he learned v~lume ~VL) is ~et equal to the irlstant~ fill v~l~me (VI) w~ever 5t~ ~ 0) or (tf ~ O ar~d Nf ~ Nj ~ 30)~ A~; ~n in Figure 24D, VL tra~ts VI until point 2274 b~cause tf was greatOE than 0. ~t po mt 2276~ t equals zer~ and VL stops traC ~ V and i~s ~et equal to the value of VI at point 2276.

~hen tf = O, the ~sply el~rent is filling ln the hs~ld- ~ r~ion. If Nt is greater than Ni plus a predet ~ value æuch as 30 (i.e. ælip occurs), called bump-along, VL is updated to the ~alue of VI at po:~t 2278. ~t point 2278, VL again txacks VI until Nt is nDt greater than Ni plus ~he predetermined value at point 2280. ~t point 2280, VL i5 set equal to the value of VI and stops ~racking. Thi5 n~hod~logy is repeated whenever N~ is greater than Ni plus the predetermined value.

At the end of the shift, the transmission controller 3010 compares VL to Vf. If VL is greater than Vf, as ~hown in Figure 24D, Vf is adjusted or increased a peroe ntage of ~ f~erence between VL and Vf.

If VL ~quals Vf, no adjusbment is made. Otherwise, if VL is less ~han Vf, Vf is decreased.

~ e~rring to Figure 24E, 3 flow chart of the learn m~thcdology is ~ . At th~ ~tart of the ~ethodology in bubble 2290~ ~he ~et~xx3Ology advances bD block 2292. ~t block 2292, the methodology intercepts or determines the time to bon}-~1ong, time to ~peed change, and instant3necus vol~me dhring bump-alcng of ~he element. The ~ethodolo~y ~hen ~dvances to diamDnd 2294 and determines whether the ~hift has ~een oomple~ed. If no, the methodology loops ~ack to block 2292. If the shift has been oc~pleted, the nethodology ~dvanoes to A . ~ 1 320060 block 2296 and learns the fill vol~ne if the co~itions are valid, learns Rs (rele~se 'cilrE nultiplier), if oor~diti~ns axe valid and learns DCt (adjus~t) if o!~nditicns are ~alld.

Ern bloc3c 2186, the meth~dology ret~rns.

~ e ~ift s~edule (b~le 810 of ~igure :L2) h as logic which ~s engine ~eed N~ and t~rget E;pe~d Nj ~nd tlel~ys any oc~astdown ~hift that wauld go ~r~n pw~r~N to p~er~ F s~oe these s~Lifts inv~lve cross~ng dri~7etrain ~aclclash and may result in a ~clunk". me 3-1 and 2-1 shif~s are power-CN 03astdcwns (a 3-2 pcwer-ON coastdown 8hift is not made); the 4-3 is typically a pcwer-CFF shift lit may be power-CN if the shift is inhibited by the below ~Ikacklash~ logic).

As illu~trated $n Figure 24F, a graph of ~peed (r.p.m.) versus time is shown at 2300 for an adaF~ive fourth to third ~4-3) gear ooastdown shift. Curve 2302 represents the output speed No or tArget ~ Nj for third gear.

Curve 2302 represents the engine speed Ne.

~ e 2306 represents turbine speed Nt~ If a shift is sche~ult~d by the transmission controll ~ 3010 when N~ ~s Iess than Nj, the ~tart of the 4-3 ~hift will ~CCNr at p~int 2308.

~s the ~hi~t occurs, Nt will ~ncrease ~nd cross cver Ne~ as indicated by polnt 2310, from positive to neyative bDEgue, resulting in a "clunk" of drive~raul.

Ihe present in~ention pxovides the ~feature of delaying or inhdbiting the ~tart of the shif~ by ~he transmission oDn~r2ller 3010 until Ne is at least equal tD or greater than Nj/ ss ~ndicated by po m t 2312. This i~ accomplished by delaying ~he actuatian and/or deactuation /~ A 1 320060 (i.e. turn~ (~N and/or C~1 3 of the a~r~priate solenoid-actuated valves.

By inhibitir~g ~he shift, Nt will ~ less than Ne during the ent ire shift, resulting in ~nly pc~sitiYe ~orque and preventing any ~clunk" of the drivetrain.

As illustrated in Fig~lre 24G, a phase plane gra~h of turb~ne acoeleration (alphat) ~ersus ~rbine ~I Nt mirlus target Nj (f~rst g~F~r) for a secorx~ to first (2-1) gear coas ~ n sh:ift is sho ~ at 2320.

The solid line curve 2322 represents the d~sirEd aoceleration (alphadeSired vr ~*) which is a function ~f slip. Alphadesired g a negative value in the hold-speed region ~f the downshift.

The present inven~ion prcvide5 nethodology for oontrolling alphat at point 2324 ~hich is ~pproximately 25 r.p.m. This is acoomplished by using proportional cDntrol ~DCalpha or DC~). DCalpha is used during coastdown ~hifts because real tight control hold-speed i~ needed and is lacking otherwise~ Referring to Figure 24G, curve 2326 represents the vent release element (VRE~ ~hich is identified dur m g a coasbdown ~hift by alphadesLred minus a pred te ~ value such as 1000. VFE îs used where the applying element may be ON, or it is desired to vent the release element faster than n~rmal DCalpha w~uld (ra~her than backing of~ th~ release element's duty cycle by DCalpha, ~hlch w~uld eventually release the element). If actual alphat is ~elcw VRE curv~ 2326, as indica~ed by the arrcw, the release element is turned OFF.

This would result ~n actual al~?hat a:~oing ~ k above the VRE ~unre 2326 if the ~ply elerZ~ was ~t ON.

Onoe alphat was }~ov~ the VRE clLrve 2326, the n~thodology wvuld instruct the transnissi~ oontroller 3010 to b~n the S , ; .

1 320060 release elarent ON.

If the ~F~>ly elen~nt was t~N, alphat wc~uld not CG~ back aboive the ~IRE curve 2326.

Refe~ to Figure 24G~ cur~ 232~ represents ~ld the apply pressure (H~P). ~P is used ~ere t~re is too mlch r~ative alp~at.

In c~her w~rds, HAP is used where alptlat is less than a E~redete~ed value ~uch as -1700. H~P pa~events 'che ~ly element frc~n applying hard quickly by ~ cycling the a ~ ly elesrent to ~ ntain it at a predeter~uned pressure. This prev~nts ~he apply ele~ent from buildin~ up torque any faster in the hold-speed region, causing alphat tD come back above the HAP curve 2328.

As lllustrated in Figure 24H, a plot of actual ~urb me ~oceleration ~alphat) represented by curve 2330 and ~esired acceleration (alphadeSired or ~ j xepre~ented by curve 2332 is shown for a seccnd to first ~2-1) gear ooastdown shit. A logic curve 2234 represents VRÆ and logic curve 2236 represents HAP. A plot of turbine speed Nt ~epresented ~y curve 2338, target ~peed Nj represented by curve 2340j and output ~peed No represented by curve 2342 is shown frcm khe start bo the end of ~he second tD ~ixst ~ear coasbdçwn shift. Iogic curves 2344 and 2346 show the element logic ~or the release element (twD/four shift clutch 308) and the ~pply element (iow/reverse clutch 310;, respect~vely.

Referring tD ~igure 24H, the release element is CN until the 6tart of ~hift at pDint 2348. At that time, the nethod~logy turns the release element OFF.

Simultaneously~ the apply element w~ich has been ~ialsly ~ is maintained 0~.

Al~, c~ne 2338 of Nt is less than cwtve 2390 vf N..

After the ~tart of Shift at pc~n 234B, alphat ~s to rise or increase. ~ alphat ~osses alPhade5~ed at point A ~wait ~til A '~ 1 3200~0 slip), the release element is t~ ON or reapplied using ~uty cycle bang-~g IDCbb~. DC~ is used until alphat aga~n crosses alphadeSlred at po~nt B.

Also, Nt crosses Nj at po~nt B.

At po~nt E3, the release K~bb ~ P~~~ a~ntrol IDC 1 ha or DC~ P~eferr~ to Figure 24H, the a~ply elenent ~xlres o~ before point B to be ready at the right ~ime into hold~ d region (starts at point C)~ ~t po mt C, alphade5ired en'cers the l~ld-speed region. m e release el~ment against ~witches to ~ while the apply el~ment i5 under DC If alphat goes too far below alphade5ired, previously described. Alternatively, if alphat is ~elow the ~P value, H~P will be ~pplied as previously described. Thus, Nt is ~a~ched to N~ and alphat is ~atched to alpha~e5ired at the end of the shift by using b' DCalpha' VRE and/or HAP.

~ eferring to Figure 24I, the nethodology for the release element used during a ooastdown or kickdGwn shi~t is generally shcwn at 2400.

-The nathodology enters ~hrcugh bubble 2402 and advances to diamDnd 2404.

At diamond 2404, the methodology dete~m~nes whether the conditions are present indic2t m g ~hat the apply element is applyLng. In other wOrd5, are oonditions present for VRE (i.e. IHR ~ 5 and alphat ~ alphade5ired - 1000~. If that criteria is true, ~he methcdology advances tD block 2406 and vents the release element (aç~Dl~es V~E). qhe met~odology then returns. If that criteria is not true, the methodolc~y advances to ~lock 2408 ~ establi~s ~he phas~ of the shift: phase 1 equals the 6~t; pha5e 2 equals the feather start 5re~ction in desired ~coeleratia~ nd phase 3 ~qual~ target i~peed ~hold-~peed).

Illis is ~c~lished ~ performir~ ~;peed calculations and ~ett~ng a flag for each pl~se of the ~hift. me methodol~gy then ad~ances bD block 2410 .

,. .

, 1 320060 and performs a pre-DCalpha flag check bv sett~ng the flag with slip and alphat is HI or the release element i5 bel~w fill volume, and clearing the flag with a change in ~he phase of the shit~ Ih~ methodology then advances tD bl~ck 2412 and performs a duty ~yclealpha flag check. The nethodolo~y zets the DCalpha flag when the pre DCalph~ g set and alpha is LoW (i.e. alphat, high-to-low crossover) and it cleared with the change in phase of the shift. The meth~dology then advances to diamDnd 2414 and de~ermines whether the DCalpha flag has been ~et- If the flag has been set, the me~hodolcg~y advances to block 2416 and uses DC 1 ha control or ~Calpha on release sl~ment. DCalpha ccntr the total period is fixed and the CN and OFF time is calculat~d ~nd adjusted (i.e. variable ON and OFF time), me methodology then returns.

If the flag has not ~een set, the methodology advances to diamond 2418 and determ mes whether alphat is Hl. If that criteria is true, the methodology ~dvances to block 2418 and performs ~ ang bang control or ~ b on the release element and returns. ~ b c~ntrol i5 when the tota~ period is fixed and the CN ~nd OFF tine is fixed (e.g. at 60% aN). If ~hat criteria is n3t txue, the methodology advances ~ block 2420 and vents the release element and returns.

Referring to Figure 24J, ~he methcdology for the apply element is generally sh4wn at 2450 for a cxx~stdawn or kio~down shift. The methcdol~gy enters thrcogh bubble 2452 and a~vances ~o diam~nd 2454. At di2mDnd 2454, the ~ethodology determines whe~her ~ phase of the ~hift i ~ ~o one or tWD and N~ is less than Nj, If any of this criteria is true, ~h~ ~ethDdology aavances to diamDnd 2456 and determines ~hether Nt is above the speed assDciated with the correct apply timing (i.e.

will element be late). In o~her ~ords, the methodoloqy de~ermunes A ~ 1 320060 whether N~ i5 gre~ter ~han S ~kickdown ~tart valve previGuslv described). If that ~riteria is true, the me~hcdoloc~y advances tD block 2458 and applies the apply element and xeturns. If that criteria is not true, the nethDdoloyy a~van oe s to block 2460 and ~ents ~he apply element snd xeturns.

At diamond 2454, if ~ny ~f that criteria is not true, the methodology advances ~o diamond 2462 and deb~rmines whether the ~pply elment will apply within 120 ns if run at a predeter ~ duty cycle by looking at the fill ~olume ~Vf)~ If ~hat criteria is not true, the methcdology advances to block 2464 and applies the apply lement and returns. If that criteria is true, the methodology advanoe s to diamDnd 2466 and determlnes whether v~hicle speed or No is greater than a predeterm m ed speed such as 8 mph and less *han 300 r.p.m. of run away for the tuxbine 128. If that criteria is true, the methodology advances to block 2468 and applies the apply element and returns. If that criteria is not true, the methodology advances to diamond 2468 and determlnes whether conditions are present lndicating apply element shculd "hold" ~for a ooasbdown, alphat very negati~). In other w~rds, the methDdology determdnes whether the oonditions are present ~o apply HAP ~i.e. THR ~ 5 and ~t <-1700). If that criteria is true, ~ ~e~hodology ~hances bo block 2470 ~nd perfonms ~ on the ~pply element and returns. If that criteria is not true~ ~he methodology d ces to block 2472 and performs DCalpha2 ~coeleratiDn oonkrol) ~n the apply element and returns.

Another feature of the present invention used dur~ng a ooasbdown shift is a ~ethcdology called '~ait-for-slip)l. ~t the beginning of the coastdcwn 6hift, the release element is ~ented. Whenever slip is A . ~ .

.

:

1 320060 present (i.e. N~ ~ Nj) and VI ~ Vf for the release element and V < Vf for ~he apply element, and THR 2 5 or 2-1 or 3-2 or 3-1 shift is occurring, the nethsdology oontrols the release el~ment at a low limit per oent CN for its DCalpha~ The methDd~logy attempts to keep the release ele~ent from further venting be~ause the release element may ke needed tD apply again. Once, the abcve conditicns are no longer present, the release element oontinues to vent.

t~ AS illustrated in Figures 5A-L, the hydraulic system 600 includes accum~lators 639,640, 642, 644 for ~he cl~tch as~emblies 302,304, 308 and 310, respectively. The accumulators prcvide ~chanlcal c~shion so ~hat e ~ e changes in pressure are not realized as the ~olenoid-actua~ed valves are turned GN or OOEF. These aocumulators help reduce the axial length of the transmission 100 and give more flexibility to the hydraulic system. This is advantageous cver prior systems which used large cushion springs built in the clutch packs, increasLng the axial length of the transmission.

As illu~strated in Figure 24K, a cNIve 2480 of pre.~sure versus time for applying and venting (reieasing) of an element or clutch is ~h~wn. qhe accum~lator oontrDl ~one, represented by part 2482 of the curve 2480, plovides oompliance or ~oftness SD that it takes time to ~e~elqp a large change in pressure. C~herwise, if n~ accNm~lator was used, the slope of this part of the curve w~uld be 6teeper and a small change in ~N time w~uld result in a large change in pressure, making ~rque capacity and shift quality umbear2ble.

' A ~ ~a ... .

:

~ 320060 In okher words, control i5 performed m the accumulator con~rol zone to prevent large excursions in ~he output torque (To~ which w~uld create jerkiness or harshness in ~hi~t qual'ty. For example, turning the release element CN during slip or bump-a-long without an acc~mulator would produoe a steeper ~iope m the output tDrqUe, r2sulting in 3n inabilit~ bo limit slip without harsh oontrol.

The learned ~erm for apply rate i~ torque phase duty cycle, DCt.

The purpose of the ~orque phase duty ~ycle is ~o m~ke the hand-off smooth between the release el~m~nt letting go of torque and the apply element taking c~er torque. Thls i~ acocrplished by timing ~e apply element to ha~e sufficient capacit~ to start the speed change just as the release elenEnt capacity reaches zero. In other words, the ~ethcdology attempts to build-up apply element torque capaci~y to ma~ch torque fall-off ~apaci~ of the nelea~e element.

me torque phase duty cycle is ~ vely adjusted to match ~rque build-up of the apply element to ~orque fall-off of the release element acoording bD the following equation:

I04 with N < N.-B & T~R > 10 DCt ~ DCt + DCta~delta+lo~ t t 0~ with Nt 2 Nj- B or qHR S10 Where: IER - thro~tle angle B c slip ~40 r.p.m.) The above egu~ti~n is based on a ~Able value, DC~t or nominal DCt ~alue~ (fLxsa ~ CN time) based on thsottle angler plus a learned adjustment, ~Cta. Sinc:e the intent is to ~ave the ~peed change begm as ~e release el~ment net-apply-pressure reaches zero, the n~thodology A ~/ . ~ , .

.

1 320060 selects a DCt which will achieve ~he s~ar~ of speed change at an interval after the '5tart of venting of the release clutch/ This interval is equal to the learned time . o release at zero degrees throttle angle plus an allo~ance for one b~ a-long cycle. Ihe ~ransmission contr~ller 3010 does this by achieving and maintaining tf egyal to zero until slip occurs, then DC~ is allowed to proceed~ Referr ~ to ~igure 24D, curve 2500 repre~nts th2 logic state of the relea~e element. Curve 2502 represents slip in the transn~ssi~n 100. ~t point 2504 on curve 2500, the release ele~ent is turned OFF or starts ~o vent. The interval between the start of vent at point 2504 until the start of ~peed ~hange, which is point 2506 on curve 2502, is known as t* which is a predetermined value different for each upshift.

Curve ~508 represents the logic ~tate of the apply elenent. At point 2510 on curve 2508, the apply element is initially turned OFF or vented.

At po mt 2510, tf is equal tD zero and DCt starts for the apply element.

me slope of DCt is tailo i so that it matches ~he build-up in apply element torque capacity. For throttle angles greater than 10, the appl~ element is giv~n a 10% ~oost ~n its du~y cycle SD that the actual turbine acceleration (alphat or ~t) ~ill achieve the desired ~cceleration ~alPhades ~ or ~*).

As illustrabed in figure 24D, curve 2512 represents the desLred aoceleration (alphade5ired) and curve 2514 represents the actual ~urbine ~c oeleration ~lphat). ~At point 2506 on ~Nrve 2502, the ~peed change begins. Alpha~ is greater than alphadesired. Therefore, DC~a ad~s 10~ koost in GN time t~ DCt for the aF~Dly element ~uch that alphat will be m~nentarily equal lPhadesired at or near the end of ~ , /~ 1 32006~ As shcwn and described above, DCta is the le3Lned adjusbmen~ to DCt. DCta is used so that the start of the s ~ change from the initial rele~se occurs wqthin a predete ~ ed time period called time to ~tart speed change (tn). miS time is when it is desired to have the ~peed change begin because the release ele~ent presÆe will have decayed down to the fill pressure such ~hat n~ t~rque capacity is on t~e element. Otherwise, lf ~he ~peed change begins ~arlier or prior to this time, fight will cccur because ~oth the apply and ~elease element have capacity. trS is defined as follc~s:

t = tt ~ t Sat the end of shift, wh~re:

tt = value of ~ime 't' with N~ 2 Ni ~ B or previc~Ss value of tt withs Nt < Ni ~ B tv = ~alue of time 't' a~ initial venting of release elemerst or Last occurrence of V 2 Vf ~ Va for release elemerst Initially, DCta is equal to zero (i.e. battery disconnect).

.men, DCta is defined as follows:

DCta = DCt2 + 1-2%, with tn ~ t a + .028 DCta - 1.2~, ~ith tn < t a ~ ~028 In the above equation, t ~ is ar. adjusted value of t (a predetermin~d table value) based orS a learned value of K5. Ks is used to predict where the first cyole of bump-along ~ s because of changes in tlrperature. R~ is used to adjust t bas0d on ~ ature so that ~tart o~ DCt for the apply element occurs just prior to the first bump-along cycle.

Re~erring ~o the equation fox DCt, a delta term ~s used when the trangmission system has not learned out prDperly ~he above vaxiables.

If t is less than the start of speed change at point 2506 on curve ' A `` 1 320060 2502, ~he ~ ON time for DCt is increased or incremen~ed until the start of speed change b2gins at the end of t~ ~ us, ~he delta term provi~es added protection by reactLng immediately.

~ eferring to Figure 24L, a shift tape represPntation of ~arious ch2racteristics of the transmissi~n lD0 is ~hcwn. Curve 2502 repre~ents the logic state of the apply element and curve 2504 represents the logic state ~f the release element. Curve 2506 represents the desired acceleration (alphade5ired~ and curve 250~ repres~nts ~he actual turbi~e acoeleration (alphat). Curve 2510 represents the pressure of lcw/reverse el~ment and curve 2512 represents the pressure of the reverse element.

When the manual valve 604 is shifted to reverse R, the low/reverse element starts to vent. The lcw/reverse clutch solenoid-actuated valve 636 is tuxned OFF as mdicated by point 2514 on curve 2502. Ihe pressure in the low/reverse el~ment starts to decrease or deca;~ as shown by part 2516 of curve 2510. During this time, the reverse el~nent is filling and ~he pressure 6tarts ~o increase as sh~wn hy part 2518 of curve 2512. ~hen the pressure in the lcw~reverse el~ment has decayed to a fairly low level as ~ndicated by po mt 2520 on cur~e 2510, the lowtrever&e elenent is reapplied under DC control at point 2~20 on curve 2504.

' ' I 320060 CN-EQ~RD DI~GrCSTqCS The on-board diagnostics provide diagnostic test routines to quickly identify control problems. An example of such diagnostics is found in ~.S.

Patent No. 4,612,638, issued Septe~ber 16, 1986, in the name of Rissel, The transmission controller 3010 also includes a ~et of diagnostics to isolate transmission problems.

Referring to Figure 25A, ~he methcdology for the on-board diagnostics is shown. At the start of the methodology in bubble ~600, the methodology advances to diamond 2602 and determines whether a co~mand (CMD) was received ~y looking for a string of bytes from a commL m cations ~ort on the tran~mission oontroller 3010. If a oommand was not received, the methodology advances to block 2642 to be described herein. If a ccmmand was received, the methDdology advances to diamond 2604 and determ mes whether the command received:was for a PRNODDL stah~t test. If the ccmmand received was for a PFNCDDL st~rt test, the ~ethodology advances t~o block 260Ç and calls ~he PRNODDL test rcutine or methodolo~y to be described (See Figure 25B~. The m~thodolo~y then returns to diam~nd 2602.

~ t diamDnd 2604, if the oommand received was nDt for a PRNODDL start ~est, the meth~dolcgy advanoes to diamond 2608 and determines ~ether the P~NCDDL test pa5sed by looking ~Dr a flag for ex~mple. If the ~R~CDDL ~est did ~ct pass, the methDdology a~vanoe s to block 2642.

If ~he P~CDDL test did pass, ~he nethod~lo9y adva~oe s bo diam~nd 2610 and determm es whether the cammand received is for a solenoid/pres5ure switch test r~utine based on the transmission 100 opera~ing in park P - 185 ~ 3~0060 ~th the engine of the vehicle off ~y looking for a oc~ded altput or a flag for exanple.

If the ocmTand was received, the met~logy advanoes to dian~nd 2612 and dete~es whether the engine is off ~Ne-O).

If the engine is not off, the ~e~ology ~vances tc> blodc 2642.

If the el~gine is off, the methodolo~" advanoes to bl~dc 26141 and calls tl~e park engi~e-off test to be described ~See Figure 25C).

At diamond 2610, if the car~ d received was not for the park with the engine off solenQid/pressure ~wit~h test, the methcdology advances to diamond 26l6 and debermines whether the engLne is cn (Ne is greater than or equal to a predetermined value such as idle speed). If that criteria is not true, the methodology advances to block 2642. ~f that criteria is true, the methodology advances to dianond 2618 and determm es whether the oommand received was for a solenoid/pressure switch test routine ~ased on the transmission lO0 operating in park with the engine on (Ne yreater ~han or equal to the engine idle speed). If the ~ nd was reoeived, the methodology advances to block 2620 and calls the park engine test to be described ~See Fi ~ e ~5D). The me ~ ology then advances to block 2642.

At diamDnd 2618, if the oomm3nd received was not ~or park with the engine on solenoid/pressure switch test, the nethodology a~vances ~o dlamond 26~2 and db ~ s whether the ~ received was for a æolenoid/pressure ~witch $est xo~ine based on ~he transmissio~ lO~ operating i:n reverse with the engine ~n. If that criteria is true, the ~ethodology advances to ~lock 26?4 and calls the rev~rse test to be descr ~ (See ~igure 25E). The ~ethodo10gy then ~dvances to block 2642.

~6 1 320060 At diamond 2622, i~ the command received was not for reverse with ~he engine on, 801 enoid/pressure ~witch test, the methcdologv advances ~o diamond 2626 and determines whether ~he oomnand received was for a solenoid/pressure switch test routine based ~n the transmussio~ 100 operating m neutral with the engine cn. If that criteria is true, the methcdology advan oes tD block 2628 and calls ~he neutral test to be described (See Fi~ure 25F). The ~ethLdology then advances t~ block 26~2.

At diamond 2626, if the ~ re oeived was not for neutral with ~he engine on solenoid/pressure ~witch test, the methodology advances to diamond 2630 and determlnes ~ ther the command received was for a solenoid/pressure switch test routine based on the transmission 100 operating in overdrive with the eng me on. If that criteria is ~rue, the methcdology advances to block 2632 ~nd calls the overdrive test to be described (See Figures 25G and 25H). The methodology then advances to block 26420 At diamond 2630, if the ocnnand received was not for overdrive with the engine on solenoid/pressure switch ~est, the methodology advances to dia~ond 2634 and determunes whether the oomm~nd received was for a ~olenoid/p~essure ~witch test rou~ine based ~n the trans~lssion 100 opera ~ in low or drive with the engine on. If that criteria is true, ~he ne~hodology a~vances to block 2636 and calls the low/drive ~est bo be described ~See ~igure 251~. The me~hodology then advanoes to block 2642.

A~ diam~n~ 2634, if the oommand raceiYed was not for low or drive with engme Qn solenoid/pressure ~witch test, the methodoloqv ~dvances to diamond 2638 and determ mes whether the ocmmand received was /8~ 1 320060 for a speed sensor test made with the engine on~ If that criteria is truel the me~hcdology advanoes to block 2640 and calLs the ~peed sensor test to be described (S~e Figure 25J). lhe methodology then advances ~o block 2642.

~ t diamond 2638, if the command received was not for a ~peed sensor test, the methodolo~y advan oe s to diamond 2644 and determines w~ether the command re oe ived was ~or a ~olen~id re ~ se test. lf the ccmmand received was for a solenDid response test, ~he methodology advances to block 2646 and calls the solenoid response test to be described ~See Pigure 25K). Onoe this has ke~ oompleted, or ~he command received was not ~or a solenoid respon~e test, the n~thodoloay advances to diamDnd 2262. At diamond 2262, the transmission controller 3910 de~erm,ines whether the oommand received was for diagnostic table data. If yes, the ~ethodology advances to block 2644 and ~end~ out diagnostic table data such as Ne~ Nt and No from the transmission controller 3010 to another electrcnic device. The methodology then ret ~ s. If the ocmmand was not for dia~nostic table data, the methodology returns.

ReferrLng to ~i ~ 25B, the methcdol ~ for the PRNCDDL test r~utine or methodology in block 2606 of Fi~ure 25A is shown. This nethodology checks the operation ~f ~he PRNCDDL contact ~wi~ch ~ensors (NSl, NS2, RLl~ RL2) previously described. At the start of the test in le 2650, the methodology advances to diæmond 2~52 and de ~ es ~h:ther a new oommand Wa5 re oeived ~rom the CGmmunications port as previ~ sly descr ~ . I~ a new c~mmand was not reoeived, the ~thDdology advances to block 2654 and gets the informatio~ as to ~he position of the m~nual lever 578 (i.e. park P) (~ee Figure 19) as ~.

- \ 1 320060 previously described. I~e me ~ dology then advances to block 2656 and updates the memDry of the transmission oontr~ller 3010 and cc~pares the previous position of the mhnual lever 578 to the present position to detenmine a ~atch. m e nethodology also sets a flag in the PRNCDDL start ~est to indicate the present position of ~he shift lever (5LP) or manual lever 578. me methodology then retuLrns ~D di.amvnd 2652, At diamDnd 2652, if a new command was received, ~he methodology advances ~D diamDnd 2660 and checks the PRNCDDL status ~or whether the test was passed or failed. If khe ~est passed, the methodology advanoe s to block 2662 and sets a test passed bit or flag.

If ~he test fai.led, the methcdology advances to block 2664 and sets a ~est failed fLag. The methodolcgy advances from blocks 2652 and 2664 to bloc~ 2666 and outputs the flags to a diagnostic readout ox (DRB) or the like. The nethodology then returns to the main loop.

Referrmg to Figure 25C, the solenoid/pressure swltch test for the transmlssion lO0 operating in park with engme off routine or methodology in block 2614 of Figure 25A is shown. The methcdology is used t~ check the operation of the solenoid-acbuated valv~s 630, 632, 634 and 636 and pressure switches 646, 648 and 650 (Figures 5A-L). At the beqinning of the methodDlogy in bubble 2670, the methodology a~v2nces bD diam~nd 2672 and detexmines w~ether the Fhift lever p~sition ~5LP3 606 is park P as previously described. If the SLP 606 is not park, the nethodology returns ~o ~he ~ loopO If the 5LP 606 is paxk, the n~thodol~gy advznces to block 2674 and calls t~e pressure switch test rcutlne ~r ~ekhodology, previously descrlbed in oonn~ction with Figures 21A ~nd 21B, bo test all pressure switchQs 646, 648 and 650.

The methodology then advances t~ diamond 2676 and determines whether any ~ /~7 .

1 320060 flags were set. If no flags were set, ~he methodology advances to block 2678 and cutputs a "test-passed" oode to the DRB. The nethod~logy then returns to the main l~cp.

At diamDnd 2676, if any of the flags are 6et, the methGdology advances to diamond 2680 and determines whether the lcw~rever~e pres~ure 6witch 650 is ~n or pressuzized by checking on input port to see if ~N or OFF. If that criteria is true, t~ methodolc~y adv~noes to block 2682 and outputs a oode that the "lcw/reverse pressure switch not o f" to the DRB. The methodology advances from block 2682 to diamond 2684.

At diamond 2684, the methodology determunes whether the ~wo/four pressure switch 648 i8 0~ or pressurized as previously described. If that criteria is true, the methcdology advances to block 26B6 a~d outputs a code that ~two/four pressure switch is not o~f". The ~ethodology then advances to diamond 2688 and determlnes whether the overdrive pressure switch 646 is on or pressurized as previously described. If that criteria iS not true, ~he methodology returns to the nain loop. If that criteria i5 true, the me~hodology aavanoes to block 2690 and GUtputs a oode that the "overdrive pressure switch is not off".

me methcdolcgy then returns to the main locp.

Referring to Figuxe 25D, the methDdol ~ for the ~olenoid/ pres~ure ~wltch test for ~he transmission 100 operating in park with eng m e an (i.e.

Ne ~reater than a predetermined value) of block 2620 of ~igure 25A is ~hawn. At the begLnning of ~he ~eth3dology m bubble 2700, the methaaology ad~anoes bD diamond 2702 and deteLmines ~hether the SLP 606 is park P as pre~iously described. If the 5LP 606 is not park, the ~ thodol ~ returns b3 the main locp. If the SIP 606 is park, the methndology advance~ t~ diamond 2704 and determunes whether the : : .

1 320(~0 eng ~e ~ erature is hot, frcm the tran~mission temperature routm e as previously described, by lo~king for a flag ~or example. If ~he eng me tem~erature is not hot, the nethodology returns t~ the maln loop. I the engine temperature is h~t, the methDdolcgy adv~nces t~ block 2706 and calls ~he pressure switch best pre~icusly described tD apply the twD/four 648 and cverdrive 646 pressure ~witches. lhe methodologv then advan oe s to diamDnd 2708 and de~rmines whet~er the twD/fcur 648 or overdrive 646 pressure ~witch is Dn or pressurized as previcusly described. If either pressure ~wntch is on, the me~dology advances to block 2710 and outputs "PRNODDL failurei' oude bD the DRB. Ihe ~ethodology then ret~rns ~D the main loop.

At diam~nd 2708, if the twD/four 548 ~r overdrive 646 pressure switch is not on or pressurized, the methcdology advances to diamond 2712 and determines whether the difference betwRen Ne and Nt is gr~ater than a predetermined value s~lch as lO0 r.p.m. If that criteria is true, the methodDlogy advances to block 2714 and stores in memory the ratio "neutral" error code. Once this h2s been acoomplishe~ or the di~ference is not greater at dlamond 2712, ~he ~ethod~logy advances to ~ amDnd 2716 and determlnes whether the difference ketween Nt and Ne is greater than a predetexmined value such as 100 r.p.m. If that criterla is true, the method310gy advan oe s ~o block 2718 and ~tores Ln ~em~ry an engine speed ~Ne" err~r ccde. 9nce ~his has been acocmplishçd or the difference is not greater at diamDnd 2716, the nethodology advan oes to block 2720 ~nd calls the pressure swibch test to release the twDifoNr 648 and overdrive 646 pressure ~wntches~ The nethodolo~y then a~vanoes bo block 2722 and calls a sulenoid test for the low/reverse sDl~noid~actuated valve 636.

me solenoid test in an internal routine which turns the solenoid ON or A /~/ ~ 32~306`0 OFF to check for pressure and 6pike res~onse. The methcdology ~hen advances to diamond 2724 and determines whet ~ the low/reverse pressure switch 650 w~s on or pressurized. If the pressllre 6witch 650 is not on, the methodology advances to block 2726 and stores an nemDry an error ocde ~hat the "l~w/reverse pressure swltch not on'i. Ihe methodology then ~vances tD diamDnd 2728. At di~mDnd 2728, the transmission aontroller 3010 dbteDmines whether a ~pike det~:ed bit or fLag (i.e.

flyback ~Dltage) was set. If ~he ~pike de~ected bit or f~ag was not ~et, t~e methodology advances b~ block 2730 and ~tores in memory a "no CQntinuity" error oode. The methodology then adv~nces to diamo~d 2732.

At diamvnd 2732, the transmission oontrcller 3010 deter~unes whether the low/reverse pressure switch 650 is off or not pressurized.

If that criteria is not true, the methodology advances to block 2734 and sbores in mem~ry an error code that the "lcw/reverse pressure switch not off". ~ e nethodology then advances to diamond 2736.

At diamDnd 2736, the transmission controller 3010 determines whether any err~r oodes are stored. If any error cod~ are stored, the methodology advances to block 2338 ~nd 6ends out the error ocdes to the DRB. The ~ethcdology then returns to the m~in loop. If there are no error codes 6tDred, ~he nethodology advances tD block 2740 and sends cut a "~est-pa~sed" code. The methodo ~ then re ~ s to the nain loop.

~ eferrm g to ~igure 25E, the methodology for the Eolenoid/pxessure ~wi~ch best ~or the transmissi~n 100 operating in reverse gear with the engine on ~f block 2624 of ~iqure 25A is ~hcwn.

At t~e start of t~ ~ethodology in bukble 27~0, ~he re~hodology ad~ances diamond 2752 and dbtermlnes whe*hr ~he SIP 606 is reverse R.

If the .P 606 is not reverse, the methDdology retNrns to the nain loop. If ~2 A .

1 320060 thR SLP 606 is reverse, the m~thodology advances ~o bl~ck 2756 and calls the pressure switch ~est routine previcusly described t~ apply the lcw~reverse 650, two/Xcur 648 and overdrive 646 pressure ~witches. The ~ethodology then advances tD diamond 2758 and detern~s whe~her any of the pressure swntches 646, 648 and 650 are on or pressurized. If any pressure swltches are on, the methodology advances to block 276Q and ~tores in m~msry a "PRNCDDL~ fail error oode. qhe nethDdology then advances to hl~ck 2762 ~nd ~ s off or de~eRergize all ~olenDids of the solenoid-actuated ~alves 630, 632, 634 and 636. Ihe methodolcgy ~hen advances ~o diamond Z764 ~nd de ~ es whether there are any error codes. If there are an~ exror cDdes, ~he methodology ~dvanoe s to block 2766 and ships w t the error codes. me methodolo~y then reburns to ~he loap.

At diamond 2764, if there are no error oodes, the methodology advances to block 2768 and ships out a test passed ~iynal. ~le methDaolog~ then returns to the main loop.

~ eferring to Figure 25F, the nethDdology for the ~olen~id pressure switch ~est routine for the t~ ~ ssion 100 operating in neutral gear with the engine an of block 2628 of Figure 25A is ~hown.

At the ~art of the method~l~gy in b~tble 2770, ~he methDdolcyy advances to diamDnd 2772 and dbtermines whether ~he SLP 606 is neutral as previously described. If t~e SLP 606 i~ n~t neutral, the nethod~logy xeturns bo the main loop. If the ~hift lever po~ition ~s neutral, the ~e~hkdology ~dvances bo block 2774 and calls the pressure ~witch r~utine previously described b~ apply ~r tuxn on the twD/four 648~ ov~rdr.ive 646 and lowtreverse 6~0 pressure ~witches. me methcdology ~hen advance5 to block 2776 and turns OFF the ~olenoids of t~ le~Did-actuated valves 1 320060 630, 632, 634 and 636 at the end of the main loop.

The methodology then advances to di~nd 277B and dete~s whether 'che two/four 648 or overdrive 646 pressure sw~tches were ~n or pres~rized. I either pressure switch 646 or 648 was on, the meth~dology ~dvanoes to bl~lc 2780 ~r~ 6tores ~n n~rory a "P~WODDL failure" error code.

Ihe methodology then advances to diand 2782.

~ t ~ l 2782, ~ trar~nission o~ntrol:Ler 3010 determines w~ether the law/reverse pressure switch 650 was on or pressurixed. If ~he pressuxe ~w1tch 650 was not on, the methodology advances ~o block 2784 and ~tores in memory an error oode that the "low/reverse pressure ~witch not on". The me~h3dology then advan oes bo diamond 2786.

At diamond 2786, the transmission controllex 3010 det~n~ines ~lether there are any error codes. If there are error codes, the methodology advanceY to block 27B8 and ships out the error cxxles. The methodology ~hen returns to the main l~op. If there are no error codes, the n~thodology advances to block 2790 and ~hips out a test pass~ si ~ 1. The methodology the~ returns to the mYin locp.

Referring to Figures 25G and 25H, the methodolo~y for the ~olenoid pressure swit~h test routine for the ~ smission opera~ing in ~verdrive with the engine on of block 2632 o~ Figure 25A is shcwn. At the start of the nethoa~lcgy in bubble 2800, ~he nethodol~gy advances to di3mond 2802 and determ mes whether ~he SLP 606 is overdrive aD as previously described. If the SLP 6Q6 is not overdrive, ~ methodolo3y re~urns ~o ~he n~in locp. If~the SLP 606 is cverdrive~ ~he methodology ~dvances to 2806 and calls the ~olenoid test ~or ~he twD/four shift solenoid-actuated valve 634. Ihe methodology ~hen advances bo dizmon~ 2B08 and debenmines whether the ~wo/~our pressure switch 648 wzs on or !~ ,'7~ 1 320060 p~essurized.

If the pressure ~iwit~h 648 was not on, the nethodology elavances to blocX 28~ 0 and stores in m~or~ an error code that t} e "t:wc/four pressure sw~ch 648 was not on~'.

Ihe methodolo~ then advances to diamon~l 2812 and determi~s whe'cher a spike detected bit was 6et as previc7usly described.

If ~e bit was s}ct r,e~, the met}~lolcgy ~es to bloc~c 2814 and etores a "no cantinu~t~" error oode ~or ~he two/four ~hift ~olenoid-ac~uated valve ~34. qhe ~rethodology ~chen ~dvances ~o diæmond 2816 and ae ~ es whether ~he bw~/four pressure ~witch 648 was off or not ~res Æ ized. If the pressure switch 648 was not off, the nethodology ~dvances to block 2818 and s~ores an ~rror ~ e that the "two/four pressure switch not off". The ~ethodolsgy then advances to block 2B20.

At block 2820, the me~hodology calls the solenoid test for the cverdrive solenoid-actuated valve 632. The methodology then advances to di~mond 2822 and determm es whether ~he overdrive pressure switch 646 ~as on or pressurized. If the pressure ~ tch 646 was not on, the ~ethodology a ~ ces to block 2824 and stores an error code that the "overdrive pressure switch was n~t on"~ The meth3dol~gy then ad~ances to diamond 2826 and de~ermines whe ~ the overdrive pressure switch 646 was off or not pressurized. If the pressure switch 646 was not off, the nfthod~lo~y advances bD block 2828 and stores an error oode that the ~cverdrive pressure ~witch not off". Ihe nethodology then advances to diamond 2R30 a~d determlnas ~hether a ~pike detected bit is se~. If a ~pike detected bit was not ~et, the ne~hDdo1Ogy ~dvances to block 2832 and sb4xes a ~nD ~Dntinuity" e~ror code ~or the c~erdrive sDlenoid-actuated ~alve 632. qhe methodolog~ then advance~ to di~mcnd ~834 and determ1nes whether any erTDr codes w~re stored. If there are 1 320060 error codes stored, the meth~dology advances to block 2836 and 6hips cut all error codes.

The`nethodology thæn returns.

At diz~TIond 2834, if no er~or oodes are ~tored, the nethodology advances to bl~ck 283B and stores ~n ~ory a ~olenoid ~sk ~i.e.

logical ~tat~s; to ~rn CIN ~che underdrive ~ol~id-actuated valve 630.

lhe ~reth~ology then advances ~o bloc~k 2840 ar~d clears any spike detected bit. me methD~ology t dvances to di~rond 2842 and detennines whether ~ ~pi)ce detected bit was set.

If a ~spike detected bit was not set, 'che n~dology advances to bloc3c 2844 ar~ stores a "n~7 continuity" error code for ~ ~rive solenoid-actuated valve 630.

thodology then a~vances to block 2846 ar;d ~ets a ~ol~oid nask to turn 0~1 the t~o/four solenoid-actuated valve 634.

The methodology then ~dvances to dia ~nd 2848 and dete ~ s ~ihether turbine ~ ed Nt is equal to zero. If Nt is not equal to zero, the nethodology advances t~ block 2850 and stores in memory a ratio (2nd) error code. The ~ethodology then advances to block 2852 and turns OFF or releases the underdrive &olenoid-actuated valve 630. The ~ethodology then advances to diamond 2854 ~nd de ~ s whether Nt ~5 greatex than zero. If Nt is not greater than z~ro, the methodology advances to blcck 2856 and rele æ s the ~wD/four ~hift 601enDid-ac~uated valve 6340 The thDaology then advances tD blo~k 2858.

~ f N~ ~s gI~aber than zero, t~e me~hodology ad~nces to block 2858 ~nd ~ets a ~Dlenoid ~k to turn ON the 1~ /reverse ~olenoida ~ ted valve 636. The nethodol~gy then adv2nces to diamond 28~0 and determines whether the low/reverse pressure ~witGh 650 is cn or pr~suriz~d. If ~he pressure ~witch 650 i~ on, the me~hodolog~ ~dvances tD bl~ck 2862 ana stores in mEmory a N~olen~id ~witch valve" (5S~ error A 1 320060 oode.

The m~thodol~ then advances to block 2B64 and releases all solenoid-actua~ed tralves 630, 632, 634 ~nd 636.

Iile methodology then advances to di~nd 2866 and determ~s whether there were ~ny error codes.

If t}lere are any err~r codes, the methal~logy a~varlces ~o block 2867 and ships aut the error oodes. me methodology ~hen returns to the main loop.

At diar~nd 2866, if there were n~ err~r oodes, the methodology adv~nces to block 2868 and ~ips Ol~t a tes'c passed code.

The methodology ~hen returns to ~he main loop.

Referring ~o Figure 25I, ~he methodology for the solenoid pressure switch test routine for the transmissian 100 cperating in low or drive with the engine on of block 2636 of Figure 25A is shown. At the start of the methodology in bubble 2870, ~he n~thodology advances to diamond 2871 and determines whether the SLP 606 is low L or drive D as previously described. If the SLP 606 i5 not low or drive, the methodology returns to the main loop. If the SLP 606 is lcw or drive, the methodolog~ advances to ~lock 2872 and calls the pressure switch test previo~sly described to turn CN the tw~/fo~r clutch 601 ~ id~a ~ ted valve 634. The nethodology advances ~3 diamDnd 2873 and detexmines whether the two/four pressure 6witch 648 is on or pressurized as previously described. If ~he pressNre switch 648 is not on, the methodology ~dvanoes to block 2874 ~nd stDres ~n memDry an error co~e that the ntw~/~cur pressure ~wltch n~t ~n~. Ihe methodology then A~VanCA5 t4 block 2875 ~ OFF ~he twD/~our shift ~ole~oid-Actwated ~alve 634. The nethodology ~hen adv~nces to diamcnd 2B76 an~ detenmines whether there are any errDr codes. If there are errDr oodes, the methcdology advances ~D blo~k 2g77 a~d ~hips out the error codes. Ihe nethodology then returns to the main 1OGP.

.

A ,~ .. .

.

1 320060 ~ t di~nd 2876, if there ar~ no error ~des, the neth~dol~gy advances to block 2878 and ~hips out a kest passed code.

The n~tl~dolog~ then retunls to the ma~ lO~po Referr~ ~o Figure 25J, the ~ed ~ensor test ~de for the engine on of bloc}c 2640 of Figure 25A is ~. ~t ~he beg~ of the ~th~dology in b~le 2880, the n~ dology advances ~3 dia~nd 2881 ~nd determ~nes ~hether the SLP 6û6 is xe~rerse R as previalsly des~ribed. If the SLP 606 is not reverse, the methodology returns to ~he m~in loop.

If the 5LP 606 is reverse, the nethodoloqy advances to blcck 2882 and verifies ~he in-gear ratio of output ~peed No. The methodology then advances to di~mDnd 2884 and de ~ es whether the ~rangmission 100 is in reverse based on the in-gear ratio of block 2882. If the transmission 100 is not in reverse, the methDdology adv~nces to block 2885 and æts the ratio ~reverse) error code. The methodolo~y then advances to block 2886 and gets the present value of No and Nt and saves these values m mem~ry as Past No and Past Nt~ respectively. The ~e ~ ology ~hen ~avanoes to diamond 2887 and determin2s whether No eguals a predetermined value such as zero. If ~ is ~ot zero, the nethodology aavances to block ~888 and sets Past No~ the stored value of N~, ~s ~O. The meth4dology then ed~anoes bo diam~nd 2889 and determines wh~ther Nt equals zer~. If Nt is D~t zerD~ the methodology advances ~D block 2890 a~d aets Past ~ , the ~tored value of Nt, as Nt. The meth~dol~gy then advances bo diam~nd 2891 and determines whether both Nt ~nd No are zero. If that criteria is nDt t$ue, the method~logy then loops back b4 disn~3d 2~87.

At di~mond 2891, if both Nt and No equ31 zer3, the ~ethodology aavances to diam~nd 2892 and determines whether P æ t Nt, ~he pre~i~usly , . : :

,:

':' ' ' - :

1 320060 stated value of Ntl equals a predetermlned value, i.e. a mun ~ ~ value of Nt t20 r.p.m~ If that criteria is ~ot truet the methodology advances to block 2893 and stores a ratio ~neutral) error code. The methodolcgy then advances to diamDnd 2894 and de~enminRs whether the Past No, the previously stored ~alue of No, ~quals a p¢edetermined ~alue, i.e.

minimum No ~20 rOp.m. If that triteria is not true, the metho~ology ~dvan oe s to block 2895 and ~tores ~No" error ~ode. 'nhe m~thcdology then ~vances to di~mond 2896 and ~etermines whet~er any err~r ccdes exist~ If there are error oodes, the ne ~ ology ~dvances to block 2897 and ~hips out a test passed ccde. qhe methodology then re~urns to the n~in lo~p.

At diamond 2B96, if there are no ~xror ocdes, the n~thodology advances to block 2898 and ships out the error oodes. The methodoloay then returns to the nain locp.

Referr ~ ~D Figure 25K, ~he nethDdology for the solenoid response test mode of block 2646 of Figure 25A is shown. At the beg m nLng of the nethcdology in bubble 2900, the methçdology advances t~ diamond 2901 and determines whether the trangmission fluid te~perature i~ h~t as previcusly describad. If the fluid tEmperature is not hst, the nethodology returns bo the nain loop. If the fluid temperature is hDt, the methodology advanoes bo di~mond 2902 and determ m es whether the SLP 606 is oorrect. If the SLP 606 is not oorrect, ~he ne ~ ology returns b~ the n~in lo~p. If the SLP 606 is c~ he ~ethodology a~vances to block ~903 and sets all bits or f~ags tD t~rn OFF the solenoid-actuated valves 630, 632, 634 and 636. ~he ~ethodology then advances t~ block 2904 and ~ets all flags tD turn CN ~he s~lenoidac*uated valves 630, 632, 634 and 636. m e ~thodology then advances to 1 320060 diæm~nd 2905 and dete ~ es whethex the duty cycle ~DCl cDunter is greater than a pred~teln~ed value such as zeroc If ~hat criteria is not true, the ~ethDd~lcgy advances t~ blo~k 2906 a~d increments the DC counter. The nethodology t~n loops back to block 2904.

At diamond 2905~ if the DC oounter is greater than zero counts, the methDdology advances tD diæn~ond 2907 and det~rmines whe~her ~he DC ccunter is equal bo a predetelD~m3d value such as 5. If that criteria is not tr~e, ~he ~ethodology advances bo block 2908 gnd sets flags for the solenoid-actuated valves bo be tu~ned ~FF. The methodology then advances bo ~lock 2909 and increments the DC counter. The nethodology then loops b~ck to diamDnd 2907.

At diæm~nd 2907, if the DC oounter is equal to 5, the nethDdology advances to block 2910 and clears the DC counter. me methodology then advances to diæmond 2912 and determlnes whether a message has been received from the DRB to end the test. If a message has not ~een received to end the testt the methodology advances bo block 2904 previously described.

If a nes~age has been received ~o end the test, the Irethodology returns to the snain dia~nostic lo~p.

_.

Referrin~ ~:> Figures 26A thra~h 26D, a method is disclosed to oontrol ~he eng me borque and coDrdina~e its outpub in response ~o ccnditions existing in the trangmis5ion 100. M~re 6pecifically, certain borque ~utpu~ from the engine n~s* be oontnDlled in ~uch ~ way ~o as tD nunimize the pGtential for interference and pDssible d2m~ge with any of the electronically con~rDlled transmission oomponents.

~4 ~200 .i ' .

.

1 320060 ~ this end, the ~logy begi~ ~ the F~ure 26A in block 2920 b~ beg~g a gr~p o: steps ~ the eng~r~e a~rltrol ~dule st~rting with 1:he saving ~n m~ o:E a r~l ~ ~e ~ettingO In other w~rds, a normal ~par3c ad~nce i~ the E;park a~anoe that the e~gine cc~ntroller 3020 will calQ~late ~ its s wn withaat regard b~ ~at is lupE~ni ~ in the transmission 100.

Fol~owing through to the next 6~ep in dec:ision block 2922, a redundant ~check is performed ~o ~E~ke ~ure that t~e en~ine oontroller 3020 has acknowledged bo the transmassion o~n~roller 3010 that a a~n~rol ~ignal has been received from the transmission aontroller 3010. If the engine oantroller 3020 has not yet æ~x~wledged receipt of the signal ~rom the transmission oontroller 3010, *he xeceipt is ackncwledg~d in block 2~24~ If the transmission ~ oller 301D has ~een ack~cwledged as checked in decision block 292Z, ~he xcu~ine falls through ~o block 292~.

. As previously mentioned, ~locks 2922 and 2924 are a redundant check of the acknowledgment ~f the receipt of ~ ecntrol sign21 frcm the transmission conkr~ller 3010 to ~he e~g mc ocn~roller 3020. The pLrpose for the signal frnm the ~rans~issio~ CDntrOller 3010 ~o the engine o~ntroller 3020 is t~ time t}~ fihift ev~t ~nd ~unicate this ~ ~e engine oo~tro~ 3~20 ~ ~ .~anted OCQditiOr~s ~n ~nterfering with ~he ~ event in the tr~ns$iss1On 100 though these ~i ~ s are generat~d ~ndlor ~eceived l~tsr in the ~elow-described m~thodology, The blocks 2922 ~ 2924 exist ~e~e to pr ~ de a ~ t cheek of ~he acknGwledgement o~ ~u~h a ~ignal ~o p~rvide additional diagnostic informati~n recaI~ing the ~echani~m tD ,~ransmi~ the signal between ~he *ransmissi~n QontrD~l~r 3~10 and the ~n~ine oontroller 3020.

~ , 1 320060 ~re specifically, this signal may ~e tr~itted between tl~ transm~ssion controller 3010 and engine oontroller 3020 ~ n~ans of a hardwire or ~r neans c~f a data ~us.

In the case of a data bus, ~ince inst~nt acoess ~ the hls might ~t be possible, it is r~nded that the o~nr~nication of the shift event signal ~e handled on a hardwire basis and the ackn~wledgement be handled at a later tilTe as allowed by the data l:us protocols.

The ~ext purticn of the methDd~logy of engine ~rque nanagement can be hroken into twu magor sections. The first sectio.n deals wi~h the portion of the Figuxe 26A beginning with decision blocks or diamond~ 2926 and 2934 which deal with the launch or break-away oondition. The BeCO~d major ~ection of the engine ~orque managemEnt methodology is illustrated ln Fi~ure 26A by referring to diamond 2938 and 2946 for the enqine torque management under oonditions of a shift event at wide open throttle (W~T)~ Returning now to the secti~n of Figure 26A dealing wlth the launch or break-away ~ tion, the overall control s~rategy in this ccndition is to control the engine speed Ne directly, which results in an indirect oontrol of thR differential speed ~etween th~ engine and the turbine 128 of the ~orque ocnverter 110. This indirectly c3ntrols the borg~e on the tDrque w nverter 110 ~hich p~cvides the input into the transmission 100. It ~hculd be n~ted that t~e torque on ~ e torque ccoverter 110 is the item that must be oontrolled within ~ ranges during a launch or ~reak-away ovndition. In other w~rds, it i8 desired t~ control the engine speed Ne such that the de~irable bDrque, which is acceptable during a launch or break-away condi~ion, will ~tay wqthin the prescribed boundaries.

. . .

A æ~ ~ .: : .. ...

1 320060 Referring ag~ to dian~nd 2926, certa~n conditioq~s are checked to see if spark con'crol is n~ded duri~g launch. 2~bre specifically, these c~nditions include a ~ ttle ~n~le greater than a predetennined value such as a~rproocimately 26 degrees ar~ a ~hicle or a~t~ut ~peed l~lo less than ~ p~edetennined value ~uch as appq~imately six miles per ha~r. fflese oonditions represent those at ~ich pea}c torques w~ll occur which will be the maxi~rmm cc~dîtions E~ably experienced.

If the operation of the engine and transm~ssion 100 can be managed p~operly dur~ng these peak torque cc~diti~ns, the durability and life of the transmission 100 can ~e ~ended.

Ret~ aga~n to diznr~ond 2926, if t.he conditions of throttle angle and ~utput speed No are fiuch that ~rk aontrol is rleeded at ch, the Trethodology advances to block 292B to look up or cc~.culate a desired nsximum engme peed Ne for the ~urrent output sF~ed No. me ooncept behind ~he utilization of a table or a fonmula to get the desired n~ximum cngine speed Ne with a given outpu~ 6peed No is deriYed ~rom the fact that transmission input ior turbine tDrque) is equal to the engine bor~ue as nultiplied by the t~rgue ~anverter 110 with the amcunt of n~ltiplication depending on the ratio between the en~ me Ne and tur~ine Nt ~peeds. Using the characteristics of the torque cooverter 110, a table of engine ~ Ne ~exsu~ turbine ~peed Nt can be created ~o that turb me borque i~ a ccnstant for t~e launch or br2ak~away condition. ZbrLi~6 ~peed Nt is replac~d by vehicle or ~utput ~peed N~ in the ~able ~r formula because the latter is already 6ensed by the engine oontrDller 3020:~nd is a good approximation.

The ne~hodDlogy ~ ~dvances ~o block 2930 to compute ~n error te~m which is egual ~o the differen~e between the actual engine speed ~ 320060 and the des ~ed max ~ engine speed. It is desl red to control this error term and drive it to zero ~y ad~usting ~he ~park advance versus the error as shcwn in block 2932. This can be done in m~ny ways, namely by using integration or proportional adjusbment ~ethods ~ncluding formula or look-~p tables. qhe important ~hing is ~o drive the ~rr~r tenm to zero and adjust the ~park advance ~o acoampli h ~hat result.

~ext~ the nethodology returns t~ the ma~n program.

Returning now to diæmond 2926, i ~he oonditicns are not right for a spark oontrol to occur during launch, the ~ethcdology branches rcm di~mond 2926 to diamond 2934 to check tD see whether or not ~he la~unch spark control methodology is fim shing. If so, t~e methodology ces to block 2936 to return the spark advance to its nonmal oondition as detenmned by the engine controller 3020 and originally sensed through block 2920. In this particular en~odinlnt, the spark advan oe is merely ra~ped up to the nonmal values. It sh3uld he appreciated that this c~n be acoo~plished ~n ~any ways. Next, the ne~hodology returns to the ma~n engine control rDutine. :~ If launch spark cc~n~rol is not just finis ~ at diamond 2934, the ~ethDdology advances to diamDnd 2938 to de~eLmine whether the oonditi~ns are right for a ~hift ~ k oontrol a~ wide ~pen throttle rWoT). ~Dre Epecifically, wide open throktle ls defined as wa~n ~he ~tle angle i greater than or equal to a predeterlri~ ~lue such as 53 ~ees, ~or e~ple~ If the o~itions are right ~or a wide ~pen ttle E~hift 6par}c ~ontrol, the n~tl~dology a~vanoes to di~mond 2940 ~nd ~teDnines ~etJ~r a tart ~;hift ~ignAl has b~n reoeived.

More ~pecifically, the eng~ne ~ntrolïer 3020 is ~ignalled b~ the transn~ssion oontroller 3010 via a hardwi~2, i~ exall~le, ~etween the h~ .... .

` ~ 1 320060 two. uEx~n xeoeption of this "start~f-shift si3T~l, the ~th~dolog~ advances to block 2942 aTx~ ac}~wledges ~oeipt of the signal aver the ~ h~s.

Ihe metlx~dology t}}en advances to b~ock 2944 and the spark aavance is l~eld to a preaete~nined mini~ le~el until an "end-of-shift" ~ignal is reoeived.

The ra~p da~ and up an~l t~ minis~ spark a~vance level are collecti~rely c:alibrated fox both sh:i~s to achieve a predetermuned value ~uch as a 20% reduction in shif* energy~ Shift energy is determined experimen~ally. On-ooming element or clutch pressure is neasured and t~en nul~iplied by delta turbine speed, the difference between old and new geax tNrbine speeds, to get clutch shift p~wer.

Shift pawer is then integrated over the ~ime of the shift to get clutch shift energy. Onoe the ~park advance~ has been ramped d~wn to the ~ level or, if it is already there, held to ~hat value, the methodology returns to the main engine oontrol program.

Returning to diamond 2940, if the ~tart-of-shift signal has not been received for a wide open throttle ~hift, the ~ethodology advances to diam~nd 2946 and d2 ~ s whether an end-of-shift ~ignal has been reoelved. If the end-of-shift ~ignal has be~n received, the m~thodology a~van oes to blsck 2948 and acknowledges receipt of the end-of-shift sign~l aver the CCD bus. The ~ thcdology ~hen advanoe s t~ block 2950 ~nd ramps the ~park advanoe up to it n~rmal lev~l. The ~ethcdology retu¢ns to the nain engine oDntrol pnogram.

Returning to diamDnd 2938, if the conditions are not right for ~hift ~park oontrDl for a wide cQen throt~le ~hift, ~he nethcdology advanoe s tD block 2952 and uses æ prede ~ normal qpark advance value. Ihe m~thod~logy then retuxns tD the ~ain englne control proyram.

Similarly, at decision block 2946, if an end-of-shift ~ignal has not 1 320060 been reoeived, the Irethodology aavances to block 2952 to use a nonnal spark advance value.~ ~e me~chodclogy then reh~rns to the ma~n engine oontrol program.

The abave-described eng~ne ~o~ue ~gerrent r~utine j with 3respect to a shift cc~ditic~n at wide op~ t~ttle, is done ~n an open loc~ pers~ive.

Ihat is, predetennin~ c~itians are stored and u'cilized in ~he methodology which end up ~ pro~umating the oontrol desired. Hbwever, physical differences b2tween the transmission and engines and even engine oontrollers which occus during ~he manufacturing pro3ess due to t~lerances of onmponents and ~ariations i~ the oomponentry due to temperature and oth2r physi~al conditions, can cause uJique characteristics for the individual transmissions, engines, and/or controllers. Therefore, ~ach syst~n will have lts own "signature".

More specifically, ~lere is no feedback provided in the above xoutine t~ adapt or oonfinm that the oontrol was exactly as theoretically desired.

m erefore, ad~t~nal methods are prGposed which can be implemented essentially anywhere in the engLne tDxque management shift controls for wide open throttle oondit~ons as descYibed above. Tw~ control methods, in particular, are ~f notR. m e first can be performed in the transmission controller 3010 and the seoGnd can be performed in the engine oontr~ller 3020. Both ~e ~ s ~ely an the ~eedback of ~formation ~vailable ~n the individual ~ontrollers bo closely ~ 'che shift ~gy that the particular clutches in the tr~nissio~ 100 ~ust ~bsorb, :}~y calculating the ~hift power fr~sn the ~vail2~ble pieees of informatioal.

Me~ the ~hift pawer ~8 integrated to :

: aFproRimute the shift energy which m~st be absorbed.

It should ~e ~: ~ appreciated ~hat the reth~ds proposed are calculations and that, withcut ' A ~ 1 320060 the addition of a pressure sensor to sense the ac~al pressure on the 6pecific clutch at issue, a dire~c measu~rlt and 6ubsequent calculation of the acbual shift p~wer will be ~possible.

Referrir3g to Figures 263 and 26C, the t~ ~utines are displayed. ffle first rwtir~e which shall be descri~ed is frc~n the perspective of closing the loap for wide open thr~ctle shift energy nsnag~Tent ar~ the ~econd routine l ~ n the perspective of the engine controller 3D20.

Referring to Figure 26B, the rcutine ~an, as above-described, be placed essentially anywhere ~n the trangmis~ion ~Ddule to w~rk with th~ en~ine torque nsnagement controls for ~hifting at wide ~pen ~hrottle described in Figure 26A. m e routine or methodology is ~ n in block 2954 and a calculation is performed to approximate 6hift power. This is done by utilizing the various parameters available in the transmission controller 3010, namely, turbine speed Nt, the duty cycle (DC~ of the ~lu~ches, and the oonditions of the pressure swi~ches 646, 648 and 650 which will only be energi~ed or de-energized at certain pressure levels.

e calculation is pexformed essentially by fiultiplying the approximation of the pressure m the ~pecific clutch Ln question which is derived from tbe duty cycle in~ormation and the pressure switches, ~ultiplied by the turbine ~ Nt.

Next, the routine falls ~hrcugh ~o block 2956 to calculate the shift e ~ by ~ ating ~he ~bcve-c~lcula~ed ~hift pawer over time.

This calculation represents the zpproxim~te ~hift energy which must be absorbed by ~he particuIar ~lutch during ~he shift. The rcutlne then fall~ thrcugh to block 2958 tQ calcula~e the shift energy error which is equal to a desired ~hift y nJnU5 the actual ~hift ~nerg~ calculated 1 320060 above. The desired ~hift energy is a predeterminad am3unt which is a oondition beyond which the clutch 6hGuld not be forced to operate. The routine falls through to block 2960 bo tr~nsmit the errDr 6ignal calcula~ed m block 2958 to the engine ocntxoller 3020, Nbxt, m block 2962, the engine oontrolle.r 3020 ~ust take cver from the ~r ~ ssion oQntroller 3010 in block 2962 ~D adjust the spark advan oe for the particular 6hift vex~us ~he err~r tenm. This utilizes the r~mp spar~ advanse to a nNuui~um level ~nam block 2944 in Figure 26A.

The adjusbment described in block 2962 i5 U~ea in the next shlft which is the result of an accumulated adaptation from previcus shifts.

Referring n~w to the QeoQnd routine to manage engine tDrque, the routine is also displayed in Figure 26C and is from the perspective of the oontrol done in the eng m e controller 3020. Referring tv block 2964, a calcul~tion of the engine horsepGwer (hp) is made ~uring the shift ccndi~ion. This is done k~l the ~ngLne e~nt~Qller 3020 taking advantage of v æ ious ~ ~ers a~ailable to it, namely, parameters such as air fl ~ , engine speed Nel injectDr pulse width (an i~direct measure of the ~mount of fuel used), spark advance, etc~ From these variables, the engine horsepower is approximatad.

Next, in block 296Ç, the methodology oorrelates the calculated eng$ne horsepower w~th tables ~gored in n~mory to approximate the ~mownt of shift power whlch wculd ke tran~mi~ted tD the cl~ hes in ~he el ~ nicall~ oo~trDlled transmission 100. This table is expeximentally ~erived and can 1so ~e accomplished by ~eans of using a ~ormula.

In block 2968, the nethodology calculates the ~hi~t en~rgy ~hat the clutches in the transmission 100 ~ust absorb. Ihis, as previtusly ~tated, is an approximation ~n block 2970, the me~hodolo9y 1 320060 calculates the shift energy error which is ~hR difference between a desired shift eneryy and ~ha~ calculated as actual shi~t energy m block 2968. The desired Shift energ~ is a ~ n~n ~mount that is predetermdned and stored in memory.

N~xt, in block 2972, the ~ng me oontrD:Ller 3020 ~justs ~he ~hift spark versus the error te~n for u~e ~n the ~ext shift. l~e above "clos~d loop~ methods t~ manage the engine to~ue during wide ~pen throttle shifts are both performed fr3m an "after the fact" perspective.

In o~her wDrds, t~ey are oomputed after the shift has occ~rrE~ and utilized for the next sccurrenoe of the condition.

A technique to handle the "closing the loop" engine torque ~anagement during wide cpen ~hrottle ~hifts ky the engLne oontroller 3020 is also illustrated in Figure 26D, This routine essentially replaces blocks 2942 and 2944 of Figure 26A.

The methodology begins m block 2974 with the calculation of the ~ nt engLne horsepcwer versus time or r.p.m. This aaaLn is an approximation of *he engine horsepsw2r above-described with respect to block 2964.

Next, the methDdology falls th m ugh to block 2975 t~ oorrelate the calculated current eng me horseFow~r to a stored table or formula of curr~nt el ~ cal}y transmissiQn shift pcwerO Ihls is analogaus to what oc~urs in bl ~ 2966 which has ~een described above. The ~ihx3~1Ogy ~hen falls through t~ blcck ~978 tD oompare ~he cNrrent ~hift power ound aurLng the oo~relation m block 2976 with another ~tDr~d expression~ namely, ~he ~oninal deslred power tra oe ~epresenting a nominal shift power curve. Ihis is used ~n block 29B0 to calculate a c~~ 1 320060 pc~er error which i5 equal to the difference l e~een the ~1 desired power traoe and the actlal shi:Et pa~r correlated fram block 2976.

N~t, the ~thodology advances to block 2982 tc~ look up or calculate a spark ~dvance t~ be used ~or this particular ~hift ~ase3 on the calculated pawer error ~EraTI bloclc 2980.

The methodology then advances to blodc 2984 to calculate the sllift energy whi~h will be used for ~urther adjustments when next the rcutine is used. This is ~ ~ lar tD the adjusbments described with respect ~o blocks 2962 and 2972.

Referring tD Figure 26E, a shift taFe for wqde open ~hrcttle (W~T) launch without stall torque management is shown. ~hen th2 operator depresses ~he accelerator pedal for WCT, the throttle z~gle represented by curve 2986 flares up ~nnediately and levels off at W~T, qhls causes engme s ~ Ne~ represented by curve 2987, and ~rk advance, represented by ~urve 2988, to also increase and level off at a predetermined value. Correspondingly, wheel ~rquel represented ~y curve 2989, flares to a peak before it declLnes due to a drop off in t~rque ~ltiplication in ~he torque converter 110. Wheel tDrque is a qualitative measure of engine b~rgue.

~ eferring ~o Figure 26F, a ~hift tape $or wide open thrcttle launch with stall ~orque nanagem~nt accoraing tD the present ~nvention is ~hown. The ~hrottle angle curve 29B6, rises from rest to WO~ as prev~ously described. The Ne curve 2987 alBO increases until it reaches ~ theoretioal Ne ~ersus ~ 1 theoretical ~mount of tDrque on ~he turbine 123. Ih~ spark advance curve 2988 is ccrtinuously adjusted t4 ~c~trDl Ne ~lang ~ desired Ne line (Ne vs.

No l~mit~. This is accamplished by measuring an errvr of Ne versus the desixed Ne Iine and oomputing the error. me spark :, .. ~io 1 320060 advance is their a~ljusted in prc~or~io2~ *c> ~che error by a predeternL~ed method such as l:~y point sl~pe interpolation. A5 a result, Ne is r~naged, effec~ively marlag~ engine to~ue.

Ihis can be qualitatively geen ~n the wh~el torque alrve 298~, ~.ich represents engine tor~ue, by the eli~tion of a pea)c, leav~ a ~ugh but relati~rely flat ~eel torque a~:ve.

Referr~ng to Figure 26G, a ~hift ta~e ~or a first ~o secc~ (1-2) gear upshift wnthout engine tDrque nAnagement is shown. ThrDttle angle is representea by ourve 2990, Thr~ttle ,~ngle is at W~T ~y the time to make the ~hift occur. A shift ti ~ signal represented by curve 2991 denotes the beginning of the ~hiit at point 2992 and the end of the shift at point 2993. m rottle angle is ~t WOT before the beginmng of the shift.

At the beginning of the shift, NeI represent~d by cNrve 2944, and Nt~ represented by curve 2995, rise t~ a peak ~d fall ~o a predetermined value by the end of the ~hift. 'rhe fluid pressure in the apply element (twc/faur shift clutch 308), ~presentYd by curve 2996, s ~ ^~ increase at the kegLnning of the shift and levels off to a fairly oonstant value from approximately half ~ay ~ur mg the shift to the end of the ~hift. Shift energy is calculated as the difference between Nt nunus Nj w~ltiplied ~y the net pr~ssure in the oncoming clutch ~whi~h is ~ctual pressure ninus fill pres~ure). S~milarly, wheel ~orque, represented by curve 299B levels off ~o a fairly oonstant value ~ram appro~imately half way duriny the shift to the end of the ~hift.

Sp2rk ~dvan~e is r~presented by culve 2997 ~nd is fairly constant at the : beginning of the shift and fails ~ its n~rmal value by t~e en~ of the shift.

;~ 1 320060 R~ferr ~ to Figure 26H, the spark a~vance 2997 is ramped down to the predeteLm m ed value at the start of ~hift at po m t 2992. The spark advance 2997 is held at the predetermined value until the end of ~hift at po m t 2993 where it is ramped up to predet~rmlned n~nmal value.

As a result, the fluid pres~ure 2996 in ~he apply element (two/fo~r shift clutch 308~ d~es reach the sane level as above~ but also has a depression or valley 2999 in it until the end of ~ft.

Cbrrespondingly, Nt 2995 falls off more rapidly ~s the transmission 100 changes ge~rs, i.e. first to second ge~r. Thi~ results from a drop in Ne curve 2994, maxing for rougher oontr~l but less shift energy which is calculated ~s described above. Thus, a drop in fluid pressure of the oncomm g or apply clutch and Nt indicate a lower ~hift energy.

}L8i7~C~IC~LL~ CrNlRnLLED, ~ ~DIXM~aIC ~JR/SNISæIo~ S~5TeM Referring to Figure 7A, a block diagram of an adaptive control system 3000 according ~o ~he present mvention is shown. m e adaptive control system 3000 includes a transmission cDntroller 3010 which is capable of both receivlng signals from an engine contrcller 3020 and transmitting ~ignals to this engine oQntroller 3020. ~ le the transmission ~Dnt~Dller 3010 may be readily adapted to cperate without an electronic engine controller, the ~xansmdssion oontroller 3010 aocording ~D the present entodl~=nt takes ~dvantage of the fact tha~ ~Dst automobiles ~oday include ~ digital or computer based engine ~ontr~ller which reoeives and processes ~igna1s rom numerous 6ensDrs.

Fbr example, Figure 27A ~ ~hat b~th the transnission contr~ller 3010 and ~he ~engine controller 3020 receive an input signal inlicative of ~he temperature of the engine ~e.g.~ t~e coDlant temperature). Other 1 320060 exemplary ~ut signals shared ~y these oontrollers inl:lude one or more signals frc~n the ignitic~n ~witch, a ba~ery vol~age level signal, and a signal frotn the !distributor or ot}~er f~r~ng angle o~ntrol n~chanism.

With resp~t to the engine controller 302Q, this csontroller will process ~uch signals and tr~t appr~priate control or camnand 6ignals to varials c~nponents of the engine. Typical oclmputer based eng~ne oontrollers will also generate ~d transmit 2~hriso~y 5ig~als to a diagnostic alert panel ~n the passenger coci=~tment: tD prcvide a ~isual and/Gr audit~ry indication of ~ cu1ar engine oonditions.

As indicated by the reciprocal signal llnes, it should ~e appreciated that the transnission aontroller 3010 includes the capability of ~ cating wnth ~xisting engine controllers. For eYamp~e, it mav be advisable for the transmission controller 3010 to send signals to the engine controller 3020, ~uch as a signal indicating that the transmission 100 is about to ~hift gears. Ps will be . ~ppreciated fra~ the description ~elow, the transmission o~ntroller 3010 is preferably provided with a ~erial co~lmications interfa oe bo permit ~erial data transfers bo be ~ade tetween the transmission controller 3010 and the engine oontroller 3020. Additionally, the ~ransmission controller 3010 n~y also provide diagnostio alert capabilities, ~uch as txasu3mitting 6uitable advisory ~ignals to the vehicle operator (e.g., ~ ~ trar~smi~sion ~.

: Another example of ~o~e ~ignals ~ ch ~y ~e ~ by t~e transmis~ion oontro1ler 3010 End the engine oontroller 3020 are thvse provided by a throk~le ~ensvr 3030 ~nd a brake ~witch ~ensor 3040. The throttle ~ensor 3030 ~ay he any suitable sensor which will ~ive ~n indication of the p~er demand placed upcn the engine by the vehicle ...~ æ~?

.

i . .

1 3200~0 operator, such as a transducer Which will indicate the present position of the thrDttle. Sim1larly9 ~he brake ~witch 3040 may be any suitable ~ensor ~hich will give an indication of the ~pplication of ~he vehicle brake by the cperabDr, ~uch as a o~ntact switch actuated ky the movement of the brake F~lal ~n the vehicle. ~s will ~e ~ ~ reciated from the description ~elow, the tra ~ ssion oontroller 3010 includes ~uitable interfaoe c ~ ts for xeceiving 6iCJnalS from ~he ~hr~ttle ~ensor 3030 and t~e brake switch 3040. Furth~r examples of information ~hared between the controllers are signals o~noerning vehicle ~ype, ~ngine type, ~nifold absolute pressure (M~P) and load.

Cne of the primary functio~s of the transmission controller 3010 is to generate command or oontrol 6ignals for transmission 100 to the solenoid act~ated val~es 630, 632, 634, 636 oontained in the hydraulic system 600 (Figures 5A~L, 8-9) of the transmission lOOo In Figure 27A, these solenoid-actuated v2lves are lumped m ~o a ~olenoid block 3050 which is conta~ned wi ~ n a dashed blo~k labeled UTransmission". This Transmission block represents a suitable transmissian structure which will operate Ln c~njunctian w~th the tr ~ ssion oDntroller 3010, such ~s the transmission lOO des~ribed ~bove. Thus, in ~he transmission lV0, the solenoid block 3050 would oumprise the ~olen~id-actuabed valves 630, 632, 634 and 636. Similarly, the hydraulic oontrol~ block 3060 ~ould 03~prise other valves contained ~n the hydraulic ~ysb~m 600, ~uch as the pressure ~ tor valve 608, the nanual ~alve 604, the T/C oontrol Yalve 612 ~d ~o forth, as ~e~cribed above. Iikewise, the friction elements gear box block 3070 w~uld ~ompri~e the ~ulti-clutch ~ssembly 300 and th~ gear asserbly 500 as described above. Hbwever, it ~hould be appreciated that the adapt~ve oont~ol 8ystem 3000 accDrding to the .~ 0;~ .

1 320060 present mvention may he used in conjunction wlth other ~uitable transmission structures in ~he appropriate application.

Figure 27A also illustrates that the Transmassion block includes a P~NO~DL sensor block 3Q8Q whi~h i~ nesponsive tD a ge~r ~hift lever that ls under qperator oontrol. ~he PR~ODDL senso:r block 3080 may be comprised of one or more ~ui ~ le ~ensors which are ~pable of providing an indi~ation to the transmission oontroller 3010 of the transmission operating n~de sel~ thr~gh the marmal actua~an of ~ gear lever.

In this regard, Figure ~E3 ~hows 1~ o~ntact switch sensors NS ~nd NS~ ~ich are n~mted to ~he transnis~io~n ~ase 102. qhe sensors NSl ~nd NS2 are n~ted in prooc~mity to the ma~ual lever 578 in order to perm~t a spr~nq loaded p~n of these sensors to engage and fol 1 ow the peripheral track of a cap n ~ 578a of t:he manual lever 578.

Referring briefly now to Figure 19, a diagrammatic repres~ntation of the ~ ation of the ~ensors ~Sl/~L1 and ~S2/RL2 i~ sho~n. Specifically, ~igure 19 6hows tha~ the ~ensors NSI/~Ll and N52/RL2 are each provided with a ~pring loaded contact pin, ~uch as pin 3082, which engages the cap ~æmber 57aa of ~he ~anual lever 578. Ihe cap nwcber 578a ~ formed t~ permit metal ~ ~f the ~nual lever 578 t3 ~ through the ¢3p n~mber 578a, ~u~h 2s ~etal areas 3084. These ~ætal areas 30B4 are used t~ provide an electrical ground for the ~ensor. ThNs, as 6hawn in the a3rresp~nding ~able for the figure, each Xs NSl/~Ll and NS2/~2 will produce a digi~al l~w ~r "~ll ~ignal when their ~ r ox oontact pin is in physical oontac~ wi~h one of the netal areas (e.g., metal ar~a 3084j. Fbr ex3mple, in the park ~.

;

1 320060 "P" position, ~th of the "NS" ~n'cacts of ~ensors ~ and NS2/RL2 ~11 be gr~ed, as ~hawn by the correspalding col~s of tlle table under section heading ~P~DDL Me~t~D".

~ e cap m~3r~ 5'78a also incllldes r~n gra:nded ~reas ~ich are fo~ned with tr~pezoidal shaped grooves, ~uch as gr~ave 3086.

Ihese grooves are us~d in coq)nection with a se~c of interr~ contac~s within the 6ensors NS~ snd NS2/RL2 b~ craate the aur-bit digital oode shcwn in the table ~or Figure 19. The~e ~n ~ oont~cts 308B are also illustrated in Figure 19, w~ich provides a ~hematic representation of ~ne of the NS/RL ~ensors~ When the cDntact pin 3082 of either of the ~ensors NSl/~Ll, N$2!~L2 extends into one of the ~ s 3086 o:E cap ~ember 57Ba, then the internal ~RL" oontacts 30B8 of ~hat ~ensor will c1ose and cause the sens~x to produce a digi~a1 high or "1" signal from the electrical tenmina1s of these ODntaCtS. As discussed previously, ~he ~ternal contact~ ~088 provide a set of revexse light ~RL" oontacts which are us0d in oonnection ~ th the reverse or back-up lights of the vehicle, In ~ ation, ac*uation of the gear ~ift lever will cause a rotation vf the manual l~ver 578 to ~he pDsition ~elected by the vehlcle operator. As the n~nual lever 578 rotates, ~he sensDrs NSl/RLl and NS2/RL2 will prcd~ce a four-bi~ oode which will oo~respond to the rotational po~itiGn of the w~nual lever s7e~ The transmiss~on contr~ller 3010 will then dbberni~e ~he mode of operation selected thrcugh the four-bit code pr3~uced by the ~ensors NSl/RLl ~nd NS2/ 2 ReferrLng ~gain bo Figure 27A, the transmission oDntroller 3010 receives input 8ignals from the P~NODDL sensor block 3080, as well as prcduces cu~put signals to a PRNoDDL indicabor oontained in the .

' ~ 1 3200bO passenger ~>ar~ent. ~is PRNCDDL indi~ator ;nay, for ex~Tlple, be a ~Li ta~le light ~ouroe ox other ~pproE7riat~ indicat4r fc~r providing the c~erator with a visual iru~ication of the operating m~de which has been ~elected.

~ igure 27A also indic~es tha~ a pressure :witch block 3090 is connected to the ~draulic c~ntrols block 3060.

In o~nnection w~th tran~nission 100 J the pressur~ ~tch block 3090 w~uld canprise the pressure switc~2es 646, ~48 ~nd 650 (Figures ~A-L ar~ 10). As described above, each of these pressure switches is adapted to provide a si~l indicative of a predetermined pressure level in the oorres ~ g passageways leading to ~elec*ed frictiDn elemen~s. 5pecifically, each of these pressure ~witches pr~vide a digital input ~ignal to the transmission controller 3010 which will indicate whether or not this pressure level has been reached.

Figure 27A also mdicates that the Transmission block lncludes a ~peed sensors blook 3100 w.hich is oonne~ted to the ~riction elements gear box 3070. In oonnectiGn wi~h the transmission 100, the ~peed ~ensors block 3100 oomprises the input or turbm e speed ~ensor 320 and the GUtpNt speed 6ensor 546 which are both n~unted to the transmlssion çase 102. ~bwever, ~s prcv~oosly indicated, other ~ui~able speed sensor ~fan5 may be provided elther wi~hin ~r outside of the transmlssian case 102 in ~der bD ~ de the desired input or turhine and output ~ signals bo the trans~ission oontroller 3010. The speed ~ensors block 3100 may al~o include a 6uitable ~n~ine ~peed 5encor ~e.g., hall effect devioe). ~cwever, if th2 eng~ne oontroller 3020 is already reoeiving 6uch a speed ~ignal, ~hen this ~ignal oould be shared wnth the transmission controller 3010 bD avold unnecessary duplicakion.

' A ~7/;7Z .

`` 1 320060 ~eferring ~o~Figure 27B, a block diagram of the tran~rassion c~mtroller 3010 is ~ha"n. ~e first block i5 the ~erial ~catio~ I interface 3200 ~ich has as its ~ to p~vide a serial cam~ications lir~c with She ellgine ~ntroller 3020.

Ihi s &erial ~catian interface 32Q0 oould also be used b~ pravide a ~erLal ~on~rollers ~n the vehicle. It should alsD be und~rstood that a parallel oommNnication oould alsc be used ~1 ~he appropriate applicati~ns.

In ~he present emb[diment, the ~erial oo~munications interfaoe 3200 utilizes the multiplexing pro~ocol and interfaoe technology of the Chrysler Gollisiorl Detection ("CaD") Serial Data Bus. mis technology is described in the co-assigned U.S.

Patent No. 4,706,0B2, entitled "Serial Data Bus For ~ntermodule Data Communications," which issued on Nbvember 10, 1987; and U.S.

Patent No. 4,719,458, entitled "Mbthcd Of Data Arbitration And Collision Detection In A Data Bus," which is ~ on ~anuary 12, l9B8; and U.SO Pabent Nb. 4,739,323, entitled ~Serial Data Eus For Serial ~ cation Inter~aoe (~CI), Serial Peripheral Interface ~SPI) and Buffe~ed SPI Mbdes of Operationr'~ whi~h issued on ~pril 19, 1988; and U.S.

Patent Nb. 4,739,324, entitled ~Method for ~erial Peripheral Interfa oe ~SPI) m a Serial Data Bus," whi~h issued ~n April 19, 198B; ~ d U.S.

Pa ~ t Nb. ~,742,349, entitled "MRthDd for ~uffered Serial PeriphYral Interfaoe (SPI) in a Serial Data Bus)~ w~i~h will issue an ~qay 3, 1988; and in S~E paper ~. 860389, entitled "Chrys1er S;Dllision l:)etection ~C~D) - A P~volutionary Vehicle NetwDrk," _ _ A .

.

.

1 320060 by Frederick O. R.

Miesterfield, 1986.

Another function for the serial ~ommunications interface 3200 is t~ provide a diagnostic in~rface with the transmiss.ion o~ntroller 3010 so ~hat 6ervice information can ~e provided to 21 ~echnician as a troublesh~oting or naintenance ~id. Still anoth~r function of the ~erial communicaticns int~rface 3200 is to prcvide a oonvenient data or prGgrsm access rcute for in-plant testing of ~he tlansmission oontroller 3010 during the manufacturing process.

The transm1ssion oontroll~r 3010 also includes æveral other interfaoe circuits which are used to reoeive and ccndition input signals fro~ the ~arious s~nsors identified above. For example, the transmission controller 3010 includes a block 3210 which oonta~ns the mterface circuits used to receive signals from the speed sensors 3100 and the throttle sensor 3030. The transmission input speed signal Tepresents the turb me ~ Nt of ~he torque converter 110, ~hile the output speed 8ignal represents the output speed No of ~he vehicle. As descr~bed~ dbove, koth of ~hese ~i~nAls are ganerated by variable reluctance pick-ups (e.g., ~ ~ensors 320 and 526~. me engi~e speed is also sensed by a ~uitable sensor, ~uch as ~ hall effect pick-up in the distributor of ~he engine. This ~echnology is described in c~-assigned U.S.

Patent N~. 4,602,603, en~itled ~Ignition Di~tri~utor-~all Effect Sensor 9wi~ching System and M~thQd,~ whi~h issued on July 29, 1986.

Ihe fubction of block 3210 is ~v provide input ~ignal oonditioning, filtering and o~nversion of ~he speed sensor si~nals to digital logic levels. In this regard, blGck 3210 alsD lncludes an - 2~9 ~"~'i , _l~'' , .. . . . .

' , ' ' 1 320060 in~erface circuit for ~he ~hrottle position ~ensor 3030. Once this ~ignal is pnoperly conditioned, this m ormation ~ay be 6hared wqth the engine controller 3020. The thr~ttle posi.ion ~ensor 3030 will give an indicaticn as tD which angular pDsition the t ~ tle blade ~ s) is in within the throttle body. As with other appropriate ~ t ~ignals, ~he ~hrottle position ~ensor siqnal is ocnditio~ed and ~ed through a unity gain differential amplifier tD p~ovide isolation, as wlll be aescribed bel~w.

m e transmission oontrDller 3010 also Lncludes blocks 3220 and 3230 which represents the interface circuits usad ~D receive various input signals related to the engine ignition and PRNODDL con~ition.

Specifically, the ignitlon related ~ignals include a ~ignal J2, and a ~ignal S2. m e signals related to the PRNODDL conditiDn include the ~neutral start" sigr~l NSl, and "auxiliary neutral ~tart" signal NS2, a "flrst reverse light" signal RLl and a "second reverse light" signal RL2. In acoordance with the pre~erred eniY diment, the control met~odology is responsive tD ~ con~ition that these ignition switch voltage signals are m . The reason for this is that it i5 aFprcpriate to h~ld the transmission oontrDller 3010 in certain predetermuned conditi~ns d~pending on the position of the ignition switch and/or the neutral oontact switsh ~ensDr NSl ~nd/or the suxiliary oontact switch ~ensor NS2.

~ or example, the 8ign~1 J~ represents the ignltio~ v~ltage dhring ~he run and cra~k p~sitions, ~nd this ~ignal will generally be ei~her at a zer~ voltage level or ~t the ~attery voltage le~el. lhe ~ignal S2 represents the voltage in the crank positlo~n only and i~ used to pro~ide ~he ~ecessary vDltage or the ~tarter relay o~il of the 1 320060 engine.

Ib det~nine ~en the ltran~nission 100 is ~n a cranlc ocndition the NSl or neutral start switch signal is ~ensed alc~g with the S2 6ignal to hc)ld the tr~ssion controller 3ûlO in a reset cc ndition during cran)cing dlle tc the possi~bilit~? that the ba~l:ery voltage may dros?

~el~ level ~ed for prq~er oontroller opzratia P,eferring ~ :ifically tc> block 3230, the P ~ )DL ~ dition switches provide input sigTlAls fmn the contact ~wntch ~ensor NSl~ ~he auxiliary oontact ~witch ~ensor ~S2, the flrst reve:rse lig~t RLl and the ~cond reverse light RL2. The P~NCDDL ~witch block 323û oontrols the ~witching of the reverse lights which are co=nccted in 6eries. When the signals ~Ll and RL2 indicate a reverse condition, elec*rical c~rrent from the ignition ~wltch J2 ~s fed through a relay coil w~ich interconnects the reverse lights tD ~attery vvltage via the relay c~ntacts thus turning on ~he backup lights on the vehicle. The PR~DDL switch block also acts Ln corbination with the tw~ oontact swltch 6ensors NS1 and NS2 to determine the shift lever posi~ion, as discussed abo~e~ As ~hcwn in Figure 27B, the transmissian controller 3010 includes a pressure swit~h block 324~ which represents the interface ~ircuit used for receivinq and oonditioninq the pressure level signals from the pressure switches 3090. Each of the pressure ~ tches provide a digital level 6igna1 ~ ch is ei ~ at a z~ro ~r battery v~ltage level d~ ding upon ~t~ r or not a predetermhned pressure level has be~n reached. ffle pressure ~wi~ches ~re ~sed in oonjunc~ion with the low/reverse, cNerdrive ~nd ~wD/~ur 6hift (kickdown) clutch ~ssemblies, and generally oomprise groundin~ swi~ches located in the ~anifold assembly 700. The pressure ~wltch in~erfa oe circuit 3240 provides Lnput ,1, 1 320060 ~ignal oonditiorl~ng, i.e. fil~ ng and buffer~ for tl2ese signals.

For exanple, pull up resistors loca'ced in the n~fold asselT~ly 700 (See Figure 8) to pravide battery volt~ge w~en prPssure switc~ ~P~ are ~ntained in block 3090. I~e state of e~ch of the pres~ure E~itch signals is transn~tted to the tran51Tli5SiO9n oe)ntroller 3010 ~ ~ride fee~ack infoxmation for use in loth n~nitoring clutch ~peratio~ and as an ~ t to the 1 ~ logic and methodolcgy described herein.

The heart of the transmission oon~roller 3010 is contained in the micro oore block 3250. The micro core 3250 includes an eight-bit microcompu~er unit (MCV), a nemory chip for ~torLng the application or operating progran used by the M~U, and an interface chip for addressing and routing signals on the various lines used ~n the micro core bus structure. Thus, for ~ le, ~everal of the ~ignals received frcm the ~ontroller's in~erface circuits are connected to the interface chip, which will then place these signals on the data ~us when the chip is properly addressed by the MCU.

The transmission controller 3010 also includes a watcha~glreset block 3260 which provides ~everal circui~ functions in oonjunction wi~h the nic,~ oore 3250. For example, the watchdog/reset circults 3260 will oDntrol the initial s~art up of ths MCU, watch ~o see if ~he MCU is E~erlv ~ti~, cause a reset of the ~U ~n response to oe~ regulator voltage ~a~diticns, a~i pr~ide a fre~uenc~ divider ~r t~e ~ed ~ignalsO qS2e watc~dog/reset circu~ 3260 also prt7vide an autput to a relay driver blo~k 3270 ~hich ~s used ~o disconr~ct or turn off elec~rical pa~ær to the 601@n~id-a~tuated valves 630, 632, 634 ~d 636 in the solenoid block 3050 sh~ in Figure 27A under predeterm~ned a~mditionsO A 1 320060 One ~f the pr~ncipal functions of i:he micro core 3250 is t~ generate ccn~ or o~ntrol signals for ~ran~nissia~ 100 o ~e ~olenoid driver block 3280, me ~olenoid driver bl~ includes a ~eparate driver circuit for the ~lenoid-ac~lated valve~ 630~ 632, 634 and 636 e:~ntained in the sol~oid blo~c 3050 shc~ ~ Eigure 27A. lhese driver cixcuits generate ~e electrical ~rent ne~essary to operate th ~olenoidactua~ed valves 630, 632, 634 and 636 in resp~nse to the control ignals gene~ated ~ the ~U.

The solenoid dri~rer bloclc 3280 also includes l;pike Ir~nitor circuits whi~h verify ~ eration of th~e ~olenoid driver circuits ~y detecting the pre~enoe of an ir.ductive ~pike (Fi~ure 22E) ~dhiC:h OCCllr5 when 1:he solenoid cx)il is de-energized.

The transnission ~ntroller 3010 alco lncludes a regulator block 3290 and a ~est mode bloclc 3300. me reg~lator block 3290 is used to advise the wat ~ /reset circuit 3260 of predetermined oonditions relating to the operation of the regulator, ~uch as a low battery voltage oondition, a high battery voltage cGndition, an overload condition, or an over temperature oonditicn in the regulator. It is a dual regulator and includes ~ 5V, switched output. Ihe test n~de block 3300 is used to permit a test ~Dde program tD be downl~aded m to the RAM ~æ~ory of th~ MoU for ~esting the trangmi5sion ~yste~.

ReferrLng ~ly tD Figures 28A-28ID A fiChematiC diagram of the trar~i~sic~n wrltroller 3010 is ~. ~h of the ~i~res 28A-2BI generally o~rre~ to c~n~ of t} e c~t bl~lcs ~ in Figure 27B.

nms, f~r e~qple, Figure 23A illustrates the ~ial cc~catian interfaoe 3200 whi~h ~ides a 6erial camn~i~atian l~rdc ~et~een the transmissi~ cont:roller 3010 and the eng~ne oo~troller 3020.

Similarly, ~igure 28B illustrates tl~ U chip 2138 and the is~ ace chip Z135 ~?~3 1 320060 which form pa~ f the micro csore 3250, me rema~nder ~f the m~cro core 3250 is shown in Figure 28C which illustrates the E~ROM chip ~141 and its associa~ed circuitry.

It should al50 be noted that Figure 28C illustrates a watc~dog/reset ~hip ~127 and ~ssociat~d ci~cui~y, which ~ogether s~rresporld to the wa~g/reset c~cuit 3260. A disc~lssion ~f the ci ~ ts contair~ed in the watchdog/reset c~hip Z127 ~ill be presented ~n ~onnection with Pigure 30. 5~milarly, a di~Lssion of ~he circuits oDntained in the intPrfa oe chip Zl35 will be Fq~!sellted m oonnection with Figure 29.

Ccntinuing with an w erview of the schematic diagram for the transmission oontr~ller 3010, Figure 28D illustrates the speesl and throttle ~nput interface circuits 3210.

Figure 28E illustrates the PRNCDDL interfa oe circuits 3230 and part of the ig m tion switch interface circu~ts 3220. Figure 28F illustrates the regulator circuit 3290 and the relay driver CircNitS 3270. Figure 28G illustrates the solenDid driver clrcults 2880. Figure 28H illus~rates ~he pressure ~wltch in~erface circuits 3240. Figure 28I illustrates an additional ~erial ocmmunication circuit 3400 and a diagnostic oommum cation ~ircuit 3500.

~ eferrLng ~pecifically to ~igure 28A, a schematic diagram of the ~erial ~ ications interface 3200 is ~hown. lhis çonmunications interfa oe actually pxavides ~or tWD 0erial oomm~nic2ticn channels ~or the tran~mission oontroller 3~10. Ihe ~irst serial ~ cation chaDrel 3201 is based uFon the Chrysler Cbllisi~n Detection (C~D) t~c ~ logy identified ~bove. Ihis ~Qchnolcgy is e~bodled in the ccmm~nic~tions chip Z14 which provides the in~ellige~ce to know ~hen it has sent a ~essa~e ~ut ontD a ~erial data bus and whe~her ~r no~ it has 1 320060 won acoe ss to ~he bus. This bus oomprises the two çonductors labeled ~(C2D)~" and n (C~D)". It ~hould be noted ~rom ~he above that this 6erial c ~ cations bus ccmprises a ~ouble ended or differential ~ignal transmission link with ~he engine 03n~xoller 3020 ~or any other appropriate oDntr~ller in the vehicle which i5 oon:nected to the kus structure). me ~ cations chip Z14 receives ~ignals transmitted from the ricrDoocFuter chip Z138 (shown in Figure 28s) via its connection tD the "PD3" pDrt of the nicrocomputer. S$milarly, ~ignals are transmitted from the ~ cations chip Z14 to the nicroccmçuter chip Z138 via the ~PD2" pDrt.

It should be noted that the ~ommunications chip z14 is provided with a clock sign21 "E**" which is derived from the ~CU chip's Z138 ~ystem clock, na~ely the "E" Clock. As shown in Figure 28C, tw~ NAND gates Z195 are connected $n ser$es to double buffer and double invert the E clock ~ignal. Signal transmissions from the MCU ~hip Z138 are initiated by the M~U ~hip Z138 which pulls down ~ "Control" line of ccmmunica~ Qns chip Z14 via a oommand signal transmitted ~rom the "PD5" port. Hbwe~er, ~he ~ cations chip Z14 will actually cDntrol the transfer of data fram the ~ou chip ZI38 by pr w iding a ~SCLK" clock ~ignal to the ~U's i'PD4" port, whlch will clock the data in and out of :the ~J c~ip.

I~ ~h~uld also be n~ted that the communications chip Z14 is turned off wh~n ~he transmission ~on~roller 3019 is in a ~top mode, such ~s after ~he ignition key i~ turnei off. m e otmmunications chip Z14 is turned off thrcugh the ~SWt5V~ power ~upply. Ihe SW/5V ~ltage ~evel is ~erived from a dual regulator Z215 contained in the regulator circuit A ,~,, 1 320060 3290 sh~m ~n Figure 2BF.

Specifically, the SW/5V su~ply is ~witched on ox enabled ~y the Mf~J Z138 in resp~se to 'che ignition swi~ch.

Figure 28A also illustrate~ the ~eo~d ~rial ~T~cations channel which is generally desi~lated ~ the refer~ce ~ral 3202, erlal o~nr~cations ~annel 3202 is generally c~prised of a tr~t line labeled "SCI-XMT" and a reoeive line la~eled "9CI-REC".

Each of these tran~nit and reoeive lines ~nclude an RC filter and a buffering inverter Z15.

The transmit line SCI-XMT is ccnnected to ~he ~PD1" port of the mi ~ ter ~hip Z138, while the re oeive l;ne ~CI-REC i~ connected ~o thei~PD~" port of the ~icroeo~puter chip. This ~ec~nd serial s3mm~nications channel may be used for example t~ dçwnload appropriate best programs into the nicrocomputer chip Z138, 6uch as for end of line testing at the n~nufacturing facility. In one form of the present invention, the SCI-REC receive line iR used in oonjunction with the test mLde to transmit a signal t~ the mic ~ ter chip Z138 which wlll cause a ~oM resident boot load program insîde the mirrcocmçuter ~hip to oontrol ~he receipt and Lnitial executi~n of ~he best pr~ rams.

Referring to Figures 28E-2BC, ~ ~chematic diagræm of the micro oore 3250 is ~ ~ . The micro oore 3250 ~or the transmission contr~ller 3010 generally comprises the micrDconpute¢ 3251 (chip Z138), the interface 3252 (chip Z135), and the ~EmDry 3253 (chip Z141). In ~he present ~mbcd~nent, ~he mlcrcccmputer chip ~138 is a MbtorDla eight-bit n~crooomputer chip ~Part No. 68HCll hich ~ ludes 256 ky~es of RAM remory ~and 512 bytes of EPRoM:terasable el ~crically F¢oo¢ammable read anly ~emory). Hbwever, it ~hould be apprecia~ed ~hat other ~uitable mi~roc~uter chips Dr miCrocan~ter CirCUits ODuld be e~!ployed ir~ tl~e appropriate application. Simllarly, the m~mD~y 3253 (chip ~141) ~ay be :

A ~G 1 320060 any suitable memory chip ~r circuit hav m g suf.ficient capability to store the computer programs which operatP in acoordance with the oontrol snethodology discussed m detail above~ ~uch as an Intel ~7C257 n~mory chip, ~ s will be appreciated from ~igure 29, the inter~ace 3252 (chip Z135) may be any suitable chip or æ t of chips/cil~lts ~hich generally p ~ de the circuits illustrated m ~his Fi~ure. As will ~e discussed belc~ he interfa oe 3252 (chip Z135) ancludes 6~veral ~n~ernal registers for facilitating rapid comm~nications between ~icrDcoTputer 3251 (chip Z138) and several of the other cLrcuits contained i~ the transmission controller 3010, such as ~he pressure switch m terface circuit 3240. In the present embodinent, the various circuits illustrated in Figure 29 have been combined into a single chip oonfiguration, na~ely interface (chip Z135~, to conserve space on the circuit board for the transmission oDntr~ller 3010.

Each of the pins or ports of ~ ~arious chips used in the m~cro core 3250 have been appropriately labeled, ~D that the various circult oo ~ ctions be ~ these chips and the other circuits contained m the transn~ssion controller 3010 may ~e readily discerned from each of the Figures 28A-28I. For example, the ~Control" and ~Idle" lines of the cqmmunication chip Z14 in Figure 2~A are al~o ~hown t~ be labeled ~PA7" and "PDl" respectively. As will be appreciated fro~ Figlre 28B, both of these signal lines are crrufK~be1 t~ the in~erface (chip ~135~, as this ~hip cDnt~in~ both the ~A7N and ~P~ labeled ports.

:The micr~xx~lut:r 3251~ ~chip Z13~) ~nd the interfaoe 3252 : ~chip Z13S) ccTmunicate with each ~ther ~ia an address/data bus labeled ~ADP-AD7". m e address/data lines in this bus are bidirectional to , A ~æ~ . ~ .

1 3~0060 alk1w the transfer of both ~ddress and data ~nformation between the micro~uter 3251 (~hip Z138) ~ ~ e interfaoe 3252 (chip Z135) .

As illu5trated in ~igure 28C, the ~remory (c~hip Z141) iB also ~ed to this address/dat~ hls~ Ihe m3rDry (chip ~141) is .~lso a~ted to the micr~ater 3251 (~p Z138) via an a~dress ~us which i~ ~prised of .~ss lines "A~_Al51'.

Thræ of ~ese Rddress l~nes, narr~ly address lines A13-A15, ~re alsc ~ to the ~terfac~3 3252 (chip Z135) for ~elec~ partic:ular register ox RAM locatiorLs within this chip.

Referring to a portion of Figure 2~D, a sc}~natie diagram of the E~ed and throttle ~t circuits 3210 are sha~. mese circuits are desianated as 3212, 3214 and 3218. me 6peed input signals are labeled "Ne/n~rbo", "Ne", "N~" and "Nt". I~le ~ttle ~nput signals are labeled The Ne/Turbo and Ne signals are used in an ~pplication ~nvolving a turbo equipped engine, whlch provides ~ dual pick-up in the distributor of the engine. In thi~ sibuation, both the NE and NE/Turbo signals are used to indicate engine speed. Xbwever, ~ le these signals provide the ~ame engine 6peed data, the~e ~i~nals are cut of phase w~th each other. In this regard; it ~houl~ be noted that in distributors baving a single enqine ~p~ed pi~, only the Ne &ignal w~uld be usæd I~y t}~e trar~ssio~ oontroller 3010.

Figure 28D ~ that t}2e ~nput interfaoe ci~t for the Ne/n~o ~ignal ~prises a law pass filter 3212, which in~ludes r~sistor Rgl and capacitors C90 ~d C32.

Ihe filtered NE/Tur~o ~ignal is then direct~ to the "P82" p~rt of the iE~terfaoe 3252 ~d~p ~135). ~ sini:ilar filter r~ rk 3214 is alsc~ pmv~ded ~or the ~ngine E;peed ~i~nal nN ". l~wever an inverting ~lifier z15 is al~o included as a buffer to provide the fast rise and ~' ' ' 1 320060 fall times reouired by the m1croccmputer 3251 ~chip Z13~), as ~11 as noise imrnu~ty.

The "No" m put signal represents the output speed of the transmission, ~hile the "Nt" signal represents the input or turbine speed of the transnussion. Ihese signals are first fil~ered and then transmltted to a 7ero crossing detector circuit which inclu~es the ~cmparator Z47. Due ~o ~he 6ensitivity of these signals (e.g., amplitude of 500 millivolts peak o peak)~ each of the ~a~parators Z47 is provided ~ith a positive feedback l~op for adding hysteresis cflpabilitv to these zero crossing detector circuits. F~r exam~le, resistor R49 and c~pacitor C48 pr~vide this hysteresi~ capabilit~l ior the output speed signal No. It should also be noted th~t the filter circu~ts for these two speed signals use a ground si~nal labeled "A/~NB". This gl-cund signal represents a d ean ground siynal which is derived from the mlcr ~ ter 3251 Ichip Z13~) to heighten the sensitivit~ of these filter circuits. Oncs the cutput ~peed signal No is properly conditioned, it is transmitted to the "IC2" port of the microco~puter 3251 (chip 2138). In oont~rast, the oon~i~ioned input transmission sp~ed signal Nt is tr~rsmitted to the "~TI" port of the watchdo~/reset chip Zl27 eshcwn in Figure 28C).

The THR and TH-GND signals are used to indicate the tllrottle position ~ the vehicle. 5hese signals are p ~ ssed thxough a unit~ gain differential a~plifier circuit, ~ ich is general~y designated by the reference nu~era3 32;6. This diffexential amplifier circuit is used to ~ense the gTcund potential ~f the ~hrottle pvsi~ion ~ens~r, as well as sense the p~tentiGm~ter wiper signal ~f this sensor. The cutput o~ the differential ~mplifier circult 3216 is directed to the "PEP" port o~ d~7y ~4~ 1 320060 the microcomputer 3251 ~chip Z138). Sjnoe the throttle position signal is an analog input ~ignal, it ~hould be appreciated that the nlcroco~puter 3251 (chip Z138) mcludes ~n mternal analog to disital converter to permit further processmg of this ~i~1 in accordance with the control methodology discussed abo~re.

This is further illustrated in conjunction wnth Figure 33 wher~ the discimilar grounds of the engine c~ntroller 3020 and transmission controller 3010 are graphically depicted. Attention is i~vited also to circuit 3216 in Figure 28D. Dis~jmilar grounds can gener~te a variabl~ reference to gr~und. m is is a functi~n of variable resistance and inductance ir. the ~ehicle and its electrical system. me vari~ihle ~ramd re~erence could be ~ significant percentage of the span of the output voltage frcm t~e throttle position sensor. Therefore, withnut the feature of the shared throttle position sensor circult, two sensors w~uld be needed.

Figure 28D also shohs a portion of the ignition switch i~terface ~ir~tits 3220. Specific~lly, Figure 28D shcws the interface circuit 3218 for the ignition switch signal "J21'. The interface circult 3218 pr~vides a lc~ pass filter whose output is dixected to the "FJ2" port of the watchdogtreset chip Z127, Iurning to ~igur2 28E, the last of ~he i~nition switch interface circuits 3220 ls shcwn. Specifi~ally, an interfaoe c ~ t 3222 for the ~rank only ignition Eignal "S2" is ~ . ~he interface circuit 3222 includes a voltage divider tR78 and R80), ~ low pass filter (R61 and C79), and a ca~arator Z47. 191e voltage ~ivider is used ~o decr~ase the voltage level of the S2 signal, so that it does n~ exceed the znax~n~n input voltage of the ccr~a:rator.

Ihe ~utput of the c~arator Z47 is ,~ ~,0 ~ .

1 320060 connected to the "FS2~" port of the watchdog/reset chip Z127. The 52 ignition si~nal is used to hold the microcomputer 3251 (chip Z138) in a reset m~de during ~he cranking of the engine. Thi5 provisi~n is implemented for pNrposes o~ aocuracy, since it is possible tha~ the batt~ry voltage in the vehicle could dip down ~uring the cra~k mg of the enqine.

~c ~n:oe m A ~T ~mc N :IN RE~ ~ Figure 28X also illustr~tes the PRNODD~ m ~erface circuits 3230.

Speciric~lly, Figure 28E shows the circuits used to mterface the neutral start sigrals "NSl" and "NS2", as w~ll as the circuits used to mterface the reverse light signals "RLl" and "~L2". Each of these si~nals are di~gital signals ~hich wil~ generally be at a zero or batte~ voltage potential. Acoordinglt~, each of ~he lr.terfac~ circuit~ fcr the -signals include a pair of voltage di~ ing resistors lin addition to a filter) for ~etting ~he batte~ oltage level dcwn to ~ 5 volt potential. In this regard, it shculd be noted that each of these input siynals are ooupled ~ the igni~ion ~itch s~gnal 'iJ~" through suita~le pull-up resistors (e.g., R82 and R83) to ensure that these ~ignals wlll pro~ide battery voltage potential when their oorresponding switches are open.

While the ~ itioned NSl sign21 is transmitted t~ the ~PE5" p~rt of th~ microccmputer 3251 ~chip Z138), this signal also provides a gating ~ignsl t~ the transistDr Q93. The transistor Q93 is used to disable the S2 signal from causLng a reset of the micro~cmputer 3~51 Ichip 3138). In other words, whPn the contact switch NSl is cpen, the ..

'A .

': :

1 320060 NSl signal will be HIGH, thereby causing the transistor Q93 to conduct and pull d~wn the input voltage to the co~parator Z47. This pro~ision is to er.sure that the S2 signal does not cause a ~eset unless the ~ransmlssion 100 is either ~n neutral or in Fxu-k. This is also graphically depicted in Figure 34 and its acccnçx~ying char~ o~ the states of the contacts, devices ~nd cutputs.

Referring to Fi~ure 28F, a schematic diagram of the regulator circuit 3290 and the relay driver circui~ 3270 is shown. Additionally, ~iyure 28F shows two cacacitors (C228-C233l w~ich are used to tie the yrcunding potential of the circuit board for the transmission controller 3010 to the aluminu~ case which surrounds ~he circuit board. IhiC optional feature may be used to proviae additional RF or electromagnet.ic cars)atibility for the transmission controll~x circuitry.

~L ~ me regulator circuit 3290 shown in Fiuure 28F generalIy comprises a dual 5 volt regulator chip Z215 which recei~s a voltage input signal fran the vehicle battery and a canTand signal frcrn the watchdog/reset chip Z127.

Ihis ccn~nand signal, labeled 'IPSEI~A*", is used to enable or sw~tch o~ and off the "V~2" output of the regulator chlp under M~U conma~d whRn ignition is off.

The V~2 output of this chip provides the "BW/5V'l 6upply 8ignal discussed above. This provision of a switchable 5 ~olt ~upply is partlcularly advantagecus in a vehicl~ application, as it permits a ~uhstantial portion of the peripheral circuitry (or clrcuitry with ~ low priorityJ ronnected to the m~cro oore 3250 to be ~hut down whe~ the vehicle ignition is of ~hus reduc~ng current dx~w on the battery. This can also be used under conditions ~23~2 ' ': . , ' ' ' 1 320060 requiring an orderly shutdow~ ~or purposes of storing la~t-sensed data etc. A continuous voltage o~tput c~n ~e provided to hi~h priority circuits such as a memory chip or a M~V. It can also be used to keeF high priority circuits energized in a l-KEY-OFF-- situation, if desired, to allow for example the control of gear ~elec*ion/display while ~he engine is o~f.

5~N ~ ~æR _ _ .

~ he shutd~n relay driver circuit 3270 includes a self protecting, high side s~.tch chip Z219 which is responsive t~ a "RLYCN~" oontrol signal from the watchdog/reset chip Z1~7. Specifically, the relay control signal will cause the battery volta~e to be transnitted to the "VCUT" port of the switch chip Z219. ~his ~oltage output from the chip Z219 is referred to as the "RELAY/P~" signal, as it provides the power necessarv to operate the shut dGwn relay 3272 sho~n in Fioure 30.

The shut down relay 3272 is used to cut power off to the solenoid dri~r circuit~ 3280 to thereby achieve a "LIMP-IN" mLde previously d~scribed.

Specifically, ~en the shut down relav 327~ is closed, the "SW/BhTT" signal sh~.~l in Figure 28F wlll ke transmitted to the soleno ~ driver circuits 3280. Hbwever, before this SW/BhTT signal is trar.smitted to the solenoid driver circuits 3280 it is processed through ~onditioning circuit 3274 . me oonditi ~ circuit 3274 includes a diode "D224" which is used t~ cla~p ~ back EMF of ~he ~olenoid ~oils when the shut aDwn nelay 3272 is cpen. me ~onditi~ning circuit 3274 also includes a pull down resisbor R225 to ensure ~hat the line is pulled to ground desplte the states of ~he sDlenDid driver circuitrY. A capacitor C223 ` ~, 1 320060 is also provided to ~uppress any line ~nductive energy spikes that muoht occur in response to the swltching of the tran~mission solenoids.

~5E oF DIoDES IN ~N INPUT CIiCCIT ~0 ~g~ ~Lhh~n~Gæ ~ AN ACrIUE }{LL~Dt~N NEl~O~ OVI~E~ IN A E$~L E9G~L~R .

It should be noted that both the ~REI~Y/PWR" and "SW/BAIT" signals provide input signAls to ~he conditicning circu~t block 3310.

In the present emkodiment, the conditioning circuit block 3310 empl~ys thick film packasing technology to effectiv~ly create a single ccmpact chip for the circuits contain~d in this block. The conditioning circuut bloc~ 3310 is ~ ~rised of four identical con~ition~ng circuits 3320-3350. ~ach of these oonditioning circuits m clude an RC filter (R300 and C200) and a pair of voltage di~riding resistors ~R301 ~r,~.

R302). S.ince ~he Sh'/AATT and REkAYtYWR ~ianals are at ~he batte.rv volt~ge potential, the voltage dividing resistorc cut this voltage le~.~e' doh~ to the S volt logic level used in the ~cro core 3250. This i~, also further illllstra~ed in Figure 31 which shows this concept in slmpler form.

It is al~o important to note that each of the con~iti~nina circuits 3320 3350 include a diode "D300" which connects the inpu' sigr~l of each of these clrcuits t~ the SW/5V ~upply linR. miS is a icularly advantageous feature of the present inven~ion, ~ecause the regulator chip Z215 will acti~ely pull ~he SWt5V signal level dcwn to gxound during .3n over v~ltage ~ondition ~e.g., where the batter~ voltage exceeds 30 volts)~ :~coDrdingly, the diode 300 will ~lamp the batter~ voltage level input signals to the oDnditioning circNits 3320-3350 down to ground durmg such an over ~ltage con~ition. ~his ~.~11 prevent A b2 3 ~ .

: ' ' , : ' 1 320060 excessive input signals from being transmitted to the micro cGre circuits 3250 via ESD pro'~ection diodes. In this regard, for ~xample, the REL~Y/Ph~ signal is transmitted to the "PB~" port of the interface circult Z135 of the ~lcro ~ore 3250 through ~he c~nditloning circuit 3330. This feedback pr~vision will enable the micro ~ ter 3~51 (chip Z138) to oonfirm the ~tatus of the relay driver circuit 3270 and is also used ~ile tes~ing ~he watchdog reset.

OP~N ~DOP CX~n~L OE AND SPIRE PlaDrn~R YoR S~N~ID o~IL ~UV~RS Referring to Pigure 28G, a schematic diagram of the solenoid dri~er circuits 3280 is sh~wn~ The solenoid driver circults 3280 co~prise an individual driver cir~1it for each of the four solenoidactuated valves 630, 632, 634 and 636 contained in the transmission nAmel~, driver circuits 3282-3288, Each o these dri~ter circuits i~ pro~ided Wit]l t~ input signals, one of which is derived from the interface 3252 (o~ip Z135) and the other of which is deriv~d fro~ the microcomputer 3251 (chip Z138). For example, in the ~river ~ircuit 3~82, an enablem~nt command signal is tr~ns~itted from "PC6" port of the interface 3252 (chip Z135~, Rnd a current oontrol ~igr21 is trar.smitted fro~ the "OC2" port of the micr3ccmputer 3251 ~chip 2138). The OC2 6ignal is derived fron an internal timer of the micrDccmputer 3251 (chip Z138). Specifically, the OC2 oontrol signal ~enerated by ~CU r functions provides a series of pul~es whlch have an appropriate ~u~y cycIe for causin~ a pulse wldth modulation of the current bD the solenoid coill ~uch as ~he underdrive IUD) ooil, in ~ddition a "pull m" pulse is MCV t~mer generated when ~hR ~Dlenoid ooil is first turned or.

.

æ~S 1 320060 When the microcomputer 3251 (chip Z138) cauces the interace 3252 ~chlp Zl35) to~latch its "PC6" port into a HI~H stzte, the driver circuit 3282 will be enabled thr~gh the gating on of trar.sistors Q177 and Ql69. The gating on or HIGH pulse of the OC2 signal ~ill permit the current in the UD solenoid coil to charge up ~h~ugh the transistor Q179. Then, when the pulse of the OC2 ignal is turned off, curren~ thr3ush the UD solenoid coil will circulate in the path created by the diode D168 and transistor Q169. The re~llt will be an efficient slow deca~l of the current thrcugh the UD ~olenoid ooil~ At this point, it ~hould be noted that the junction betw~en the Darlington pair transistor Q169 an~ the M~S~l resistox Q179 ~ill be at a potential a~cve the potential of the SW/BATT supply signal.

Subsequently, when the microco~puter chip Z138 cause~ the "PC6" port of the interface 3252 ~chip Z135) to switch to a LGW state, the transistor Q177 will switch off and cause a rapid decay o current thr~ugh the UD solenoid oDil. t~hen the yate signal is removed fror.~he transistcr Ql77, it should be noted that the Darlinston pair trar~istor ~ Q169 will also turn off, This rapid decay of currer.t will als~ cause the v~ltaye on the con~octor 3289 to xise abov~ the SW/BATT potentia'.

At some point (e.g., 25 vol~s), this rising potential will c~use the Darlington pair transist~r Q169 bo turn on again bo ~imit the spike of this rising vol~ge ~ tial. ~bwever, it is important to nnte that the v~ltage potential on condvctor 3289 is tr~ns=itted through the diode ~D174" ko the zener diode~"Dl73". At a predetermined potential (e.g., ::24 vDlts), ~he zener diode D173 will ~reakdown and cause ~urrent to flcw through th~ transistor Ql68 to the "PB3" port of the interface 32S2 Ichip~Zl35).

~ ~ A ~ 3~ . ~ ~ ", ~ ., 1 320~60 This spike monitor circuitry is ~n important aspect of the present invention, as it all~.~ the microconputer 3251 Ichip Z135~ to determine whether the solenoid coil i5 Ln a shor~ed or open condi~icn.

In other w~rds, the spi~e nitor circui~ry of the ~olenoid driver circuits 3280 will tell the microcomputer 3251 (chip Z138) that ~he solenoid coil has indeed turned off. In ~his r~gard, it shDuld be noted that the SW/BAIT sional continually keeps the ~ransistDr Ql68 in a ccnducting conditi~n, so that the current from oon~uctor 3289 will pass directl~ throuqh its emitter and collector junctions for ~ransmission to the "PE3" port of the Lnterface 3252 (chip Z135).

It should be appreciated that the diode ~D173" is connected to each of the driver circuits 3282-3288 thrcugh appropriate diodes (e~ ~l75 and D202), 5~ that the nucrocomputer 325i (chip Z138) will be ablc to detect the pre$ence of a voltage spike from each of these driver circults. While each of the dri~Ter circuits 3282 are s~stantially identical, the cGnnections employed ~n the driver circuit 3~82 will be briefly described.

The OC2 port of the micm computer 3251 (chip Z138) is c~nnec.ed to the gate of the M~6FET transistor Q179 thrcugh the resistor Rl61.

me source of the transistor Q179 is connected t~ grcund, while the drain of W s transistor is oonnected to ~ne end of the UD solenoid coil. Ihe other end of the UD solen~id coil is oonnected ~o the ~nction between the S~/BAIT p~te~ial an~ the diode pair D168. The common emitter junction of the Darlingtcn pair transistor QlG9 is connected across the reverse bias diode in the diode pair D168, while the c~llector junction of the transistor is cDnnected to the drain of the M~SFET transistor Q179. A capacitor C248 is ccupled across the 0 A - 1 320060 collector and base junctions of the ~arlington pair transistor Q169 for stabilit,~, ~ile a resistor R298 is connected across the base and emitter junction of this transistor to provide sufficient current for spike monitor operation. The base of the transistor Q169 is alsG co~nected to the collector junction of the transistor Q177 through the resistor R178. The kase of the transistor Q177 is coupled to the "PC6" port of the interface circult Z135 throu~h ~le transistor R176. I~le emitter junction of the tr~nsistor Q177 i~ connected to ground. T~e con~uctor 3289 is connected to the collector junction of the transistor Q177, ar.d is coupled to the diode D174 through one of the di~des labeled "D175", Fi~ure 35 is an illustration of closed loop and open loop control of solenoid coil driverc showing basic differences between the circults and basic simllarities between the voltage outputs. ~ elec~ronic driver circuit. for the open loop control of the energi~atior of a solenoid coil, forming part of an electramagnetic solenoid actuator val~-~, in response to a control pulse produced ~y a o~r.trol circuit and where the predeterm med ~chedules are a function of the inductance and rer,istance of the coil, the desired peak GUtpUt voltage from the coil and the desired avera~e holding current thr~ugh the coil.

The principals of the injector driver circuit are also described m co-assigned V.S.

Patent No. 4,631,628, issuæ ~n December 3, 1986 ~ eferring to Figure 28H, a schematic ~iagra~ of the pressure switch interface circults 3240 is shown. The pressure swltch m terface circuits 3240 are generally emkodied in a condition~ng circuit ~lcck 3242 which is identical to the conditioning circuit block 3310 in the - 238 A ,;~ 1 320060 present ~ ent. Thus for ex~mple, ~he conditioni.ng circuit blcck 3242 mcludes a conditioning circuit 3244 for the "RDPR-SW"' pressure switch signal, It sh~uld also be noted that the c~nditioning circuit block 3242 mcludes a oondition ng circult 3246 which has an mput signal labele~ "CK/TRANS/LIG". Thi.s mput ~i~nal is generated in the diagnostic alert circuit 3500 sh~n in Figure 28I.

Referring to Figure 28I, the diagnostic alert circuit 3500 is shown to be provided wlth an illpUt 9ignal labeled "FSW/B~T", which representF the filtered b~ttery voltage level produced at the output of the cond.~ioninq circuit 3320 shc~ in Figure 28~. As discucsed previously, thP SW/B~IT si.snal indicates that ~he battery voltage is ~ein~ supplied to the solenoi~ driver circuits 3280. The conditioning circuit 3320 is used to drcp this vDltage level d~.~ to a usable 5 v~lt logic level which is fe~. back to ~he "PC7" port of the interface 3252 (chip Z135) thrcugh the diode "Dl62" of the diagnostic alert ciruit 3500.

Ihe FSh'/BATT signal is tr2nsmutted through an invertin~ :

amplifier Z15 which is use~ ~.o gate the MLSFET transistor Ql65. I~le transistor Q165 produces the CX~TRANS/LTG si~nal which may be use~ to alert ~he Gperator that poher has been cutoff fr~m the ~ransnussion solenDid-actuated Yalves 630, 632, 634 and 636, such as through a light on a diagnostic panel in the passenger ccrç=rtment. In an application invDiving th~ u~e of the diagnostic alert circuit 3500, the oonditionins circuit 3246 shown in ~igure 28H will provide a ~eedback ~ignal bD the "PAll' port of the intexfaoe 3252 Ichip Z135?~ to oonfirm ~hat the di~gn~tic panel has ~een prcvided with the appropriate si~nal.

~ c~3 ~ :

,' , ' 1 320060 Pigure 28I also shows an additional o~m~Lnication circu~t 3400 which prc~ides a direct serial tran~nission link ~r~n the transnission controller 3010 to the engine oontxoller 3020~ Such a separate transmission chc~nnel m~y be employe~ when it is desired tD s~nd hiah priority or rapid signals to the engine ovntroller 3020. For eY~nple, m ~ne applications it ~y desirable for the ~ranc~ission cDntroller 3G10 to advise the engine controller 3020 that a gearshift is about to take place. In such a situation, the nicroc3mpute:r 3251 (chip Z138) wvuld cause an appropriate signal to be placed on the "PB7" port of the interface 3252 tchip Z135) to qate on ~he transistor Q243. ~e gatina on of the trans-stor Q243 ~ill generate the "TRDLIN~" signal through the filter network comp~ised of re.sistor 245 and capacitcrs 244 and L46.

Referring again to Fig~re 28H, the test ~nde circuit 3300 is shown to include the conditioning circ.~lit 3350. W~en a testing n~xl~ for the tr~n~nission ~ontroller 3010 is desired, the "test" input signal wlll be HIGH, thereby c~sing a LCW "mode~/lir" signal to be txans~ltted to the ~icrccomputer chip Z13~. This signal will c~se the nlcrocomputer chip Z138 to ~nitiate the test m~de s~quence discus.sed above.

Referr mg ~D Figure 29, a block diagram of ~he interface chlp ~135 is shown. qhe pin designations shown in this figure le.g., "PC0-PC7") generally oorrespond bo the p m designations shown for the interface 3252 (chip Z135) in Fi~ure 28B. There is ane exception to this o~rrespondenoe. In Figure 2BB, ~he pins fo~ Port-A are designatæ "AD0-AD7" whereas, in Figure 29, these pins are des.ignated "D0-D7".

In addition to P~rt~A, the interface chip Z135 also includes t~ other:ports, namely Port-B (i.e~ p ms PBO~PB7) and Por~-C (i.e. ~ins ` A ~5~d .

.

.

1 320060 PC0-Pr.7). Pins PB0-YB3 o Port-B are connected to the edge detect input c~rcults 3600. The ~dge detect circui~s 3600 provide a way to capture the occurrence of ar. event, such as the ~urniny off of a coil of z solenoi.d-actu~tted valve, at a time ~en the microccmputer 325~ ~chip Z138) might otherwise be o~cupied~ Thus, for exarple, pin PB3 of the interface 3252 (chip Z135) is connected to the spike monitor circui~ry of the solenoid driver circuits 3280 ir. order to transmit a Eignal mdicative of ~he turning off ~f a ooil of a solenoid-actl~tted ~alve to the nucroccmputer 3251 (chip Z138) thr~ugh interface 3252 (chip Z135). When such a signal i~ received, the interface 325~ ~chip 2135~ can generate an irtterrupt signal IRQ* which will ~tform the microco~pu~er 3251 ~chip Z138) that event inforn~ttion has been receiv~d for ~urther processing The interface 3252 ~chip Z}38) also includes a pluralit~ of countdc~n timers 3602, ~hich are responsive t~ the "E" clc,ck siqnal of the mlcrooamputer, through the E-clc~k prescaler circult 3604. Th~ output from these timers may be transmitted to pins PB4-PB7 thL~c~gh t~e t.;~er output circuitrJ 3606, in the ~vent that the ti~er features of th~ interface chip are des~--ed to ~e employed. Otherwise, the pins P~4-PP' ~ay be used as general purpose cutput pins.

While Port-C of the interface 3252 (chip Z135) oould be used as a low order address port, ~he mode ~elect signal "~S" is used in the preferred embodimen~ bo oonfigure this pDrt as an ~utput port. In this cc~lfiguration, the address ~trobe signal ~AS" frcm the microccmputer chip Z138 is used tD ccnrand ~he address latoh 3608 bo ~apture low order address m foxmation at AD0-AD7 of the lnterface 3252 (chip Z135~.

_ 4/ .

: .

~' ,, ' - ~ .

1 320060 The inter~ace 3252 (chip Z135) also includes a random access mfm~ry c.;rcuit 3610, a plurali~y of internal re~isters 3612 and a decoder loyic circuit 3614. Particular locations in the RAM 3610 and particular mternal registers 3612 may be accessed thrsugh ~he deccder logic circuit 3614, which is resp~nsi~e ~o the address signal pins "P13-A15" in additi~n to the latched lcw ~rder address A~-~ . The intennal registers 3612 are used to provide access and control of the vari~us ports and oountF~rs for the interface 3252 ~chi~ Z135).

Peferring to Fi~ure 30, a block/schen~tic diagram of the watchdog/reset circult Z1,7 is ~hown in association wl~h some of the circuits oonnected to ~he watchdcg/reset circuit Z127, The .First function o~ the watchdog/reset or "~" circuit is to noni'~r the cFeration of the microcomputer 3251 (chip Z138) by requiring the ~V to periodically tranSmlt a signal to the h~ circuit. m is signal is designated "~DG" in both Figures 28C and 30. If the h~ circuit does not receive the WDG signal within a predetermmed time windcw, then the h~ circuit will kncw that the MCU mav not be functioning as desired.

However, before the WD circuit wqll react to this situation, it wlll wait a predeterm~led amount of delay tine ~o see if proper functicr.in~ of the ~U will be quickly restored. If the WDG signal is not recei~e~ by the end of the delay period, then ~he WD circuit will transmit a "RLYC~" 6igna1 bo the relay driver circuit ~219 w~ich will cause the ~ ~elay 3272 to remove electrical power from the solenoid driver clrcuit 3280.

In this regard, Figure 30 shcw~ that the ~D CLrCuit includes a wnndcw detector circuit 3700 which receives the WDG signal. The wnnd~ de~ector circult 3700 includes an up counter which is reset by the W~G ~'f~ :. .

1 320060 ~ignal, and a pair of comparators which detel~u~e whether or n~t the l.~, has been received wi~hin the predeter~m ed time window (e.g., 14 ms.).

If ~e WDC signal is received too e~rly or too late, or not received at all, then the Q output vf the w~ndow detector will ~wntch to a digital state. This wlll in turn drive the output of AND ~ate 3702 ~ ~.

The ~utput of the AND ga~e 3702 is c~nnected to a fault delay circult 3704 and tD a oonduc~or 3706. The fault delay circuit 3704 will give the MCU a predetermined time periGd ~e.g. 64-512 ms~) to transmit the 1^~ signal. qhis time period nay be altered between four different ~alues depending upon the particular voltage ~r ground oonnections .or the mput signals "DLYA" an~ "DLYB". In the meantlm~, ~he con*uctor 3706 will transmit the "~DFLT" feedback signal, and provide a way of separatel~ testin~ the operation o~ the wind~ ~etector 3700 and the fault delay circuit 3704 within the ~D circuit. The ~nductor 3706 is c~nnected to an in~ut of ~he AND gate 370~ t~x~gh the resistor 370~ and conductor 3710. Tb test the fault aelay circ~it 3704, the MCU will transmit the "DLY/~ION" ~ignal, w~ich will drive the AND gate 3704 LoW in order tQ si~ul~te the absenoe of the WD sional frcm the window detector circult 3700, If ~he WD signal is ~ot received within the ~ period oontrolled by the ~ault delay circuit 3704, then the AND gate 3712 will cwltch states, and cause the relay driver circuit Z219 t~ cut off po~r : thlough ~h~ logic o~nnections provided ~y OR gate 3714 an~ AND gate 3716. Ihe A~D gate ~712 also re oeives a "Latchdown" si y l from the ~elay driver clrcuit, which wlll pr~.vent the AND gate 3712 fram shitc ~ states again until the reset start-up 5equ~nce is initiated, even if the MCU tr2r.~smits a propex WDG ~i y l in the mtervening time , 1 320060 period. In other words, once the W~ circuit 2127 causes the rela~ driver circult Z219 to rem~,e electrical power from the solenoid driver cir ~ t 3~80, the resct start~up sequen oe m~st be ~ tiated before ~ow~r will be restored ~o the solenoid drivex circuit.

Ihe WD circuit is als~ responsive t~ a ~as~er kill signal "MX~ fr~m the MCV for removing power from the solenoid clriver circult 3280.

In other words, when the MCV determines that pGwer ~ ~ ld ~e removed for whatever reasGn, then the MK ~i~nal w~.ll b~ tran~ ~tted t~ the relay driver circuit throuo,h the AND gate 3716.

Another function of ~h~ WD circuit ~127 is bD control the reset start-up sequence which will occur, for example, when electrical pvwer is first applied to the transmi~sion controller 3010. ~en p~wer is first a~plied, this ~equence will be initiated hy the master reset fiignal "MRST", which is derived from an PC delav off the VDD p~r supply.

The reset start-up sequence may also be initiated from a filtered door entry signal "PEN~RY", Thi5 optional feature cruld be pr~vided when it is desired, for example, tD have the veh~cle electrically display th~ ~ ent PRNCDDL transmssion mode m respon~e to the open1ng o the vehicle door, prior to the ti~e that ~he key is inserted into ~ e vehicle igm tion. m e reset ~tart-up sequen oe n~5 also be initiated from an actuation of the ignition key, via the ignition signal "FJ2", The ~D circuit includes a pair of one shot mul~ivibrators 3718-3720, whi~h will :generate a ~mgle or one shot pulse cutput whenever the FENTRY or FJ2 signal~ are received. m e autput ~ram one shot 3718 i~ combmed with the F~2 signal ~t ~he AMD ga~e 3722, while .

A ~4~f .~, . .

1 320060 the out~ut of the one shot 3720 is fed directly t~ ~he NOR ~at~ 3724.

The output fro~ the NOR gate 3724 i5 aDnnected to ~he reset inp~t to the c~Lnter 3726. A~cordinglv, it shculd be a~preciated that the NOR gate 3724 serves to oombine all ~hose mputs which can ~ause a reset condition to be senerated.

The counter 3726 will generate the reset sic~al "MPURST~, which will be transmitted to thP MCU through the kuffer 3728. ~he counter 3726 will al~o generate a false OK signal cn ~onductor 3730, which i5 necessary to override or re~rerse the Latchdown si~nal. Thus, in the situation where the I~tchdc~ signal has been generated, ~he nomenta~y false OK signal .~Till allow re~enablement of the relay driver circuit Z219 through OR gate 3714 and P~ gate 3716. ~is re-enablement wiil, in turn, werride the state of the Latchdown signal, and pe:~ t electrical power to the solenoi~ driver circuit 3280 to be applied.

While the above describe~ reset start-up sequence will cause ~nly a m~ent~y MPURST signal to be transmitted to the I~CU, the h~ circuit also includes a provision for n~ir.taining ~he presence of this reset signal in response to predet~rmined regula'or oonditions. In this regard, it sh~uld ~e appreciated that the oontinued presence of the rese~ signal will disable the cQeration of the MCUI until proper operation of the regulat~r is restored and the reset signal ls r~moved (i.e. the digital state of this signal is changed).

As shown in Fiyure 30, the regulator ~ircuit Z215 will generate a power supply reset sional "PSRST", which wnll be transmitted to the NOR gate 3724 thrc~gh the XND gate 3730. This ~ower suppl~ re~et signal ~ A 1 320060 .~11 be generated whenever ~he m put voltage ~o ~he regulator i5 too low or t~o hi~h, or when ~e ~egulator i5 being overloaded.

This feature pro~ides for increased sy~tem inteyrity by hold1ng the MC~ 3251 and the ~ransmission oontroller 3010 in a predetermined RESET state under oe rtain oonditions inGluding ~hose ~hcwn in conjunction with Figure 32.

Here a reset cutput is ge~erated on ~he pG~ering down of a switch. In other w~rds, ~he Uperipherals" are reset on power-up.

An "additional" RESET node is pro~rided bv the regulator (a~ shown in Figure 32) ~hat m~st be gated out thrc~gh the watchdog/reset circuit shown in Figure 30; it also responds to the switching off of the second voltage regulator signal.

Another function of the WD circuit Z127 is ~ divide the turbine speed signal "Nt" down so ac ~o reduce the inte m ~t burden on the MCU.

Accordinglv, the WD circuit mcludes a programmable frequency divider 3732 which recelves the turbine speed 5ignal Nt. me divide control signals "DrV~" and "DIVB" from the MCV ar~ used to detenmine one of four different divide ratios to be empl~ed by the divider 3732.

It Ehould al'so be noted that the WD circuit includes a block 3734 which is labeled "prescaler/system clccks". This block comprises a tLmer with a prescaler which is used to provide both reset and start-up times, ~s well as the fault delay and window ~etector clock signals employed In the ~D cincuit.

The present ~nvention has been described in an illustrative n~r~er. It is to ~e understDod that the ~ermin~logy ~hich has been used is intended to be in the nature of w~rds of description rather than O~r tation.

.

A ~ 1 320060 ~ viously, many n~dific~tions and variations are possible in light of the above ~eachings.

Therefore, the subject invention may be practiced ~thenn.se thar. æ specifi~ally ~escribed.

, :

: : ~ .

,: ~ ~: :

' ' ,~ :

~:: ~ ,, :

.

. :

:

':,